2011 Chevrolet Corvette Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-55
Universal Remote System . . . . 5-64
Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Performance and
Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-18
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-28
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-36
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-54
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1
Additional Storage Features . . . 4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
iii
This manual describes features
that may or may not be on your
specific vehicle either because
they are options that you did
not purchase or due to changes
subsequent to the printing of this
owner manual. Please refer to the
purchase documentation relating
to your specific vehicle to confirm
each of the features found on your
vehicle. For vehicles first sold in
Canada, substitute the name
Canadian Vehicle Owners
Propriétaires Canadiens
A French language copy of this
manual can be obtained from your
dealer or from:
The names, logos, emblems,
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
ce guide en français auprès du
concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
suivante:
slogans, vehicle model names,
and vehicle body designs appearing
in this manual including, but
not limited to, GM, the GM logo,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET
Emblem, CORVETTE, CORVETTE
GRAND SPORT, Z06, and ZR1
are trademarks and/or service
marks of General Motors LLC, its
subsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors.
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
“General Motors of Canada Limited”
for Chevrolet Motor Division
wherever it appears in this manual.
1-800-551-4123
Numéro de poste 6438 de langue
française
Keep this manual the vehicle for
quick reference.
www.helminc.com
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 25961341 A First Printing
© 2010 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iv
Introduction
Using this Manual
Symbols
WARNING
{
To quickly locate information
about the vehicle, use the Index
in the back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the
manual and the page number
where it can be found.
The vehicle has components and
labels that use symbols instead of
text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or
information relating to a specific
component, control, message,
gauge, or indicator.
These mean there is something
that could hurt you or other
people.
Notice: This means there is
something that could result in
property or vehicle damage.
This would not be covered by
the vehicle's warranty.
Danger, Warnings, and
Cautions
Warning messages found on vehicle
labels and in this manual describe
hazards and what to do to avoid or
reduce them.
M : This symbol is shown when
you need to see your owner manual
for additional instructions or
information.
* : This symbol is shown when
you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
information.
Danger indicates a hazard with a
high level of risk which will result in
serious injury or death.
A circle with a slash through it
is a safety symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do not do this,” or
“Do not let this happen.”
Warning or Caution indicates a
hazard that could result in injury or
death.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
v
Vehicle Symbol Chart
# : Fog Lamps
. : Fuel Gauge
+ : Fuses
Here are some additional symbols
that may be found on the vehicle
and what they mean. For more
information on the symbol, refer
to the Index.
3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer
9 : Airbag Readiness Light
# : Air Conditioning
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
j : LATCH System Child
Restraints
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls
or OnStar®
} : Power
$ : Brake System Warning Light
" : Charging System
I : Cruise Control
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
O : Exterior Lamps
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
F : Traction Control
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
vi
Introduction
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-1
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-13
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Performance and Maintenance
Traction Control
System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-22
Z06, Z16, and ZR1
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-23
Driving for Better Fuel
Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Roadside Assistance
In Brief
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Vehicle Features
Initial Drive Information
Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-17
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-18
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Driver Information
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Sensing System for
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Roof Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Convertible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Passenger Airbag . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Steering Wheel
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-2
In Brief
Instrument Panel
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-3
A. Air Vents on page 8‑6.
J. AM-FM Radio on page 7‑5.
S. Telescopic Wheel Button
(If Equipped). See Steering
Wheel Adjustment on page 5‑2.
B. Head-Up Display (HUD) on
page 5‑31 (If Equipped).
K. Dual Automatic Climate Control
System on page 8‑1.
T. Ignition Positions on page 9‑20.
C. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever.
See Turn and Lane-Change
Signals (Auto Signal) on
page 6‑4.
L. Fuel Door Release Button. See
Filling the Tank on page 9‑51.
U. Heated Front Seats on page 3‑8
(If Equipped).
Hatch/Trunk Release Button.
See “Hatch/Trunk Lid Release”
under Hatch on page 2‑10.
V. Shift Lever (Automatic Shown).
See Automatic Transmission on
page 9‑28 or Manual
Cruise Control on page 9‑44.
Fog Lamps on page 6‑5.
M. Instrument Panel Illumination
Control on page 6‑5.
Transmission on page 9‑32.
Exterior Lamp Controls on
page 6‑1.
W. Active Handling System on
page 9‑37.
N. Data Link Connector (DLC).
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 5‑18.
D. Manual Shift Paddles
(If Equipped). See Automatic
Transmission on page 9‑28.
X. Power Outlets on page 5‑6.
O. Power Folding Top Switch
(If Equipped). See Convertible
Top on page 2‑22.
Y. Selective Ride Control on
page 9‑42.
E. Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 5‑25.
Z. Cupholders on page 4‑1.
AA. Ashtrays on page 5‑8.
P. Bluetooth on page 7‑18
F. Instrument Cluster on page 5‑9.
(If Equipped).
G. Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑4.
Cigarette Lighter on page 5‑7.
AB. Parking Brake on page 9‑35.
AC. Glove Box on page 4‑1.
Steering Wheel Controls on
page 5‑3 (If Equipped).
H. Driver Information Center (DIC)
Buttons. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑25.
Q. Steering Wheel Adjustment on
page 5‑2.
AD. Instrument Panel Fuse Block on
page 10‑55.
R. Horn on page 5‑4.
I. Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 6‑4.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-4
In Brief
3. Press and hold } for
approximately 1 second to
open the hatch/trunk.
Initial Drive
Information
This section provides a brief
overview about some of the
important features that may or may
not be on your specific vehicle.
4. Press L to sound the horn.
Press any other button on the
keyless access transmitter to
stop it.
For more detailed information, refer
to each of the features which can be
found later in this owner manual.
5. Press the button (A) to remove
the key. The key can be used
to lock and unlock the glove box
and to open the hatch/trunk lid
if power to the vehicle is lost.
See Hatch on page 2‑10 for
more information.
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System
The keyless access transmitter is
used to lock and unlock the doors
from up to 30 m (100 feet) away
from the vehicle.
1. Press K to unlock the driver
door. Press again within
five seconds to unlock both
doors.
See Keys on page 2‑2 and Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2‑3.
2. Press Q to lock all doors.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-5
From the inside, use the power door
lock switch (B), located at the top of
the door panel, near both windows.
Inside the Vehicle
Door Locks
From the outside, press the Q or K
button on the keyless access
transmitter.
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the
doors.
Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.
To open a door from the inside after
it is locked, press the button (C) in
front of the door handle and push
the door open.
See Power Door Locks on page 2‑9.
Loss of Vehicle Electrical
Power
Pull the door release handle located
on the floor next to the seat.
If the vehicle has lost battery power,
the driver door can be opened
manually.
When you have the transmitter with
you, you may also unlock and open
the door by squeezing the door
handle sensor (A).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-6
In Brief
Trunk Release
Windows
Seat Adjustment
Opening and Closing the
Hatch/Trunk
Manual Seats
There are three ways to open the
hatch/trunk:
.
Touch the button located above
the license plate. The Keyless
Access transmitter must be
within three feet of the button.
.
Press the V button located to
the left of the steering wheel.
.
Press the } button on the
Keyless Access transmitter.
The power window switches are
located on each door.
To adjust the seat:
For more information see Hatch on
page 2‑10.
Pull up or press down on the front
of the switch to raise or lower the
window.
1. Lift the bar under the front of the
seat cushion to unlock the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
position and release the bar.
For more information, see Power
Windows on page 2‑17.
3. Try to move the seat back and
forth to make sure it is locked in
place.
See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑2
for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-7
To adjust the seat:
Power Seats
Power Lumbar and Side
Bolsters
.
Move the seat forward or
rearward by sliding the control
forward or rearward.
.
Raise or lower the front part of
the seat cushion by moving the
front of the control up or down.
.
Raise or lower the rear part of
the seat cushion by moving the
rear of the control up or down.
See Power Seat Adjustment on
page 3‑3 for more information.
On vehicles with power seats, the
control is on the outboard side of
the seat.
On vehicles with power lumbar
and side bolsters, the controls are
located on the outboard side of
the seat.
To adjust the support:
.
Move (A) forward or rearward to
adjust lumbar support.
.
Move (B) up or down to adjust
the side bolsters.
See Lumbar Adjustment on
page 3‑6 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-8
In Brief
Reclining Seatbacks
Heated Seats
Memory Features
To recline the seatback:
On vehicles with heated seats, the
buttons are on the center console.
The ignition must be on for this
feature to work.
On vehicles with the memory
feature, the controls on the driver
door are used to program and recall
memory settings for the driver seat,
outside mirrors, and the telescopic
steering column.
1. Lift the lever on the outboard
side of the seat.
2. Move the seatback to the
desired position, and then
release the lever to lock the
seatback in place.
L : Press to turn on the heated
seat at the high setting.
Press again to switch to the low
setting.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
9 : Press to turn the system off.
See Reclining Seatbacks on
page 3‑6 for more information.
See Heated Front Seats on
page 3‑8 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-9
.
On vehicles with a manual
Storing Memory Positions
To save into memory:
transmission, when the vehicle
is on, the parking brake must be
set to recall a memory position.
Press and release “1” or “2.”
To save into memory:
1. Recall the desired driving
position by pressing “1.”
1. Adjust the driver seat, both
outside mirrors, and the
2. Adjust the seat and the
telescopic steering column
to the desired exit position.
telescopic steering column.
A single beep sounds and the
memory position is recalled after
a brief delay.
2. Press and hold “1” until
two beeps sound.
3. Press and hold B until
two beeps sound.
If the vehicle is on and the
parking brake is not set,
three beeps sound and the
3. Repeat for a second driver
position using “2.”
4. Repeat for a second driver
position using “2.”
To recall a memory position:
memory position is not recalled.
To recall an exit position, press
.
On vehicles with an automatic
See “Memory Seat, Mirrors, and
Steering Wheel” under Power Seat
Adjustment on page 3‑3 for more
information.
and release B. The vehicle must
be in P (Park) for an automatic
transmission or the parking
brake must be set for a manual
transmission. A single beep sounds.
The seat and telescopic steering
column will move to the position
previously stored for the identified
driver.
transmission, press and release
“1” or “2.”
If the vehicle is in P (Park), a
single beep sounds and the
memory position is recalled after
a brief delay.
Easy Exit Driver Seat
The easy exit driver seat feature
can move the seat rearward and the
telescopic steering column out of
the way to allow extra room to exit
the vehicle.
If the vehicle is not in P (Park),
three beeps sound and the
memory position is not recalled.
See “Memory Seat, Mirrors, and
Steering Wheel” under Power Seat
Adjustment on page 3‑3 for more
information.
B : Press to save and recall the
easy exit seat position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-10
In Brief
.
.
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑18.
Safety Belt
Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
(Coupe and Convertible Models
Only) on page 3‑43 or Lower
Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System)
(Z06 and ZR1 Models Only) on
page 3‑44.
United States
Sensing System for
Passenger Airbag
The passenger sensing system will
turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag and seat‐mounted
side impact airbag under certain
conditions. The driver airbags are
not affected by this.
Canada and Mexico
Refer to the following sections for
important information on how to use
safety belts properly.
See Passenger Sensing System on
page 3‑30 for important information.
.
Safety Belts on page 3‑9.
.
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly on page 3‑13.
The passenger airbag status
indicator will be visible in the
rearview mirror when the vehicle
is started.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-11
Keep the control in the center
position when not adjusting either
outside mirror.
Mirror Adjustment
Steering Wheel
Adjustment
Exterior Mirrors
See Power Mirrors on page 2‑15.
Manually fold the mirrors inward
to prevent damage when going
through an automatic car wash.
To fold, pull the mirror toward the
vehicle. Push the mirror outward,
to return it to the original position.
See Folding Mirrors on page 2‑16.
Interior Mirror
Vehicles with an automatic dimming
rearview mirror will automatically
reduce headlamp glare coming
from vehicles that are traveling
behind you.
The lever is located on the left side
of the steering column.
Controls for the outside power
mirrors are located on the
driver door.
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever toward you.
1. Move the top control to the left
or right to select either the driver
or passenger mirror.
See Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror on page 2‑16.
2. Move the steering wheel up
or down.
2. Use the arrows located on the
four-way control pad to move the
mirror in the desired direction.
3. Release the lever to lock the
steering wheel in place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-12
In Brief
To adjust the telescopic steering
column:
Reading Lamps
Telescopic Steering Column
The inside rearview mirror includes
two reading lamps. The lamps go on
when a door is opened. When the
doors are closed, press the lamp
buttons to turn on each lamp.
1. Push the switch forward to move
the wheel away from you.
2. Pull the switch toward you to
move the wheel closer to you.
Interior Light Control
The telescopic steering column
position can be stored with your
memory settings. See “Memory
Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel”
under Power Seat Adjustment on
page 3‑3 for more information.
To adjust the brightness of the
interior lights, turn and hold the
instrument panel brightness control
knob located on the left side of the
instrument panel. Push the knob in
to turn the lights on or off.
Interior Lighting
For vehicles with this feature, the
telescopic steering column switch
is located on the right side of the
steering column.
For more information on interior
lighting, see:
Courtesy Lamps
.
Instrument Panel Illumination
When any door or the hatch/trunk lid
is opened, the interior lamps will go
on, unless it is bright outside.
Control on page 6‑5.
.
Entry/Exit Lighting on page 6‑6.
The courtesy lamps can also be
turned on and off by pressing the
instrument panel brightness knob.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-13
Exterior Lighting
5 : Turns on the headlamps
together with the parking lamps,
sidemarker lamps, taillamps, license
plate lamps and instrument panel
lights.
Windshield Wiper/Washer
Turn and Lane-Change Signal
The turn signal lever has two
upward and downward positions
to signal a lane change or a turn.
Exterior Lamps
The exterior lamp control is located
to the left of the steering wheel, on
the multifunction lever.
.
For a lane change, raise or
lower the lever. The signal
automatically flashes three
times.
O : Turn the band with this symbol
on it to operate the exterior lamps.
The windshield wiper lever is
located on the right side of the
steering column.
.
For a turn, raise or lower the
O : Turns off all lamps.
lever all of the way up or down.
The turn signal will stop flashing
when the turn is completed.
AUTO: Sets the exterior lamps
to automatic mode. AUTO mode
turns the exterior lamps on and off
depending on how much light is
available outside the vehicle.
1 : Fast wipes.
6 : Slow wipes.
For more information, see:
.
Exterior Lamp Controls on
& : Use to set a delay between
page 6‑1.
wipes.
; : Turns on the parking lamps
together with the sidemarker lamps,
taillamps, license plate lamps and
instrument panel lights.
.
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
x : Use for a delayed wiping
cycle. Turn the intermittent adjust
band down for a longer delay or up
for a shorter delay.
(Auto Signal) on page 6‑4.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-14
In Brief
9 : Turns off the windshield
Climate Controls
wipers.
With this system, the heating, cooling, and ventilation can be controlled.
8 : Use for a for a single wiping
cycle. For more wipes, hold the
band longer.
Windshield Washer: Press the
button at the end of the lever until
the washers begin.
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑4.
A. Driver Temperature Control
B. Display
G. Fan Control
H. Air Delivery Mode Control
I. Defrost
C. Passenger Temperature Control
D. AUTO
J. Rear Window Defogger
E. Air Recirculation
F. Air Conditioning
See Dual Automatic Climate Control
System on page 8‑1.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-15
wheel spokes, to manually up-shift
to the next gear, or pulling on the
paddle, behind the steering wheel
spokes to manually down-shift.
The current gear will be displayed
in the Driver Information (DIC),
or the Head-Up Display (HUD),
if the vehicle has either of these
features.
One to Four Shift Light
(Manual Transmission)
Transmission
Manual Paddle Shift
(Automatic Transmission)
On vehicles with a manual
The Manual Paddle Shift system
can be deactivated by moving the
shifter from S (Sport Mode) back to
D (Drive), or by holding the up‐shift
button for more than one second.
transmission, when this light comes
on, you can only shift from 1 (First)
to 4 (Fourth) instead of 1 (First) to
2 (Second).
For more information about shifting
for the best fuel economy, see
Manual Transmission on page 9‑32.
The Manual Paddle Shift system
will not allow either an up-shift or a
down-shift, if the vehicle speed is
too fast or too slow, nor will it allow
a start from 4 (Fourth) or higher gear
To operate the Manual Paddle Shift
system, the automatic transmission
shifter must be in S (Sport Mode).
The system is activated by pushing
the paddle, above the steering
See Automatic Transmission on
page 9‑28.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-16
In Brief
t SEEK u : Press to seek
stations.
Vehicle Features
Radio(s)
t SCAN u : Press and hold to
scan stations.
4 : Press to change the information
that shows on the display while
listening to the radio.
For more information about these
and other radio features, see
Introduction on page 7‑1 and
Operation on page 7‑2.
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 30 stations (6 FM1, 6 FM2,
and 6 AM, and if equipped, 6 XM1,
and 6 XM2) can be programmed.
To program presets:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1,
FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2.
Radio with CD
Top Knob (Power/Volume): Press
to turn the system on and off. Turn
to increase or decrease the volume.
BAND: Press to switch between
FM1, FM2, AM, and if equipped,
XM1 and XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the
equalization.
O e : Turn to select radio
stations.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-17
5. Press and hold one of the six
numbered pushbuttons until the
radio beeps once.
Satellite Radio
XM is a satellite radio service
that is based in the 48 contiguous
United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM satellite radio has a
wide variety of programming and
commercial-free music, coast to
coast, and in digital-quality sound.
Portable Audio Devices
This vehicle may have an auxiliary
input jack, located on the audio
faceplate. External devices such
as iPod®, MP3 players, etc. can
be connected to the auxiliary input
jack using a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input
jack cable.
6. Repeat the steps for each
pushbutton.
See Operation on page 7‑2.
Setting the Clock
To set the clock:
A fee is required to receive the
XM service.
See “Using the Auxiliary Input
Jack” under Auxiliary Devices on
page 7‑17.
1. Press and hold H until the
correct hour displays.
For more information, refer to:
.
2. Press and hold M until the
correct minute displays.
www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 (U.S.)
.
See Clock on page 5‑6.
www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-438-9677 (Canada)
See “XM Satellite Radio Service”
under Satellite Radio on page 7‑8.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-18
In Brief
Bluetooth®
Steering Wheel Controls
b g : Press to turn on and off the
vehicle speakers. Press and hold
longer than two seconds to interact
with the OnStar® or Bluetooth
systems.
For vehicles with a Bluetooth
system, it allows users with a
Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone
to make and receive hands-free
calls using the vehicle’s audio
system and controls.
c : Press to reject an incoming
call, or to end a call.
e + / e − : Increases or decreases
volume.
The Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone
must be paired with the Bluetooth
system before it can be used in the
vehicle. Not all phones will support
all functions. For more information,
visit www.gm.com/bluetooth.
w / x : Press to change radio
stations or select tracks on a CD.
1 to 6 (Preset Pushbuttons):
Press to play stations that are
programmed on the radio preset
pushbuttons.
For more information, see Bluetooth
on page 7‑18.
For vehicles with steering wheel
controls, some audio controls can
be adjusted at the steering wheel.
For more information, see Steering
Wheel Controls on page 5‑3.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-19
Cruise Control
Navigation System
The vehicle's navigation system
(if equipped) provides detailed maps
of most major freeways and roads
throughout the United States and
Canada. After a destination has
been set, the system provides
turn-by-turn instructions for reaching
the destination. In addition, the
system can help locate a variety
of points of interest (POI), such
as banks, airports, restaurants,
and more.
The DIC buttons are located on the
instrument panel to the right of the
instrument panel cluster.
See the Navigation System manual
for more information.
The cruise controls are located at
the end of the multifunction lever.
. 4 : Press to display fuel
information such as fuel economy
and range.
9 : Turns the system off.
R : Turns the system on.
+ : Use to make the vehicle
accelerate or resume a previously
set speed.
Driver Information
Center (DIC)
The DIC display is located at the
bottom of the instrument panel
cluster. It shows the status of
2 : Press to display gauge
information like oil pressure and
temperature, coolant temperature,
automatic transmission fluid
temperature (if equipped), battery
voltage, and front/rear tire
pressures.
many vehicle systems and enables
access to the personalization menu.
T : Press the button at the end of
the lever to set the speed.
See Cruise Control on page 9‑44.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-20
In Brief
TRIP: Press to display your total
and trip distance driven, the elapsed
time function, your average speed,
and the engine oil life.
Vehicle Personalization
Power Outlets
The accessory power outlet can be
used to plug in electrical equipment,
such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
Some vehicle features can be
programmed by using the DIC
buttons on the left side of the
steering wheel. The features that
can be programmed include:
OPTION: Press to choose personal
options that are available on your
vehicle, depending on the options
your vehicle is equipped with, such
as door locks, easy entry seats, and
language.
The accessory power outlet is
located inside the center console
storage compartment, on the
forward left side.
.
Units
.
.
.
.
.
.
Memory Features
Remove the cover to access and
replace when not in use.
Lighting Features
RESET: Press, along with the other
buttons, to reset system functions,
select personal options, and turn
off or acknowledge messages on
the DIC.
Lock and Unlock Feedback
Door Lock and Unlock Settings
Language
See Power Outlets on page 5‑6.
Roof Panel
Personalization Name
On vehicles with a removable
roof panel, there are three release
latches. Two are located on the front
of the roof panel and the other is
located on the back of the roof
panel. See “Removing the Roof
Panel” under Roof Panel on
page 2‑18.
For more information, see Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑25.
See Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑55.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-21
Until you are sure you can remove
the roof panel by yourself, have
someone help you. Once removed,
the roof panel should always be
stored properly in the rear storage
compartment.
The vehicle has an Active
Handling System that helps
maintain directional control of
the vehicle in difficult driving
conditions. See Active Handling
System on page 9‑37.
Performance and
Maintenance
Traction Control
System (TCS)
The traction control system limits
wheel spin. The system turns on
automatically every time the vehicle
is started.
For more information:
The vehicle may have
Competitive Driving Mode
(except ZR1), Performance
Traction Management (ZR1),
and Launch Control systems
designed to allow increased
performance while accelerating
and cornering. See Competitive
Driving Mode on page 9‑38.
.
See “Storing the Roof Panel”
under Roof Panel on page 2‑18.
.
See “Installing the Roof Panel”
.
under Roof Panel on page 2‑18.
To turn off traction control,
press and release d on the
Convertible
console. d illuminates and
the appropriate DIC message
displays. See Ride Control
System Messages on page 5‑44.
If equipped, the convertible top can
be lowered and stowed under the
tonneau cover behind the seats.
For step-by-step instructions, see
Convertible Top on page 2‑22.
Towing
The vehicle was neither designed
nor intended to be towed with any of
its wheels on the ground.
.
Press and release the button
again to turn on traction control.
See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 9‑36.
See Towing the Vehicle on
page 10‑86 and Recreational
Vehicle Towing on page 10‑86.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-22
In Brief
indicator that the tire pressures are
getting low and the tires need to be
inflated to the proper pressure.
Jump Starting the Battery
Tire Pressure Monitor
This vehicle may have a Tire
The battery of ZO6, ZR1, and
manual transmission Z16 (Grand
Sport) coupe models is in the rear
of the vehicle. You do not need to
access the battery for jump starting.
There are remote positive (+) and
negative (−) terminals under the
hood for this purpose. See Battery
on page 10‑43 and Jump Starting
on page 10‑82.
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
The TPMS does not replace normal
monthly tire maintenance. It is the
driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressures.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 10‑68.
The TPMS warning light alerts you
to a significant loss in pressure of
one of the vehicle's tires. If the
warning light comes on, stop as
soon as possible and inflate the
tires to the recommended pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑14. The warning
light will remain on until the tire
pressure is corrected.
Z06, Z16, and ZR1
Features
Brake Noise
Under certain weather or operating
conditions, occasional brake noise
might be heard with the vehicle's
performance braking system.
This brake system is designed
for superior fade resistance and
consistent operation using high
performance brake pads. Brake
noise is normal and does not affect
system performance. See Braking
on page 9‑3.
Checking Engine Oil
ZO6, ZR1, and manual transmission
Z16 (Grand Sport) coupe models
have a high performance dry sump
lubrication system. This system
operates differently than a standard
engine lubrication system.
See Engine Oil on page 10‑15.
During cooler conditions, the low tire
pressure warning light may appear
when the vehicle is first started and
then turn off. This may be an early
You should check the oil level
only after the engine has been
thoroughly warmed up and then
shut off for at least five minutes.
This ensures that the oil level
reading obtained will be accurate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-23
Car Wash Guidelines
Engine Oil Life System
Driving for Better Fuel
Economy
Automatic car washes are not
recommended for this vehicle.
Some car washes cause damage
to the vehicle, the wheels, and the
convertible top, if the vehicle is so
equipped.
The engine oil life system calculates
engine oil life based on vehicle
use and displays a DIC message
when it is necessary to change the
engine oil and filter. The oil life
system should be reset to 100%
only following an oil change.
Driving habits can affect fuel
mileage. Here are some driving
tips to get the best fuel economy
possible.
.
Avoid fast starts and accelerate
If you drive the vehicle through an
automatic car wash that does not
have enough clearance for the
undercarriage and/or wide rear tires
and wheels, you could damage the
vehicle. Verify with the manager of
the car wash that the vehicle will fit
before entering the car wash or use
a touchless car wash. See “Washing
Your Vehicle” under Exterior Care
on page 10‑86.
smoothly.
Resetting the Oil Life System
.
Brake gradually and avoid
1. Press the TRIP button so
the OIL LIFE percentage is
displayed.
abrupt stops.
.
Avoid idling the engine for long
periods of time.
2. Press RESET and hold for
two seconds. OIL LIFE
.
When road and weather
conditions are appropriate, use
cruise control, if equipped.
REMAINING 100% will appear.
See Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑22.
.
Always follow posted speed
limits or drive more slowly when
conditions require.
.
Keep vehicle tires properly
inflated.
.
Combine several trips into a
single trip.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-24
In Brief
.
Replace the vehicle's tires with
the same TPC Spec number
molded into the tire's sidewall
near the size.
Roadside Assistance and OnStar
Roadside Assistance
Program
If you have a current OnStar
subscription, press the Q button
and the current GPS location will
be sent to an OnStar advisor who
will assess your problem, contact
Roadside Assistance, and relay
your exact location to get the help
you need.
U.S.: 1-800-243-8872
.
Follow recommended scheduled
maintenance.
TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438
Canada: 1-800-268-6800
Premium Fuel
As the owner of a new Chevrolet,
you are automatically enrolled in
the Roadside Assistance program.
This program provides technically
trained advisors who are available
24 hours a day, 365 days a year,
to give minor repair information or
make towing arrangements.
This vehicle's engine was designed
to use premium unleaded gasoline.
See Recommended Fuel on
page 9‑48.
Online Owner Center
The Online Owner Center is a
complimentary service that includes
online service reminders, vehicle
maintenance tips, online owner
manual, special privileges,
and more.
Battery
This vehicle has a maintenance free
battery. See Battery on page 10‑43
and Jump Starting on page 10‑82.
For more information see Roadside
Assistance Program (United States
and Canada) on page 13‑8 or
Roadside Assistance Program
(Mexico) on page 13‑10.
Sign up today at:
www.chevyownercenter.com
(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).
For ZO6, ZR1, and manual
transmission Z16 (Grand Sport)
coupe models the battery is
located in the rear hatch/trunk
area. Access to the battery is
not necessary to jump start the
vehicle. There are positive (+) and
negative (−) terminals in the engine
compartment.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-25
OnStar®
] : Push this red emergency
button to get priority help from
specially trained OnStar emergency
advisors.
For a full description of OnStar
services and system limitations,
see the OnStar Owner's Guide in
the glove box.
OnStar service is subject to the
OnStar terms and conditions
included in the OnStar Subscriber
Information.
X : Push this button for hands‐free,
voice‐activated calling and to give
voice commands for turn‐by‐turn
navigation.
OnStar® uses several innovative
technologies and live advisors to
provide a wide range of safety,
security, navigation, diagnostics,
and calling services.
OnStar service cannot work unless
the vehicle is in a place where
OnStar has an agreement with a
wireless service provider for service
in that area. OnStar service also
cannot work unless the vehicle is
in a place where the wireless
service provider OnStar has hired
for that area has coverage, network
capacity and reception when the
service is needed, and technology
that is compatible with the OnStar
service. Not all services are
Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle
Assistance, Vehicle Diagnostics,
Remote Door Unlock, Roadside
Assistance, Turn‐by‐Turn
Navigation and Hands‐Free
Calling are available on most
vehicles. Not all OnStar services
are available on all vehicles.
For more information see the
OnStar Owner's Guide or visit
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
Automatic Crash Response
In a crash, built in sensors can
automatically alert an OnStar
advisor who is immediately
connected to the vehicle to
see if you need help.
www.onstar.ca (Canada), contact
OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY
How OnStar Service Works
available everywhere, particularly
in remote or enclosed areas, or at
all times.
Q : This blue button connects you
to a specially trained OnStar advisor
to verify your account information
and to answer questions.
1‐877‐248‐2080, or press Q to
speak with an OnStar advisor
24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-26
In Brief
The OnStar system can record
and transmit vehicle information.
This information is automatically
sent to an OnStar call center when
Q is pressed, ] is pressed, or if
the airbags or ACR system deploy.
This information usually includes
the vehicle's GPS location and,
in the event of a crash, additional
information regarding the crash that
the vehicle was involved in (e.g. the
direction from which the vehicle was
hit). When the virtual advisor feature
of OnStar hands-free calling is
used, the vehicle also sends OnStar
the vehicle's GPS location so they
can provide services where it is
located.
The vehicle must have a working
electrical system, including
On some vehicles, the mute button
can be used to dial numbers into
voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner's
Guide for more information.
adequate battery power, for the
OnStar equipment to operate.
There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent
OnStar from providing OnStar
service at any particular time or
place. Some examples are damage
to important parts of the vehicle in
a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels,
weather or wireless phone network
congestion.
Your Responsibility
Increase the volume of the radio if
the OnStar advisor cannot be heard.
If the light next to the OnStar
buttons is red, the system may
not be functioning properly.
Press Q and request a vehicle
diagnostic. If the light appears clear
(no light is appearing), your OnStar
subscription has expired and all
services have been deactivated.
OnStar Steering Wheel
Controls
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute
button that can be used to interact
with OnStar hands-free calling.
See Steering Wheel Controls on
page 5‑3 for more information.
Press Q to confirm that the OnStar
equipment is active.
Location information about the
vehicle is only available if the GPS
satellite signals are unobstructed
and available.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-1
Exterior Mirrors
Keys, Doors and
Windows
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . 2-16
Keys and Locks
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . 2-10
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Interior Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Windows
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Roof
Doors
Roof Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Convertible Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Vehicle Security
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . 2-12
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-2
Keys, Doors and Windows
to open the hatch/trunk lid if power
to the vehicle is lost. See Hatch on
page 2‑10 for more information.
Keys and Locks
Keys
WARNING
{
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the keyless access transmitter is
dangerous for many reasons,
children or others could be badly
injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the
vehicle move. The windows will
function with the keyless access
transmitter in the vehicle and they
could be seriously injured or killed
if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keyless
access transmitter in a vehicle
with children.
Press the button (A) near the bottom
of the keyless access transmitter to
remove the key. Never pull the key
out without pressing the button.
This vehicle has a keyless access
system with pushbutton start. See
Ignition Positions on page 9‑20 for
information on starting the vehicle.
The key, located inside the keyless
access transmitter, can be used to
lock and unlock the glove box and
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
Remote Keyless Entry
2-3
Notice: If you ever lose your
transmitter(s) and/or key, it
could be difficult to get into your
vehicle. You may even have to
damage your vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have a spare
If there is a decrease in the RKE
operating range:
(RKE) System Operation
.
Check the distance.
The Keyless Access System
transmitter functions work up to
30 m (100 feet) away from the
vehicle.
The transmitter may be
too far from the vehicle.
.
Check the location. Other
transmitter and/or key.
vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
If you are locked out of the vehicle,
contact Roadside Assistance.
See Roadside Assistance Program
(United States and Canada) on
page 13‑8 or Roadside Assistance
Program (Mexico) on page 13‑10.
Keyless Unlocking
.
.
Press the door handle sensor to
unlock and open the doors if the
keyless access transmitter is within
range. See Door Locks on page 2‑8
and “Passive Door Unlock” under
Vehicle Personalization on
Check the transmitter's battery.
See “Battery Replacement” later
in this section.
If the transmitter is still not
working correctly, see your
dealer or a qualified technician
for service.
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System
page 5‑55 for additional information.
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑19 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission
(FCC) rules and Industry Canada
Standards RSS-210/220/310.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-4
Keys, Doors and Windows
Keyless Locking
There are other conditions that
can affect the performance of the
transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑3.
K (Unlock): Press once to unlock
The doors lock after
only the driver door. Press K twice
within five seconds to unlock both
doors. The interior lamps may
come on.
several seconds if all doors
are closed and at least one
keyless access transmitter
has been removed from the
interior of the vehicle. To customize
whether the doors automatically
lock when exiting the vehicle,
see “Passive Door Locking”
under Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑55 for additional information.
Pressing K also recalls the memory
settings. See “Memory Seat, Mirrors
and Steering Wheel” under Power
Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3 for
more information.
} (Hatch/Trunk): Press and
hold for about one second to
unlock the hatch/trunk. If the
engine is running, the shift lever
must be in P (Park) for an automatic
transmission. For a manual
transmission, the shift lever must
be in NEUTRAL with the parking
brake set.
Keyless Trunk Opening
Press the hatch/trunk release
button located on the rear of
the hatch/trunk lid above the
license plate to open the trunk
if the keyless access transmitter
is within range. See Hatch on
page 2‑10 for additional information.
This vehicle comes with two
transmitters.
Q (Lock): Press once to lock the
doors. When Q is pressed twice,
the lights flash and the horn sounds
to confirm locking.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-5
reprogrammed so that lost or stolen
L (Panic): Press to sound the
horn. Press any other button on the
keyless access transmitter to stop it.
transmitters no longer work.
Each vehicle can have up to
four transmitters programmed to it.
The vehicle comes with
Programming with a Recognized
Transmitter
two transmitters. Each transmitter
will have a number on top of
it, “1” or “2”. These numbers
A new transmitter can be
correspond to the driver of the
vehicle. For example, the memory
seat position for driver 1 will be
recalled when using the transmitter
labeled “1”, if enabled through the
DIC. See “Memory Seat, Mirrors
and Steering Wheel” under Power
Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3
and Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑55 for more information.
programmed to the vehicle when
there is one recognized transmitter.
For vehicles sold in Canada, two
recognized transmitters are required
to program a new transmitter.
7. Place the new transmitter in
the glove box transmitter pocket
with the buttons facing the
passenger side.
1. The vehicle must be off.
2. Both the recognized and new
transmitters must be with you.
8. A beep sounds once
3. Insert the vehicle key into the
key cylinder located above the
license plate.
programming in complete.
The DIC displays READY FOR
#3 or 4, or MAXIMUM NUMBER
OF FOBS LEARNED.
Programming Transmitters to
the Vehicle
4. Open the hatch/trunk.
Only keyless access transmitters
programmed to this vehicle will
work. If a transmitter is lost or
stolen, a replacement can be
purchased and programmed through
your dealer. The vehicle can be
5. Turn the key five times within
five seconds.
6. The DIC displays READY FOR
FOB #2, 3 or 4.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-6
Keys, Doors and Windows
9. To program additional
The Canadian immobilizer standard
requires that Canadian owners see
their dealer for programming new
transmitters when two recognized
transmitters are not available.
4. Open the hatch/trunk.
transmitters, repeat Step 7.
Press Acc. on the ignition switch
if programming is complete.
5. Turn the key five times within
five seconds.
6. The DIC message displays
OFF-ACCESSORY TO LEARN.
10. Press K on each newly
programmed transmitter to
complete the process.
1. The vehicle must be off.
7. Press Acc. on the ignition
switch.
Programming without a
Recognized Transmitter
8. The DIC reads WAIT
10 MINUTES and counts
down to zero.
This procedure requires three
ten minute cycles to complete
the programming process.
United States owners are permitted
to program a new transmitter to
their vehicle when a recognized
transmitter is not available.
9. The DIC displays
OFF-ACCESSORY TO
LEARN again.
10. Press Acc. on the ignition
switch.
11. Steps 8, 9 and 10 will be
repeated two more times.
2. Place the new transmitter in the
glove box transmitter pocket
with the buttons facing the
passenger side.
12. A beep sounds and the DIC
reads READY FOR FOB #1.
All previously known
transmitter programming
has been erased.
3. Insert the vehicle key into the
key cylinder located above the
license plate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-7
13. A beep sounds once
programming in complete.
The DIC displays READY
FOR FOB #2.
Starting the Vehicle with a Low
Transmitter Battery
If the transmitter battery is weak,
the DIC may display NO FOBS
DETECTED when trying to start the
vehicle. To start the vehicle, place
the transmitter in the glove box
transmitter pocket with the buttons
facing the passenger side. Then,
with the vehicle in P (Park) for an
automatic transmission, press the
To program additional
transmitters, take transmitter 1
out of the transmitter pocket
and place transmitter 2 in
the pocket. Up to four
transmitters can be
programmed. The DIC then
displays MAXIMUM NUMBER
OF FOBS LEARNED and exits
the programming mode.
brake pedal and /. If the vehicle
has a manual transmission, press
1. Separate the transmitter with a
flat, thin object inserted into the
slot on the side or back of the
transmitter.
the clutch and /. Replace the
transmitter battery as soon as
possible. Change the transmitter
battery if the DIC displays
FOB BATTERY LOW.
Press Acc. on the ignition
switch to complete the process.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not
use a metal object.
14. Press Acc. on the ignition
switch if programming is
complete.
3. Insert the new battery, positive
side facing down. Replace with a
CR2032 or equivalent battery.
Battery Replacement
15. Press K on each newly
programmed transmitter to
complete the process.
Notice: When replacing the
battery, do not touch any of
the circuitry on the transmitter.
Static from your body could
damage the transmitter.
4. Reassemble the transmitter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-8
Keys, Doors and Windows
Door Locks
WARNING (Continued)
WARNING
{
.
Young children who get into
unlocked vehicles may be
unable to get out. A child can
be overcome by extreme heat
and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from
heat stroke. Always lock
your vehicle whenever you
leave it.
Unlocked doors can be
dangerous.
.
Passengers — especially
children — can easily open
the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a
door is locked it will not open.
You increase the chance
of being thrown out of the
vehicle in a crash if the doors
are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and
lock the doors whenever
you drive.
When you have the transmitter with
you, you may also unlock and open
the door by squeezing the door
handle sensor (A). You do not have
to press the unlock button on the
transmitter. You will be able to open
the door when you press the door
handle sensor and the vehicle
recognizes your keyless access
transmitter. When the passenger
door is opened first, the driver's
door will also unlock.
.
Outsiders can easily enter
through an unlocked door
when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your
doors can help prevent this
from happening.
(Continued)
There are several ways to lock and
unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, press the lock or
unlock button on the keyless access
transmitter.
From the inside, use the power door
lock switch (B) located at the top of
the door panel near both windows.
See Power Door Locks on page 2‑9.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
Power Door Locks
2-9
To open a door from the inside,
press the button (C) in front of the
door handle and push the door
open. You will hear a tone when
the button is pressed.
The power door lock switches are
located on the doors.
There is an indicator light on the
rear of the door near the window.
If power to the vehicle or the
keyless access transmitter is
lost, there are two ways to open
the door.
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the
doors.
When pressed, a beep sounds.
If the door is closed, the light blinks
twice. If the door is open, the light
flashes.
2. From outside the vehicle, use
the key in the cylinder above the
license plate to open the hatch.
Then, use the door release
tab (A), located on the carpet
inside the hatch on the driver's
side of the vehicle. Pull the
tab to unlock and unlatch the
driver's door. See Keys on
page 2‑2 for information on
opening the hatch during a
loss of power.
Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.
When pressed, a beep sounds.
If the door is closed when
pressed, the light comes on for
a few seconds, then turns off.
If the door is open when pressed,
the light stays on.
1. From inside the vehicle, use
the door release handle located
on the floor next to each seat.
Pull the handle up to unlock and
unlatch the door.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-10
Keys, Doors and Windows
With the vehicle stopped and the
engine running, door unlocking
can be programmed through the
Driver Information Center (DIC).
This allows the driver to choose
various unlock settings.
For programming information,
see Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑55.
Automatic Door Locks
Doors
The vehicle is programmed so that,
when the doors are closed, the
ignition is on and the shift lever is
moved out of P (Park) for automatic
transmissions, or when vehicle
speed becomes faster than 13 km/h
(8 mph) for manual transmissions,
both doors will lock.
Hatch
WARNING
{
Exhaust gases can enter the
vehicle if it is driven with the
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or
with any objects that pass
through the seal between the
body and the trunk/hatch or
liftgate. Engine exhaust contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled. It can
cause unconsciousness and even
death.
Lockout Protection
Use the power door unlock switch to
unlock the door when the vehicle is
not in P (Park). When the door is
closed again, the doors will lock
either when your foot is removed
from the brake or the vehicle
speed becomes faster than
Your vehicle can be programmed
to sound the horn three times and
unlock the driver door when both
doors are closed and there is a
keyless access transmitter inside
the vehicle. When the driver door
is opened, a reminder chime will
sound continuously. The vehicle will
remain locked only when at least
one transmitter has been removed
from the vehicle and both doors are
closed. See Vehicle Personalization
on page 5‑55.
13 km/h (8 mph).
Automatic Door Unlock
If the vehicle must be driven with
the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:
The vehicle is programmed so that
when the shift lever is moved into
P (Park) for automatic transmission
vehicles or when the ignition is
turned OFF or is in Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) for manual
transmission vehicles, both doors
will unlock.
.
Close all of the windows.
.
Fully open the air outlets
on or under the instrument
panel.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-11
Notice: Do not store heavy or
WARNING (Continued)
sharp objects in the rear storage
compartments located in the
hatch/trunk area. The objects
could damage the underbody.
.
Adjust the Climate Control
system to a setting that
brings in only outside air
and set the fan speed to the
highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
Hatch/Trunk Lid Release
There are several ways to release
the hatch/trunk lid. If your vehicle
has an automatic transmission,
the shift lever must be in P (Park).
For manual transmission vehicles,
the parking brake must be set
when the ignition is started for
the hatch/trunk release to operate.
The parking brake does not need
to be set when the ignition is off for
the hatch/trunk release to operate.
See Parking Brake on page 9‑35.
.
If the vehicle is equipped with
a power liftgate, disable the
power liftgate function.
Press the hatch/trunk release button
located on the rear of the hatch/
trunk lid above the license plate, as
long as you have your transmitter
with you.
For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑26.
Notice: Closing the hatch/trunk
lid forcefully or from the sides
can cause damage to the glass,
the defogger or the weather
stripping. Be sure objects will fit
in the hatch/trunk area before
closing the hatch/trunk lid. When
closing the hatch/trunk lid, gently
pull down from the center.
If your vehicle has lost battery
power, open the hatch/trunk using
the vehicle key. See Keys on
page 2‑2 for more information.
The key lock cylinder is located on
the rear of the hatch/trunk lid above
the license plate. Turn the vehicle
key clockwise in the lock.
V (Hatch/Trunk) : Press this
button, located on the instrument
panel to the left of the steering
wheel. The theft-deterrent alarm
system must not be armed.
} (Hatch/Trunk) : Press this
button on the keyless access
transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑3.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-12
Keys, Doors and Windows
Closing the Rear Compartment
(Except Convertible)
when securing items in the trunk
as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release
handle is only intended to aid a
person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk
from the inside.
Vehicle Security
This vehicle has theft-deterrent
features; however, they do not make
it impossible to steal.
To close the rear compartment lid of
your coupe, pull down on the rear
edge of the lid. Lower it until the
power pull down latch feature
activates and it will close the rest
of the way and latch automatically.
Anti-Theft Alarm System
This vehicle has a theft-deterrent
alarm system.
There is a glow-in-the-dark
emergency trunk release handle
located on the rear wall of the trunk
below the latch. This handle will
glow following exposure to light.
Pull the release handle down to
open the trunk from the inside.
Emergency Trunk Release
Handle (Coupe)
The security light flashes if a door
is open and locked with the power
door lock switch.
If this light stays on while the engine
is running, the vehicle needs
service.
Notice: Do not use the
emergency trunk release handle
as a tie-down or anchor point
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-13
battery power. The vehicle will not
start without a keyless access
transmitter present.
5. Reach through the open window
and manually pull the release
lever on the floor.
Arming the System
To arm the system:
.
Press Q on the keyless access
transmitter.
The theft-deterrent system does not
arm if the driver door is locked with
the power door lock switch after the
doors are closed.
6. Press the unlock button on the
transmitter to turn off the alarm.
.
Open the door and lock the
If the alarm does not sound, check
to see if the horn works. The horn
fuse may be blown. See Fuses and
Circuit Breakers on page 10‑51.
If the horn works, but the alarm
does not go off, see your dealer.
door with the power door lock
switch. The security light should
flash. Remove the keyless
access transmitter from inside
the vehicle and close the door.
The security light stops flashing
and stays on. After 30 seconds,
the light should turn off.
If the keyless access transmitter is
removed from the vehicle while a
passenger is in it, have them lock
the doors after they are closed.
The alarm will not arm, so the
passenger will not set it off.
Disarming the System
Press the unlock button on the
keyless access transmitter or
squeeze the door handle sensor
while the transmitter is near the
vehicle to unlock a door. Unlocking
a door any other way sets off the
alarm. If the alarm sounds, press
the unlock button on the keyless
access transmitter to disarm it.
Testing the Alarm
The vehicle can be programmed
to automatically lock the doors
and arm the theft-deterrent
system when you exit the
vehicle. See Vehicle
To test the system:
1. Make sure the trunk lid/hatch is
latched.
2. Lower the window on the
driver door.
Personalization on page 5‑55.
If a door or the hatch/trunk is
opened without using the keyless
access transmitter, the alarm
goes off. The horn sounds for
two minutes, then goes off to save
3. Manually arm the system.
Do not leave the key or device that
disarms or deactivates the theft
deterrent system in the vehicle.
4. Close the doors and wait
30 seconds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-14
Keys, Doors and Windows
The system has one or more
the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 10‑51. If the
engine still does not start with the
other transmitter, the vehicle needs
service. If the engine does start,
the first transmitter may be faulty.
See your dealer or have a new
keyless access transmitter
Immobilizer
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑19 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission
(FCC) rules and Industry Canada
Standards RSS-210/220/310.
keyless access transmitters that are
matched to an immobilizer control
unit in the vehicle. Only a correctly
matched keyless access transmitter
starts the vehicle. The vehicle may
not start if the keyless access
transmitter is damaged.
programmed to the vehicle.
If the engine does not start and the
security light comes on, there may
be a problem with the immobilizer
system. Press the START button
again.
Immobilizer Operation
The vehicle has a passive
theft-deterrent system.
The immobilizer system can
learn new or replacement keyless
access transmitters. Up to four
keyless access transmitters can
be programmed for the vehicle.
To program additional transmitters,
see “Matching transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle” under Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 2‑3.
The system is automatically armed
when the ignition is turned off.
If the vehicle does not start and
the keyless access transmitter
appears to be undamaged, try
another keyless access transmitter.
Or, place the transmitter in the
transmitter pocket. See “NO FOBS
DETECTED” under Key and Lock
Messages on page 5‑42 for
The immobilization system is
disarmed when the ignition is turned
to OFF/ACCESSORY or START and
a valid transmitter is found in the
vehicle.
Do not leave the key or device that
disarms or deactivates the theft
deterrent system in the vehicle.
You do not have to manually arm or
disarm the system.
additional information. Check
The security light comes on if
there is a problem with arming
or disarming the theft-deterrent
system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-15
To adjust the mirrors:
Power Mirrors
Exterior Mirrors
1. Move the top selector control to
the left or right to select either
the driver or passenger mirror.
Convex Mirrors
2. Use the arrows located on the
four-way control pad to move the
mirror in the desired direction.
WARNING
{
A convex mirror can make things,
like other vehicles, look farther
away than they really are. If you
cut too sharply into the right lane,
you could hit a vehicle on the
right. Check the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
3. Adjust each outside mirror so
that a little of the vehicle and the
area behind it can be seen.
Keep the control in the center
position when not adjusting either
outside mirror.
Controls for the outside power
mirrors are located on the
driver door.
If the vehicle has the memory
feature, a preferred mirror position
can be stored. See Power Seat
Adjustment on page 3‑3.
The passenger side mirror is convex
shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
curved so more can be seen from
the driver seat.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-16
Keys, Doors and Windows
Folding Mirrors
P (On/Off): The automatic
dimming feature is activated
when the vehicle is started.
Press and hold this button for
up to six seconds to turn this
feature on or off.
Interior Mirrors
Manually fold the mirrors inward
to prevent damage when going
through an automatic car wash.
To fold, pull the mirror toward the
vehicle. Push the mirror outward,
to return it to the original position.
Automatic Dimming
Rearview Mirror
Vehicles with an automatic dimming
inside rearview mirror, compass
display, and/or map lamps, and
OnStar® will automatically change
to reduce glare from headlamps
behind you. A time delay feature
prevents rapid changing from the
day to night positions while driving
under lights and through traffic.
If the vehicle has OnStar®, there
are three control buttons located at
the bottom of the mirror. See the
OnStar® owner's guide for more
information on the services OnStar®
provides.
T (Indicator Light): This light turns
on when the automatic dimming
feature is active.
Heated Mirrors
Map Lamps
< (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to heat the mirrors.
If the mirror has map lamps, they
are located at the bottom of the
mirror. To manually turn the lamps
on or off, press the button next to
each lamp.
See “Rear Window Defogger” under
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System on page 8‑1 for more
information.
Cleaning the Mirror
Automatic Dimming
Mirror
If the vehicle has this feature, the
driver side outside mirror adjusts for
the glare of headlamps behind you.
This feature is controlled by the
on and off setting on the inside
rearview mirror.
Do not spray glass cleaner directly
on the mirror. Use a soft towel
dampened with water.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
Power Windows
2-17
Windows
WARNING
{
Leaving children, helpless adults,
or pets in a vehicle with the
windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by
the extreme heat and suffer
permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a
child, a helpless adult, or a pet
alone in a vehicle, especially with
the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
The power window switches are
located on each door.
Pull up or press down on the front
of the switch to raise or lower the
window.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
allows you to use the power
windows when the ignition is off.
For more information, see Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 9‑21.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-18
Keys, Doors and Windows
Express-Down Window
Power Window Initialize
Roof
Press the front of the switch to
the second position to activate the
express-down feature. If you want
to stop the window as it is lowering,
press the switch again.
After a power reconnect such as
battery replacement, the window
index‐up feature will not function
until the system is initialized.
Roof Panel
On vehicles with a removable roof
panel, follow the procedures when
removing or installing it.
Once power is restored:
1. Close the door.
Window Indexing
Removing the Roof Panel
This feature automatically lowers
the window a small amount when
the door is opened. When the door
is closed, the window will raise to
its full up position. If either window
does not index properly, it could
be due to loss of power. Before
returning to your dealer for service,
perform the power window initialize
procedure.
2. Raise the window and hold the
switch up for three seconds after
the window is closed.
WARNING
{
Do not try to remove a roof panel
while the vehicle is moving.
3. Release the switch, then
hold the switch up again for
three seconds and release.
Trying to remove the roof panel
while the vehicle is moving could
cause an accident. The panel
could fall into the vehicle and
cause you to lose control, or it
could fly off and strike another
vehicle. You or others could be
injured. Remove the roof panel
only when the vehicle is parked.
Sun Visors
Pull the visor toward you, or move it
to the side to help reduce glare.
To use the lighted mirror, lift the
cover.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-19
Until you are sure you can remove
the panel alone, have someone
help you.
5. Lower the windows.
There are two release latches on
the front of the roof panel and
one rear release latch on the
back of the roof panel.
Notice: If you drop or rest a roof
panel on its edges, the roof panel,
paint and/or weatherstripping
may be damaged. Always place
the roof panel in the stowage
receivers after removing it from
the vehicle.
1. Park on a level surface and set
the parking brake. Shift an
automatic transmission into
P (Park). Shift a manual
The driver's side handle
moves toward the driver's
door. The passenger's side
handle moves toward the
passenger's door.
transmission into N (Neutral).
2. Make sure the ignition is off.
3. Lower both sun visors.
6. To unlock the release latches on
the front of the roof panel, grasp
each handle and pull it outward.
4. Open the rear hatch and remove
any items that may interfere with
proper storage of the roof panel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-20
Keys, Doors and Windows
8. Stand on one side of the vehicle,
Notice: If you drop or rest a roof
panel on its edges, the roof panel,
paint and/or weatherstripping
may be damaged. Always place
the roof panel in the stowage
receivers after removing it from
the vehicle.
and if necessary, have someone
stand on the other side.
Together, carefully lift the front
edge of the roof panel up and
forward.
9. When the roof panel is loosened
from the vehicle, one person
1. Turn the roof panel so that the
front edge of the panel is facing
the storage area.
should grasp the roof panel as
close to the center as possible
and lift it away from the vehicle.
Storing the Roof Panel
7. To unlock the rear of the roof
panel's rear release latch,
press the back of the release
handle (B). Then press the
button on the front of the
release handle (A).
WARNING
{
If a roof panel is not stored
properly, it could be thrown about
the vehicle in a crash or sudden
maneuver. People in the vehicle
could be injured. Whenever you
store a roof panel in the vehicle,
always be sure that it is stored
securely in the proper location.
Pull down the latch lever.
2. Insert the roof panel so that
the outside front edges line up
between the receiver covers.
Push forward on the roof panel
until it stops.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-21
In most cases, it makes it easier if
two people install the roof panel.
Installing the Roof Panel
WARNING
{
1. Park on a level surface and
set the parking brake. Shift
an automatic transmission
into P (Park). Shift a manual
transmission into N (Neutral).
An improperly attached roof panel
may fall into or fly off the vehicle.
You or others could be injured.
After installing the roof panel,
always check that it is firmly
attached by pushing up on the
underside of the panel. Check
now and then to be sure the roof
panel is firmly in place.
2. Check that the front release
latches and the rear release
latch on the vehicle's roof
opening are in their opened
positions before attempting
to install the roof panel.
3. Gently place the roof panel
down so that the back pins on
the roof panel drop into the
receivers in the back of the
storage area.
3. To remove the roof panel from
the rear storage area of the
vehicle, pull up on the rear
edge and remove it from the
storage area.
Notice: If you drop or rest a roof
panel on its edges, the roof panel,
paint and/or weatherstripping
may be damaged. Always place
the roof panel in the stowage
receivers after removing it from
the vehicle.
Press down firmly to seat the pins in
the receivers.
4. Carefully place the roof panel
over the top of the vehicle.
5. Position the rear edge of the
roof panel to the weatherstrip
on the back of the roof opening.
Then align and fit the pins at the
rear of the roof panel inside the
openings in the rear overhead
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-22
Keys, Doors and Windows
weatherstrip. Gently lower the
front edge of the roof panel to
the front of the roof opening.
If water drops are frequently allowed
to dry on the roof panel, impurities
in the water will adhere to the top.
These impurities may etch or mar
the finish. When the panel gets wet,
dry it off.
Removable Roof Panel
Notice: If you use a glass
treatment and/or conditioner
that contains ethyl alcohol or
ethyl sulfate on the roof panel,
you could damage the panel.
The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Only use a
GM-approved glass cleaner on
the roof panel.
Convertible Top
Manual Operation
For care and cleaning of the
Special care is necessary when
cleaning, removing, and/or storing
the roof panel.
convertible top, see “Cleaning the
Convertible Top” in this section.
High pressure car washes may
cause water to enter the vehicle.
.
Flush with water to remove dust
and dirt, then dry the panel.
If the vehicle has this feature, the
following procedures explain the
proper operation of the manual
convertible top.
6. Turn the front release handles
inward so that they latch to the
closed position.
.
Clean a transparent roof panel
with GM Glass Cleaner. Leave
the cleaner on the panel for
one minute, then wipe the panel
with a soft, lint-free cloth. Do not
use glass cleaner on a painted
roof panel.
7. Push up on the handle of the
rear roof release handle to latch
its hook in the closed position.
8. Push and pull the roof panel up
and down and side-to-side to
ensure the roof panel is securely
installed.
.
Do not use abrasive cleaning
materials on either type of panel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-23
The parts of the manual convertible
top that are used when lowering and
raising it are:
Notice: Leaving the convertible
top down and exposing the
interior of your vehicle to outdoor
conditions may cause damage.
Always close the convertible top
if leaving your vehicle outdoors.
Notice: If you raise or lower
the convertible top while the
vehicle is in motion, you could
damage the top or the top
mechanism. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty.
Always put an automatic
transmission in (P) Park
or a manual transmission
in (N) Neutral before raising or
lowering the convertible top.
Notice: Lowering the convertible
top when there are objects in the
storage area could damage it or
break the glass rear window.
Always verify that no objects
are in the storage area before
lowering the convertible top.
Lowering the Manual
Convertible Top
Notice: Lowering the top if it is
damp, wet, or dirty can cause
stains, mildew, and damage to
the inside of your vehicle. Dry off
the top before lowering it.
1. Park on a level surface. Shift
an automatic transmission into
P (Park) and set the parking
brake. Shift a manual
A. Front Edge of the
Convertible Top
transmission into N (Neutral)
and set the parking brake.
B. Rear Edge of the
Convertible Top
Notice: If you lower the top on
your vehicle in cold weather
(0°F/-18°C or lower), you may
damage top components. Do not
lower the top in cold weather.
2. Make sure the ignition is off.
3. Make sure the trunk is closed.
C. Tonneau Cover
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-24
Keys, Doors and Windows
4. The convertible top front latch,
located above the inside
5. Lift upward on the front edge (A)
of the convertible top off of the
windshield frame. Then lift
7. Tilt the driver's seatback forward
and press the tonneau cover
release button located on the
underside of the tonneau
rearview mirror, must be
unlocked. Pull the convertible
top front latch down and turn
it clockwise to unlock it.
upward on the rear edge (B)
of the convertible top so it is
vertical to the tonneau cover (C).
The front edge (A) and rear
cover (C) behind the driver's
seat. Then raise the tonneau
cover (C). If the tonneau
edge (B) should be straight up.
cover does not release and
three chimes are heard, check to
make sure the trunk lid is closed.
Also, the cover will not release
if the vehicle alarm is armed.
6. The convertible top front latch
must be turned and closed after
the top has been pushed up.
Failure to close the latch may
prevent the tonneau cover from
completely closing.
After pressing the release
button, the driver's and
passenger's door glass should
retract to the full-down position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-25
If the vehicle has lost battery
power, the tonneau cover (C)
can still be opened using the
manual release cable.
The tonneau cover emergency
manual release cable is located
underneath the carpeting behind
the passenger's seat head
restraint, on the underside
forward edge of the tonneau
cover. To access the cable,
lift and pull back the carpeting.
Also, see Hatch on page 2‑10
for information on the
8. Pull the cable to release the
tonneau cover.
9. Push forward on the front
edge (A) of the convertible top
to allow the rear edge (B) of the
convertible top to be moved to
its full-down position.
emergency trunk release
handle.
Notice: If you lower the
convertible top into the storage
compartment and the rear edge
of the top is not in the full-down
position, you could damage the
top. Always verify that the rear
edge of the convertible top is in
the full-down position before
lowering the top into the storage
compartment.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-26
Keys, Doors and Windows
Raising the Manual
Convertible Top
1. Park on a level surface. Shift
an automatic transmission into
P (Park) and set the parking
brake. Shift a manual
transmission into N (Neutral)
and set the parking brake.
2. Lower both windows.
3. Make sure the ignition is off.
4. Tilt the driver's seat forward
and press the tonneau cover
release button, or use the
10. Then move the top rearward to
its fully-stored position.
6. Pull the convertible top up by
firmly gripping the front edge (A)
near the center and applying a
brisk upward and forward motion
to get the top in the full-up
position.
manual release cable if battery
power has been lost. See Step 6
under “Lowering the Manual
Convertible Top” in this section.
11. After the top is stored, apply
one even push on the center
of the front edge (A) of the
convertible top to assure that
the top is fully retracted.
After pressing the release
button, the driver's and
passenger's door glass should
retract to the full-down position,
if they have not already been
lowered.
12. Close the tonneau cover (B) by
pressing down on it with a
swift, firm motion.
5. Lift the tonneau cover.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-27
8. Close the tonneau cover (C) by
pushing it down with a swift, firm
motion.
9. Lower the rear edge (B) of the
convertible top by first slightly
pushing the front edge (A) of the
convertible top forward.
10. Push the front edge (A) of
the convertible top down from
the outside of the vehicle,
or pull the front edge (A) of
the convertible top down from
the center pull-down handle
located in the inside of the
vehicle.
7. Lift the rear edge (B) of the
convertible top to its full-up
position by first raising the front
edge (A).
11. Pull the top front latch
handle down and turn it
counterclockwise to lock
the convertible top.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-28
Keys, Doors and Windows
Notice: If you lower the top on
your vehicle in cold weather
(0°F/-18°C or lower), you may
damage top components. Do not
lower the top in cold weather.
2. Make sure the trunk is closed
and the rear trunk partition in
the rear storage area is in the
fastened upright position, and
that no objects are forward of
the divider. See “Rear Trunk
Partition” under Rear Storage on
page 4‑1.
Power Operation
For care and cleaning of the
convertible top see “Cleaning the
Convertible Top” in this section.
High pressure car washes may
cause water to enter the vehicle.
Notice: If you raise or lower the
convertible top while the vehicle
is in motion, you could damage
the top or the top mechanism.
The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always put
an automatic transmission
in (P) Park or a manual
To operate the power convertible
top use the following steps.
Notice: Leaving the convertible
top down and exposing the
interior of your vehicle to outdoor
conditions may cause damage.
Always close the convertible top
if leaving your vehicle outdoors.
transmission in (N) Neutral
before raising or lowering the
convertible top.
Notice: Lowering the convertible
top when there are objects in the
storage area could damage it or
break the glass rear window.
Always verify that no objects
are in the storage area before
lowering the convertible top.
Lowering the Power
Convertible Top
1. Park on a level surface. Start
the engine. Shift an automatic
transmission into P (Park) and
set the parking brake. Shift
a manual transmission into
N (Neutral), and set the parking
brake.
3. Release the convertible top front
latch, located above the inside
rearview mirror, by pulling and
turning it clockwise toward the
driver's door. Push upward on
the front edge. The windows will
automatically lower.
Notice: Lowering the top if it is
damp, wet, or dirty can cause
stains, mildew, and damage to the
inside of your vehicle. Dry off the
top before lowering it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-29
4. Return the convertible top front
latch to the closed position.
The convertible top will lower into
the rear of the vehicle. A chime will
sound when the convertible top has
lowered completely. If the radio is
on the sound may be muted for a
brief time due to a new audio
Raising the Power Convertible Top
Notice: If you raise or lower
the convertible top while the
vehicle is in motion, you could
damage the top or the top
mechanism. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty.
Always put an automatic
transmission in (P) Park
or a manual transmission
in (N) Neutral before raising or
lowering the convertible top.
system equalization being loaded.
If the convertible top is operated
multiple times, the engine should
be running to prevent drain on the
vehicle's battery. Under certain
conditions, the Driver Information
Center (DIC) may display a
message regarding the power
convertible top. See Convertible
Top Messages on page 5‑37 for
more information.
1. Park on a level surface. Start
the engine. Shift an automatic
transmission into P (Park) and
set the parking brake. Shift
a manual transmission into
N (Neutral) and set the parking
brake.
5. Push and hold the bottom of the
power convertible top button,
located to the left of the steering
wheel, on the instrument panel.
2. Make sure the trunk lid is closed
and the rear trunk partition in
the rear storage area is in the
fastened upright position, and
that no objects are forward of
the divider. See “Rear Trunk
Partition” under Rear Storage on
page 4‑1.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-30
Keys, Doors and Windows
3. Push and hold the top of the
power convertible top button.
The top will raise and the
windows will lower if they were
in the raised position. A chime
will sound when the top is raised
completely.
If the radio is on the sound may be
muted for a brief time due to a new
audio system equalization being
loaded.
front top latch locked in place, at the
time the convertible top button was
released.
If the vehicle has lost power, the
convertible top can still be raised
by releasing pressure on the
4. After the convertible top is
completely raised, release the
power convertible top button.
hydraulic pump, located under the
passenger's side of the tonneau
cover, by using the following steps.
The carpet liner on the passenger's
side must be pulled back to access
the hydraulic pump.
Never attempt to open or close
the power top manually without
releasing pressure first.
1. Open the tonneau cover by
pulling the emergency release
cable.
Manual operation of the power
convertible top cannot be attempted
for five minutes from the last time
the convertible top button was
pressed if the top is not completely
stowed, with the top down and the
tonneau latched, or closed, with the
The tonneau cover emergency
release cable is located behind
the passenger's seat head
restraint, on the underside
forward edge of the tonneau
cover. Also, see Hatch on
5. Pull the convertible front
top latch down and turn it
counterclockwise to lock
the convertible top.
page 2‑10 for information on the
emergency trunk release handle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-31
Be careful when opening
4. Use the wrench, located in the
If the power convertible top is
the tonneau cover by hand.
If the tonneau cover is opened
quickly, damage can occur to the
hinging mechanism, which can
prevent proper operation of the
convertible top.
console, and turn the pressure
release bolt counterclockwise
one revolution, to relieve
pressure to the hydraulic pump.
This will allow you to manually
raise the convertible top.
operated multiple times, the engine
should be running to prevent
drain on the vehicle's battery.
Under certain conditions, the
Driver Information Center (DIC)
may display a message regarding
the power top. See Convertible Top
Messages on page 5‑37 for more
information.
2. Pull back the carpet liner on the
passenger's side to access the
hydraulic pump.
5. Then follow the steps under
raising the manual convertible
top. See “Manual Operation”
or “Power Operation” in this
section.
If the battery has been
disconnected, the power windows
must be initialized for the power top
to operate. See Power Windows on
page 2‑17 for more information.
When power is restored to the
vehicle, the hydraulic bolt must be
tightened, by turning it clockwise.
The power convertible top button
can then be used to lower or raise
the convertible top.
3. Locate the pressure release
bolt on the front side of the
hydraulic pump.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-32
Keys, Doors and Windows
Wet the entire vehicle and wash the
top evenly to avoid spots or rings.
Let the soap remain on the fabric
for a few minutes. When the top is
really dirty, use a mild foam-type
cleaner. Thoroughly rinse the entire
vehicle, then let the top dry in direct
sunlight.
Cleaning the Convertible Top
The vehicle's convertible top should
be cleaned often. However, high
pressure car washes may cause
water to enter your vehicle.
When you hand wash the top, do it
in partial shade. Use a mild soap,
lukewarm water and a soft sponge.
A chamois or cloth may leave lint on
the top, and a brush can chafe the
threads in the top fabric. Do not use
detergents, harsh cleaners, solvents
or bleaching agents.
To protect the convertible top:
.
After you wash the vehicle,
make sure the top is completely
dry before you lower it.
.
Do not get any cleaner on the
vehicle's painted finish; it could
leave streaks.
.
If you decide to go through an
automatic car wash, ask the
manager if the equipment could
damage your top.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
Child Restraints
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-41
Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
(Coupe and Convertible
Models Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
(Z06 and ZR1
3-1
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-21
Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Replacing Safety Belt System
Seats and
Restraints
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Airbag System
Head Restraints
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-24
When Should an Airbag
Front Seats
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
How Does an Airbag
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Passenger Sensing
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-3
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Seatback Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Models Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Replacing LATCH System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Securing Child Restraints . . . . 3-48
Safety Belts
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-35
Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-36
Replacing Airbag System
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-2
Seats and Restraints
To move a manual seat forward or
rearward:
Head Restraints
The vehicle's front seats have head
restraints in the outboard seating
positions that cannot be adjusted.
Front Seats
Seat Adjustment
Manual Seats
The front seat outboard head
restraints are not designed to be
removed.
WARNING
{
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push
a pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
1. Lift the bar under the front edge
of the seat cushion to unlock
the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
position and release the bar.
Try to move the seat back and forth
to be sure the seat is locked in
place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-3
To adjust the seat:
Memory Seat, Mirrors, and
Steering Wheel
Power Seat Adjustment
.
Move the seat forward or
rearward by sliding the control
forward or rearward.
.
Raise or lower the front part of
the seat cushion by moving the
front of the control up or down.
.
Raise or lower the rear part of
the seat cushion by moving the
rear of the control up or down.
On vehicles with power seats, the
control is on the outboard side of
the seat.
On vehicles with the memory
feature, the controls on the driver
door are used to program and recall
memory settings for the driver seat,
outside mirrors, and the telescopic
steering column, if equipped.
The numbers on the back of
the keyless access transmitters
correspond to the numbers on
the memory buttons.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-4
Seats and Restraints
.
On vehicles with a manual
Storing Memory Positions
The automatic recall feature can be
turned on or off using the vehicle
personalization menu. See “Auto
Memory Recall” under Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑55 for
more information.
transmission, when the vehicle
is on, the parking brake must be
set to recall a memory position.
Press and release “1” or “2.”
To save into memory:
1. Adjust the driver seat, both
outside mirrors, and the
telescopic steering column,
if equipped.
A single beep sounds and the
memory position is recalled after
a brief delay.
To stop recall movement, press one
of the power seat controls, power
mirror or memory buttons, or the
telescopic steering column switch.
2. Press and hold “1” until
two beeps sound.
If the vehicle is on and the
parking brake is not set,
three beeps sound and the
3. Repeat for a second driver
position using “2.”
If something has blocked the driver
seat while recalling a memory
position, the recall may stop.
Remove the obstruction; then
press and hold the appropriate
manual control for the memory item
that is not recalling for two seconds.
Try recalling the memory position
again by pressing the appropriate
memory button. If the memory
position is still not recalling,
memory position is not recalled.
To recall a memory position:
Memory Remote Recall
(Automatic Transmission)
.
On vehicles with an automatic
transmission, press and release
“1” or “2.”
The memory feature can recall
the driver seat, outside mirrors,
and telescopic steering column,
if equipped, to stored positions
when entering the vehicle.
If the vehicle is in P (Park), a
single beep sounds and the
memory position is recalled
after a brief delay.
To activate memory remote recall,
enter the vehicle and start the
engine. The driver seat, outside
mirrors, and telescopic steering
column will move to the memory
position associated with the
transmitter used to unlock the
vehicle.
If the vehicle is not in P (Park),
three beeps sound and the
memory position is not recalled.
see your dealer for service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-5
Easy Exit Driver Seat
To recall an exit position, press
and release B. The vehicle must
be in P (Park) for an automatic
transmission or the parking
brake must be set for a manual
transmission. A single beep sounds.
The seat and telescopic steering
column will move to the position
previously stored for the identified
driver.
If something has blocked the driver
seat while recalling the exit position,
the recall may stop. Remove the
obstruction; then press and hold
the power seat control rearward for
two seconds. Try recalling the exit
position again. If the exit position is
still not recalling, see your dealer for
service.
The easy exit driver seat feature
can move the seat rearward and
the telescopic steering column,
if equipped, out of the way to allow
extra room to exit the vehicle.
B (Easy Exit Driver Seat): Press
to save and recall the easy exit seat
position.
See “Auto Exit Recall” under Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑55 for
more information.
To save into memory:
If the easy exit seat feature is
programmed on in the vehicle
personalization menu, automatic
recall occurs when one of the
following conditions is met:
1. Recall the desired driving
position by pressing “1.”
2. Adjust the seat and the
telescopic steering column
to the desired exit position.
.
The vehicle is turned off,
in Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) or accessory
mode, and the driver door is
opened.
3. Press and hold B until
two beeps sound.
4. Repeat for a second driver
position using “2.”
.
The vehicle is turned off, or in
RAP, and the unlock button on
the keyless access transmitter
is pressed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-6
Seats and Restraints
The seats have manual reclining
seatbacks. The lever used to
operate them is on the outboard
side of the seats.
Lumbar Adjustment
Reclining Seatbacks
Power Lumbar and Side
Bolsters
WARNING
{
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
WARNING
{
To recline the seatback:
1. Lift the lever.
On vehicles with power lumbar and
side bolsters, the controls are on the
outboard side of the seat.
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
2. Move the seatback to the
desired position, and then
release the lever to lock the
seatback in place.
To adjust the support:
.
Move (A) forward or rearward to
adjust lumbar support.
.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
Move (B) up or down to adjust
the side bolsters.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-7
To return the seatback to the upright
position:
WARNING (Continued)
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
front of you. In a crash, you could
go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
seatback, and the seatback will
return to the upright position.
The lap belt cannot do its
job either. In a crash, the belt
could go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there,
not at your pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal
injuries.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
WARNING
{
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job when reclined like this.
Do not have a seatback reclined if
your vehicle is moving.
For proper protection when the
vehicle is in motion, have the
seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the
safety belt properly.
The shoulder belt cannot do its
job because it will not be against
your body. Instead, it will be in
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-8
Seats and Restraints
To return the seatback upright,
lift up on the latch and push the
seatback rearward. The seatback
must be locked in place.
Seatback Latches
Heated Front Seats
WARNING
{
If you cannot feel temperature
change or pain to the skin,
the seat heater may cause
burns even at low temperatures.
To reduce the risk of burns,
people with such a condition
should use care when using
the seat heater, especially for
long periods of time. Do not
place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as
a blanket, cushion, cover or
similar item. This may cause
the seat heater to overheat.
An overheated seat heater may
cause a burn or may damage
the seat.
WARNING
{
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
To fold a seatback forward, lift the
latch on top of the backside of the
seat. The seatback locks when
folded down.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-9
Safety Belts
This section of the manual
WARNING
{
It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area, inside or outside
of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that
is not equipped with seats and
safety belts. Be sure everyone in
your vehicle is in a seat and using
a safety belt properly.
describes how to use safety belts
properly. It also describes some
things not to do with safety belts.
WARNING
{
Do not let anyone ride where
a safety belt cannot be worn
properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing
safety belts, the injuries can be
much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be
ejected from the vehicle. You
and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be,
if you are buckled up. Always
fasten your safety belt, and
check that your passenger(s)
are restrained properly too.
On vehicles with heated seats, the
buttons are on the center console.
The ignition must be on for this
feature to work.
This vehicle has indicators as a
reminder to buckle the safety belts.
See Safety Belt Reminders on
page 5‑16 for additional information.
L (Heated Seat) : Press to turn the
heated seat on at the high setting.
Press again to switch to the low
setting.
9 (Off) : Press to turn the heated
seat off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-10
Seats and Restraints
In most states and in all Canadian
provinces, the law requires wearing
safety belts. Here is why:
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything,
you go as fast as it goes.
You never know if you will be in
a crash. If you do have a crash,
you do not know if it will be a
serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some
crashes can be so serious that even
buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in
between. In many of them, people
who buckle up can survive and
sometimes walk away. Without
safety belts they could have been
badly hurt or killed.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose
it is just a seat on wheels.
After more than 40 years of safety
belts in vehicles, the facts are clear.
In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-11
Get it up to speed. Then stop the
vehicle. The rider does not stop.
The person keeps going until
stopped by something. In a real
vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-12
Seats and Restraints
Q: If I am a good driver, and I
never drive far from home,
why should I wear safety
belts?
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
after a crash if I am wearing a
safety belt?
A: You may be an excellent driver,
but if you are in a crash — even
one that is not your fault — you
and your passenger(s) can be
hurt. Being a good driver does
not protect you from things
beyond your control, such as
bad drivers.
A: You could be — whether you
are wearing a safety belt or not.
But your chance of being
conscious during and after an
accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if
you are belted. And you can
unbuckle a safety belt, even if
you are upside down.
or the safety belts!
Most accidents occur within
40 km (25 miles) of home.
And the greatest number of
serious injuries and deaths
occur at speeds of less than
65 km/h (40 mph).
With safety belts, you slow down
as the vehicle does. You get more
time to stop. You stop over more
distance, and your strongest bones
take the forces. That is why safety
belts make such good sense.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why
should I have to wear safety
belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental
systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of
them. Whether or not an airbag
is provided, all occupants still
have to buckle up to get the
most protection. That is true
not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other
collisions.
Safety belts are for everyone.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-13
First, before you or your
passenger(s) wear a safety belt,
there is important information you
should know.
worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic
bones and you would be less likely
to slide under the lap belt. If you
slid under it, the belt would apply
force on your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries.
The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly
This section is only for people of
adult size.
Be aware that there are special
things to know about safety belts
and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and
infants. If a child will be riding in
the vehicle, see Older Children on
page 3‑37 or Infants and Young
Children on page 3‑39. Follow those
rules for everyone's protection.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a
sudden stop or crash.
It is very important for all occupants
to buckle up. Statistics show that
unbelted people are hurt more
often in crashes than those who
are wearing safety belts.
Sit up straight and always keep
your feet on the floor in front of you.
The lap part of the belt should be
Occupants who are not buckled up
can be thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety
belts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-14
Seats and Restraints
Q: What is wrong with this?
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING
{
You can be seriously hurt if your
shoulder belt is too loose. In a
crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase
injury. The shoulder belt should fit
snugly against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose.
It will not give as much
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will
not give nearly as much
protection this way.
protection this way.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-15
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING
WARNING
{
{
You can be seriously hurt if your
lap belt is too loose. In a crash,
you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries.
The lap belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
You can be seriously injured
if your belt is buckled in the
wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would
be there, not on the pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt
into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong
buckle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-16
Seats and Restraints
Q: What is wrong with this?
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING
{
You can be seriously injured if
your belt goes over an armrest
like this. The belt would be much
too high. In a crash, you can slide
under the belt. The belt force
would then be applied on the
abdomen, not on the pelvic
bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure
the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under
the arm. It should be worn over
the shoulder at all times.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-17
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING
WARNING
{
{
You can be seriously injured
if you wear the shoulder belt
under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward,
which would increase the chance
of head and neck injury. Also,
the belt would apply too much
force to the ribs, which are not
as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure
internal organs like your liver or
spleen. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
You can be seriously injured
by not wearing the lap-shoulder
belt properly. In a crash, you
would not be restrained by the
shoulder belt. Your body could
move too far forward increasing
the chance of head and neck
injury. You might also slide under
the lap belt. The belt force would
then be applied right on the
abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-18
Seats and Restraints
Q: What is wrong with this?
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle
have a lap-shoulder belt.
WARNING
{
You can be seriously injured by a
twisted belt. In a crash, you would
not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt
is twisted, make it straight so it
can work properly, or ask your
dealer to fix it.
The following instructions explain
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt
properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is
adjustable, so you can sit up
straight. To see how, see “Seats”
in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull
the belt across you. Do not let it
get twisted.
A: The belt is twisted across
the body.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
you pull the belt across you very
quickly. If this happens, let the
belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-19
If the shoulder portion of a
passenger belt is pulled out
all the way, the child restraint
locking feature may be engaged.
If this happens, let the belt go
back all the way and start again.
Engaging the child restraint
locking feature in the right front
seating position may affect the
passenger sensing system.
See Passenger Sensing System
on page 3‑30 for more
3. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
4. To make the lap part tight, pull
up on the shoulder belt.
information.
Pull up on the latch plate to
make sure it is secure. If the belt
is not long enough, see Safety
Belt Extender on page 3‑21.
It may be necessary to pull
stitching on the safety belt
through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller
occupants.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-20
Seats and Restraints
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy
This vehicle has safety belt
pretensioners for the front outboard
occupants. Although the safety
belt pretensioners cannot be seen,
they are part of the safety belt
assembly. They can help tighten
the safety belts during the early
stages of a moderate to severe
frontal and near frontal crash if the
threshold conditions for pretensioner
activation are met. And, for vehicles
with side impact airbags, safety belt
pretensioners can help tighten the
safety belts in a side crash.
Safety belts work for everyone,
including pregnant women. Like all
occupants, they are more likely to
be seriously injured if they do not
wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, push the button
on the buckle. The belt should
return to its stowed position.
Before a door is closed, be sure the
safety belt is out of the way. If a
door is slammed against a safety
belt, damage can occur to both the
safety belt and the vehicle.
Pretensioners work only once.
If the pretensioners activate in a
crash, they will need to be replaced,
and probably other new parts for
the vehicle's safety belt system.
See Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts After a Crash on page 3‑22.
A pregnant woman should wear
a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap
portion should be worn as low as
possible, below the rounding,
throughout the pregnancy.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-21
The best way to protect the fetus is
to protect the mother. When a safety
belt is worn properly, it is more likely
that the fetus will not be hurt in a
crash. For pregnant women, as for
anyone, the key to making safety
belts effective is wearing them
properly.
has been designed for adults.
Never use it for securing child seats.
To wear it, attach it to the regular
safety belt. For more information,
see the instruction sheet that comes
with the extender.
Make sure the safety belt reminder
light is working. See Safety Belt
Reminders on page 5‑16 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry.
See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑21.
Safety System Check
Safety Belt Care
Keep belts clean and dry.
Now and then, check that the safety
belt reminder light, safety belts,
buckles, latch plates, retractors,
and anchorages are working
properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts
that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job. See your dealer
to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
safety belts may not protect you in
a crash. They can rip apart under
impact forces. If a belt is torn or
frayed, get a new one right away.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten
around you, you should use it.
WARNING
{
But if a safety belt is not long
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
It may severely weaken them.
In a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
enough, your dealer will order you
an extender. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you
will wear, so the extender will be
long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone
else use it, and use it only for the
seat it is made to fit. The extender
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-22
Seats and Restraints
After a minor crash, replacement of
safety belts may not be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that
were used during any crash may
have been stressed or damaged.
See your dealer to have the safety
belt assemblies inspected or
replaced.
Replacing Safety Belt
System Parts After a
Crash
Airbag System
The vehicle has the following
airbags:
.
A frontal airbag for the driver.
WARNING
{
.
A frontal airbag for the right front
passenger.
A crash can damage the safety
belt system in the vehicle.
A damaged safety belt system
may not properly protect the
person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in
a crash. To help make sure the
safety belt systems are working
properly after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as
possible.
.
A seat-mounted side impact
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the safety belt
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
airbag for the driver.
.
A seat-mounted side impact
airbag for the right front
passenger.
Have the safety belt pretensioners
checked if the vehicle has been in a
crash, or if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start the vehicle
or while you are driving. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 5‑16.
All of the airbags in the vehicle will
have the word AIRBAG embossed
in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the middle
part of the steering wheel for the
driver and on the instrument panel
for the right front passenger.
With seat-mounted side impact
airbags, the word AIRBAG will
appear on the side of the seatback
closest to the door.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-23
Airbags are designed to supplement
the protection provided by safety
belts. Even though today's airbags
are also designed to help reduce
the risk of injury from the force of an
inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
WARNING (Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Wearing your safety belt during a
crash helps reduce your chance
of hitting things inside the vehicle
or being ejected from it. Airbags
are “supplemental restraints” to
the safety belts. Everyone in your
vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there
is an airbag for that person.
close to the airbag, as you would
be if you were sitting on the edge
of your seat or leaning forward.
Safety belts help keep you in
position before and during a
crash. Always wear your safety
belt, even with airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible
while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
Here are the most important things
to know about the airbag system:
WARNING
{
You can be severely injured or
killed in a crash if you are not
wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Airbags are
designed to work with safety
belts, but do not replace them.
Also, airbags are not designed to
deploy in every crash. In some
crashes safety belts are your only
restraint. See When Should an
Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑26.
Occupants should not lean on or
sleep against the door or side
windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted airbags.
WARNING
{
Airbags inflate with great force,
faster than the blink of an eye.
Anyone who is up against, or
very close to, any airbag when it
inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
(Continued)
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-24
Seats and Restraints
Where Are the Airbags?
WARNING
{
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag
when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer protection
for adults and older children, but
not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle's safety belt
system nor its airbag system
is designed for them. Young
children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always
secure children properly in
your vehicle. To read how, see
Older Children on page 3‑37 or
Infants and Young Children on
page 3‑39.
There is an airbag readiness light
on the instrument panel, which
shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag
electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 5‑16
for more information.
The driver frontal airbag is in the
middle of the steering wheel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-25
WARNING
{
If something is between an
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury
or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept
clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel
hub or on or near any other
airbag covering.
The right front passenger frontal
airbag is in the instrument panel on
the passenger's side.
Driver Side Shown, Passenger
Side Similar
The seat-mounted side impact
airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are in the side of the
seatbacks closest to the door.
Do not use seat accessories
that block the inflation path of a
seat-mounted side impact airbag.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-26
Seats and Restraints
Frontal airbags may inflate
at different crash speeds.
For example:
Thresholds can also vary with
specific vehicle design.
When Should an Airbag
Inflate?
Frontal airbags are not intended to
inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts.
Frontal airbags are designed
to inflate in moderate to severe
frontal or near-frontal crashes to
help reduce the potential for severe
injuries mainly to the driver's or right
front passenger's head and chest.
However, they are only designed
to inflate if the impact exceeds
a predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds
are used to predict how severe a
crash is likely to be in time for the
airbags to inflate and help restrain
the occupants.
.
If the vehicle hits a stationary
object, the airbags could inflate
at a different crash speed than if
the vehicle hits a moving object.
In addition, your vehicle has
dual-stage frontal airbags.
.
If the vehicle hits an object that
Dual-stage airbags adjust the
restraint according to crash severity.
Your vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing
system distinguish between a
moderate frontal impact and a
more severe frontal impact.
For moderate frontal impacts,
dual-stage airbags inflate at a
level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts,
full deployment occurs.
deforms, the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits an object
that does not deform.
.
.
If the vehicle hits a narrow object
(like a pole), the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide
object (like a wall).
Whether the frontal airbags will
or should deploy is not based on
how fast your vehicle is traveling.
It depends largely on what you hit,
the direction of the impact, and how
quickly your vehicle slows down.
If the vehicle goes into an object
at an angle, the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight
into the object.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-27
Your vehicle may have one or
two seat position sensors,
Seat-mounted side impact airbags
will inflate if the crash severity
is above the system's designed
threshold level. The threshold level
can vary with specific vehicle
design.
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate?
depending on what model you
have. The seat position sensor(s)
enable the sensing system to
monitor the position of the driver
seat (all models except Z06
In a deployment event, the sensing
system sends an electrical signal
triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
airbag causing the bag to break out
of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
the airbag, and related hardware are
all part of the airbag module.
Seat-mounted side impact
and ZR1) and the right front
airbags are not intended to inflate
in frontal impacts, near-frontal
impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts.
A seat-mounted side impact airbag
is intended to deploy on the side of
the vehicle that is struck.
passenger seat (all models).
Seat position sensor(s) provide
information that is used to determine
if the airbags should deploy at a
reduced level or at full deployment.
Frontal airbag modules are located
inside the steering wheel and
instrument panel. For vehicles with
seat-mounted side impact airbags,
there are airbag modules in the side
of the front seatbacks closest to
the door.
Your vehicle may or may not have
seat-mounted side impact airbags.
See Airbag System on page 3‑22.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags
are intended to inflate in moderate
to severe side crashes.
In any particular crash, no one
can say whether an airbag should
have inflated simply because of
the damage to a vehicle or because
of what the repair costs were. For
seat-mounted side impact airbags,
deployment is determined by the
location and severity of the side
impact.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-28
Seats and Restraints
Airbags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement
to safety belts.
How Does an Airbag
Restrain?
WARNING
{
When an airbag inflates, there
may be dust in the air. This dust
could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of
In moderate to severe frontal or
near frontal collisions, even belted
occupants can contact the steering
wheel or the instrument panel.
In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants
can contact the inside of the
vehicle.
What Will You See After
an Airbag Inflates?
asthma or other breathing trouble.
To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon
as it is safe to do so. If you have
breathing problems but cannot
get out of the vehicle after an
airbag inflates, then get fresh air
by opening a window or a door.
If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek
medical attention.
After the frontal and seat-mounted
side impact airbags inflate, they
quickly deflate, so quickly that some
people may not even realize the
airbags inflated. Some components
of the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the
airbag modules, see What Makes
an Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑27.
Airbags supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Frontal
airbags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the
occupant's upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags
distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant's
upper body.
The parts of the airbag that come
into contact with you may be warm,
but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming
from the vents in the deflated
airbags. Airbag inflation does not
prevent the driver from seeing out
of the windshield or being able to
steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent
people from leaving the vehicle.
The vehicle has a feature that may
automatically unlock the doors,
turn the interior lamps on, turn
on the hazard warning flashers,
and shut off the fuel system
after the airbags inflate.
But airbags would not help in
many types of collisions, primarily
because the occupant's motion is
not toward those airbags. See When
Should an Airbag Inflate? on
page 3‑26 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-29
.
The vehicle has a crash sensing
and diagnostic module which
records information after a
crash. See Vehicle Data
Recording and Privacy on
page 13‑17 and Event Data
Recorders on page 13‑17.
You can lock the doors, turn the
interior lamps off, and turn the
hazard warning flashers off by using
the controls for those features.
In many crashes severe enough to
inflate the airbag, windshields are
broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage
may also occur from the right front
passenger airbag.
WARNING
{
.
Airbags are designed to inflate
.
A crash severe enough to inflate
the airbags may have also
damaged important functions
in the vehicle, such as the fuel
system, brake and steering
systems, etc. Even if the vehicle
appears to be drivable after a
moderate crash, there may be
concealed damage that could
make it difficult to safely operate
the vehicle.
Let only qualified technicians
work on the airbag system.
Improper service can mean that
the airbag system will not work
properly. See your dealer for
service.
only once. After an airbag
inflates, you will need some
new parts for the airbag system.
If you do not get them, the
airbag system will not be there
to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly
other parts. The service manual
for your vehicle covers the need
to replace other parts.
Use caution if you should attempt
to restart the engine after a crash
has occurred.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-30
Seats and Restraints
word ON or OFF, or the symbol
for on or off, will be visible.
See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 5‑17.
rear-facing child restraints not be
transported in the vehicle, even if
the airbags are off.
Passenger Sensing
System
The vehicle has a passenger
sensing system for the right front
passenger position. The passenger
airbag status indicator will be visible
in the rearview mirror when the
vehicle is started.
A label on the sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk
to the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
The passenger sensing system will
turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag under certain
conditions. The driver airbags are
not affected by the passenger
sensing system.
WARNING
{
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously
The passenger sensing system
works with sensors that are part
of the right front passenger seat.
The sensors are designed to detect
the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right
front passenger frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag
should be enabled (may inflate)
or not.
injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates.
This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
United States
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
secured in a rear seat in the correct
child restraint for their weight and
size. We recommend that
Canada and Mexico
The words ON and OFF, or the
(Continued)
symbol for on and off, will be visible
during the system check. When the
system check is complete, either the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-31
The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front
passenger frontal airbag and
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
WARNING (Continued)
front passenger frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag,
the off indicator will light and stay lit
to remind you that the airbag(s) are
off. See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 5‑17.
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag
and seat-mounted side impact
airbag (if equipped), no system
is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will
not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the
airbag(s) are off.
seat-mounted side impact airbag if:
.
The right front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
.
The system determines that an
infant is present in a rear-facing
infant seat.
The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn on (may inflate)
the right front passenger frontal
airbag and seat-mounted side
impact airbag anytime the system
senses that a person of adult size
is sitting properly in the right front
passenger seat.
.
The system determines that a
small child is present in a child
restraint.
.
Secure rear-facing child restraints
in a rear seat, even if the
The system determines that
a small child is present in a
booster seat.
airbag(s) are off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
When the passenger sensing
.
A right front passenger takes
system has allowed the airbag(s) to
be enabled, the on indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the
airbag or airbags are active.
his/her weight off of the seat for
a period of time.
.
The right front passenger seat is
occupied by a smaller person,
such as a child who has
outgrown child restraints.
.
Or, if there is a critical problem
with the airbag system or the
passenger sensing system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-32
Seats and Restraints
For some children who have
5. If, after reinstalling the child
restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is
still lit, turn the vehicle off.
Then slightly recline the vehicle
seatback and adjust the seat
cushion, if adjustable, to make
sure that the vehicle seatback is
not pushing the child restraint
into the seat cushion.
If the On Indicator is Lit for a
Child Restraint
outgrown child restraints and for
very small adults, the passenger
sensing system may or may not
turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag, depending
upon the person's seating posture
and body build. Everyone in the
vehicle who has outgrown child
restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is
an airbag for that person.
If a child restraint has been installed
and the on indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from
the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items
from the seat such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
6. Restart the vehicle.
If the on indicator is still lit, do
not install a child restraint in this
vehicle and check with your
dealer.
4. Reinstall the child restraint
following the directions
provided by the child restraint
manufacturer and refer to
Securing Child Restraints on
page 3‑48.
WARNING
{
If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others,
have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 5‑16 for more
information, including important
safety information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-33
system to detect that person and
enable the right front passenger
frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag:
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
Additional Factors Affecting
System Operation
Safety belts help keep the
passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers
and braking, which helps the
passenger sensing system maintain
the passenger airbag status.
See “Safety Belts” and “Child
Restraints” in the Index for
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material
from the seat, such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully
upright position.
additional information about the
importance of proper restraint use.
4. Have the person sit upright in
the seat, centered on the seat
cushion, with legs comfortably
extended.
If the shoulder portion of the belt
is pulled out all the way, the child
restraint locking feature will be
engaged. This may unintentionally
cause the passenger sensing
system to turn the airbag(s) off for
some adult size occupants. If this
happens, let the belt go back all the
way and start again.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in
the right front passenger seat, but
the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting
properly in the seat. If this happens,
use the following steps to allow the
5. Restart the vehicle and have the
person remain in this position for
two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-34
Seats and Restraints
A thick layer of additional material,
such as a blanket or cushion,
or aftermarket equipment such
as seat covers, seat heaters, and
seat massagers can affect how
well the passenger sensing system
operates. We recommend that
you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when
approved by GM for your specific
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 3‑35 for more information
about modifications that can affect
how the system operates.
Servicing the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
WARNING
{
For up to 10 seconds after the
ignition is turned off and the
Airbags affect how the vehicle
should be serviced. There are
parts of the airbag system in
several places around the vehicle.
Your dealer and the service manual
have information about servicing
the vehicle and the airbag system.
To purchase a service manual, see
Service Publications Ordering
Information on page 13‑15.
battery is disconnected, an airbag
can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you
are close to an airbag when it
inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow
proper service procedures, and
make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
WARNING
{
Stowing of articles under the
passenger seat or between the
passenger seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the
proper operation of the passenger
sensing system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-35
seat. The passenger sensing
system may not operate properly
if the original seat trim is
replaced with non-GM covers,
upholstery or trim, or with
GM covers, upholstery or
Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in
this manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure
(United States and Canada) on
page 13‑1 or Customer
Satisfaction Procedure (Mexico)
on page 13‑3.
Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add
to or change about the vehicle
that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
trim designed for a different
vehicle. Any object, such as
an aftermarket seat heater or
a comfort enhancing pad or
device, installed under or on
top of the seat fabric, could
also interfere with the operation
of the passenger sensing
system. This could either
prevent proper deployment
of the passenger airbag(s) or
prevent the passenger sensing
system from properly turning
off the passenger airbag(s).
See Passenger Sensing System
on page 3‑30.
A: Yes. If you add things that
change the vehicle's frame,
bumper system, height, front
end or side sheet metal, they
may keep the airbag system
from working properly. Changing
or moving any parts of the front
seats, safety belts, the airbag
sensing and diagnostic module,
steering wheel, instrument
panel, the inside rear mirror,
front sensors, or airbag wiring
can affect the operation of the
airbag system.
Q: Because I have a disability,
I have to get my vehicle
modified. How can I find out
whether this will affect my
airbag system?
A: If you have questions,
call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two
of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction
Procedure (United States and
Canada) on page 13‑1 or
Customer Satisfaction
In addition, the vehicle has
a passenger sensing system
for the right front passenger
position, which includes sensors
that are part of the passenger
If you have any questions
about this, you should contact
Customer Assistance before you
modify your vehicle. The phone
numbers and addresses for
Customer Assistance are in
Procedure (Mexico) on
page 13‑3.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-36
Seats and Restraints
Your dealer and the service manual
have information about the location
of the airbag sensors, sensing and
diagnostic module and airbag
wiring.
If an airbag inflates, you will need
to replace airbag system parts.
See your dealer for service.
Replacing Airbag System
Parts After a Crash
If the airbag readiness light stays on
after the vehicle is started or comes
on when you are driving, the airbag
system may not work properly.
Have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light
WARNING
{
A crash can damage the airbag
systems in your vehicle.
Airbag System Check
The airbag system does not need
regularly scheduled maintenance
or replacement. Make sure the
airbag readiness light is working.
See Airbag Readiness Light on
page 5‑16 for more information.
A damaged airbag system
may not work properly and
may not protect you and your
passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
in serious injury or even death.
To help make sure your airbag
systems are working properly
after a crash, have them
on page 5‑16 for more information.
Notice: If an airbag covering is
damaged, opened, or broken,
the airbag may not work properly.
Do not open or break the airbag
coverings. If there are any
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon
as possible.
opened or broken airbag covers,
have the airbag covering and/or
airbag module replaced. For the
location of the airbag modules,
see What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? on page 3‑27. See your
dealer for service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-37
The manufacturer's instructions that
come with the booster seat, state
the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat
with a lap-shoulder belt until the
child passes the below fit test:
Q: What is the proper way to
wear safety belts?
Child Restraints
A: An older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the
additional restraint a shoulder
belt can provide. The shoulder
belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit
snugly below the hips, just
touching the top of the thighs.
This applies belt force to the
child's pelvic bones in a crash.
It should never be worn over the
abdomen, which could cause
severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash.
Older Children
.
Sit all the way back on the seat.
Do the knees bend at the seat
edge? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
.
Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.
Does the shoulder belt rest on
the shoulder? If yes, continue.
If no, then return to the
booster seat.
.
Does the lap belt fit low and
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position.
Older children who have outgrown
booster seats should wear the
vehicle's safety belts.
snug on the hips, touching the
thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
.
Can proper safety belt fit be
maintained for the length of the
trip? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-38
Seats and Restraints
In a crash, children who are not
buckled up can strike other people
who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older
children need to use safety belts
properly.
WARNING (Continued)
forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child
might also slide under the lap
belt. The belt force would then
be applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
WARNING
{
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear
the same safety belt. The safety
belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two
children can be crushed together
and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one
person at a time.
WARNING
{
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the
safety belt with the shoulder belt
behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly.
In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt.
The child could move too far
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-39
Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts
offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle's
safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Every
time infants and young children ride
in vehicles, they should have the
protection provided by appropriate
child restraints.
Infants and Young
Children
WARNING (Continued)
For example, in a crash at only
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
infant will suddenly become a
110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
arms. An infant should be
secured in an appropriate
restraint.
Everyone in a vehicle needs
protection! This includes infants
and all other children. Neither the
distance traveled nor the age and
size of the traveler changes the
need, for everyone, to use safety
restraints. In fact, the law in every
state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says
children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
Children who are not restrained
properly can strike other people,
or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING
{
WARNING
{
Never do this.
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt
is wrapped around their neck
and the safety belt continues to
tighten. Never leave children
unattended in a vehicle and never
allow children to play with the
safety belts.
Never hold an infant or a child
while riding in a vehicle. Due to
crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not
possible to hold it during a crash.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-40
Seats and Restraints
For most basic types of child
restraints, there are many
different models available.
WARNING
{
Never do this.
When purchasing a child
restraint, be sure it is designed
to be used in a motor vehicle.
If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal
motor vehicle safety standards.
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag when
it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front
seat. Secure a rear-facing child
restraint in a rear seat. It is also
better to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front
seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as
it will go.
The restraint manufacturer's
instructions that come with the
restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular
child restraint. In addition, there
are many kinds of restraints
available for children with
special needs.
Q: What are the different types of
add-on child restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which
are purchased by the vehicle's
owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular
restraint should take into
consideration not only the child's
weight, height, and age but also
whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-41
Child Restraint Systems
WARNING
WARNING
{
{
To reduce the risk of neck and
head injury during a crash, infants
need complete support. This is
because an infant's neck is not
fully developed and its head
weighs so much compared with
the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing child
restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest
part of an infant's body, the back
and shoulders. Infants should
always be secured in rear-facing
child restraints.
A young child's hip bones are still
so small that the vehicle's regular
safety belt may not remain low
on the hip bones, as it should.
Instead, it may settle up around
the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a
body area that is unprotected by
any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal
injuries. To reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries during
a crash, young children should
always be secured in appropriate
child restraints.
(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat
A rear-facing infant seat (A)
provides restraint with the seating
surface against the back of the
infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-42
Seats and Restraints
Securing an Add-On Child
Restraint in the Vehicle
WARNING
{
A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured
in the vehicle. Secure the child
restraint properly in the vehicle
using the vehicle's safety belt or
LATCH system, following the
instructions that came with that
child restraint and the instructions
in this manual.
(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat
(C) Booster Seats
A forward-facing child seat (B)
provides restraint for the child's
body with the harness.
A booster seat (C) is a child restraint
designed to improve the fit of the
vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a
child to see out the window.
To help reduce the chance of injury,
the child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. Child restraint
systems must be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder
belt, or by the LATCH system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-43
See Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) (Coupe
and Convertible Models Only) on
page 3‑43 or Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) (Z06 and ZR1 Models
Only) on page 3‑44 for more
information. Children can be
endangered in a crash if the
child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle.
In some areas of the United States
and Canada, Certified Child
Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children
(LATCH System)
(Coupe and Convertible
Models Only)
Passenger Safety Technicians
(CPSTs) are available to inspect
and demonstrate how to correctly
use and install child restraints.
In the U.S., refer to the National
Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) website
to locate the nearest child safety
seat inspection station. For CPST
availability in Canada, check with
Transport Canada or the Provincial
Ministry of Transportation office.
Some child restraints have a
LATCH system. As part of the
LATCH system, your child restraint
may have lower attachments and/or
a top tether. The LATCH system can
help hold the child restraint in place
during driving or in a crash. Some
vehicles have lower and/or top
tether anchors designed to secure
a child restraint with lower
When securing an add-on child
restraint, refer to the instructions
that come with the restraint which
may be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual.
The child restraint instructions
are important, so if they are not
available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
Securing the Child Within the
Child Restraint
attachments and/or a top tether.
WARNING
{
Some child restraints with a top
tether are designed to be used
whether the top tether is anchored
or not. Other child restraints require
that the top tether be anchored.
A national or local law may require
that the top tether be anchored.
A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a crash if the child
is not properly secured in the
child restraint. Secure the child
properly following the instructions
that came with that child restraint.
Keep in mind that an unsecured
child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint
in the vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-44
Seats and Restraints
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
properly installed using the top
tether anchor and the vehicle's
safety belt. A child restraint must
never be installed using only the top
tether and anchor. Refer to your
child restraint instructions and
see Securing Child Restraints on
page 3‑48 for instructions on
securing your child restraint using
the vehicle's safety belts.
Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) (Z06 and
ZR1 Models Only)
Some child restraints have a LATCH
system. As part of the LATCH
system, your child restraint may
have lower attachments and/or
a top tether. The LATCH system
can help hold the child restraint in
place during driving or in a crash.
Some vehicles have lower and/or
top tether anchors designed to
secure a child restraint with lower
attachments and/or a top tether.
Your vehicle does not have lower
anchors or top tether anchors to
secure a child restraint with the
LATCH system. If a national or local
law requires that your top tether
be anchored, do not use a child
restraint in this vehicle because
a top tether cannot be properly
anchored. You must use the safety
belts to secure your child restraint
in this vehicle, unless a national
or local law requires that the top
tether be anchored. Refer to the
child restraint instructions and
instructions in this manual for
In order to use the top tether
anchors in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint equipped
with a top tether. The child restraint
manufacturer will provide you
with instructions on how to use
the child restraint and its top tether.
The following explains how to attach
a child restraint with the top tether in
your vehicle.
Your vehicle does not have lower
anchors to accommodate lower
attachments. Your vehicle does
have a top tether anchor. If your
child restraint has a top tether,
make sure your child restraint is
securing a child restraint using the
vehicle's safety belts. See Securing
Child Restraints on page 3‑48.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-45
Your child restraint may have
a single tether (A) or a dual
tether (C). Either will have a single
attachment (B) to secure the top
tether to the anchor.
Top Tether Anchor Locations
Some top tether-equipped child
restraints are designed for use
with or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for your child
restraint.
A top tether (A, C) anchors the
top of the child restraint to the
vehicle. A top tether anchor is built
into the vehicle. The top tether
attachment (B) on the child restraint
connects to the top tether anchor in
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or
in a crash.
i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
positions with top tether anchors.
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer
when properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position.
To assist you in locating the top
tether anchors, the top tether anchor
symbol is located on the trim cover.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-46
Seats and Restraints
Securing a Child Restraint with
a Top Tether
WARNING (Continued)
the safety belt continues to
WARNING
{
tighten. Buckle any unused safety
belts behind the child restraint
so children cannot reach them.
Pull the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the lock,
if your vehicle has one, after the
child restraint has been installed.
If a LATCH-type child restraint is
not attached to anchors, the child
restraint will not be able to protect
the child correctly. In a crash, the
child could be seriously injured
or killed. Install a LATCH-type
child restraint properly using
the anchors, or use the vehicle's
safety belts to secure the
The top tether anchor is located
under the cover behind the
passenger seat.
Notice: Do not let the LATCH
attachments rub against the
vehicle’s safety belts. This may
damage these parts. If necessary,
move buckled safety belts to
avoid rubbing the LATCH
attachments.
restraint, following the instructions
that came with the child restraint
and the instructions in this
manual.
Do not fold the empty rear
seat with a safety belt buckled.
This could damage the safety belt
or the seat. Unbuckle and return
the safety belt to its stowed
WARNING
{
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck and
position, before folding the seat.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-47
Do not secure a child restraint in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
2.3. Route, attach and tighten
the top tether according
to your child restraint
instructions and the
following instructions:
1. Secure the child restraint
using the vehicle's safety belt.
See Securing Child Restraints
on page 3‑48.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer
recommends that the top tether
be attached, attach and tighten
the top tether to the top tether
anchor, if equipped. Refer to the
child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
If the position you are using
has a fixed headrest or
head restraint and you are
using a dual tether, route
the tether around the
headrest or head restraint.
If the position you are using
has a fixed headrest or
head restraint and you are
using a single tether, route
the tether over the headrest
or head restraint.
3. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Press the ribbed area of the
trim cover to open the cover
and expose the anchor.
the LATCH path and attempt
to move it side‐to‐side and
back‐and‐forth. There should
be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of
movement for proper installation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-48
Seats and Restraints
Replacing LATCH System Securing Child Restraints
WARNING
{
Parts After a Crash
This vehicle has airbags.
In addition, the vehicle has a
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously
passenger sensing system which
is designed to turn off the right
WARNING
{
injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates.
This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
A crash can damage the
front passenger frontal airbag
and seat-mounted side impact
airbag (if equipped) under certain
conditions. See Passenger Sensing
System on page 3‑30 and
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 5‑17 for more information,
including important safety
LATCH system in the vehicle.
A damaged LATCH system may
not properly secure the child
restraint, resulting in serious
injury or even death in a crash.
To help make sure the LATCH
system is working properly after
a crash, see your dealer to have
the system inspected and any
necessary replacements made
as soon as possible.
information.
A label on the sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk
to the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will
not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system
and it was being used during a
crash, new LATCH system parts
may be needed.
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the LATCH
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-49
Children (LATCH System) (Z06 and
ZR1 Models Only) on page 3‑44 for
how and where to install the child
restraint using LATCH. If a child
restraint is secured using a safety
belt and it uses a top tether, see
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) (Coupe
and Convertible Models Only) on
page 3‑43 or Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
You will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint in
this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
WARNING (Continued)
Secure rear-facing child
restraints in a rear seat, even if
the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
1. Move the seat as far back as
it will go before securing the
forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag
and seat-mounted side impact
airbag (if equipped), the off
indicator on the passenger
airbag status indicator should
light and stay lit when you start
the vehicle. See Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on
page 5‑17.
System) (Z06 and ZR1 Models
Only) on page 3‑44 for top tether
anchor locations.
See Passenger Sensing System
on page 3‑30 for additional
information.
Do not secure a child seat in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
Rear-facing child restraints should
not be installed in the vehicle, even
if the airbag(s) are off.
2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
If the child restraint has the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) (Coupe and Convertible
Models Only) on page 3‑43 or
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle’s safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-50
Seats and Restraints
4. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the
6. To tighten the belt, push down
on the child restraint, pull the
shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt,
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint,
it may be helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
lock. When the retractor lock is
set, the belt can be tightened but
not pulled out of the retractor.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked,
repeat Steps 5 and 6.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-51
7. If the child restraint has a top
tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
If the airbag or airbags are off, the
off indicator in the passenger airbag
status indicator will come on and
stay on when the vehicle is started.
regarding the use of the top
tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) (Coupe and Convertible
Models Only) on page 3‑43
or Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
(Z06 and ZR1 Models Only) on
page 3‑44 for more information.
If a child restraint has been
installed and the on indicator is lit,
see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a
Child Restraint ” under Passenger
Sensing System on page 3‑30 for
more information.
To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
let it return to the stowed position.
If the top tether is attached to a top
tether anchor, disconnect it.
8. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
safety belt path and attempt
to move it side‐to‐side and
back‐and‐forth. When the child
restraint is properly installed,
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-52
Seats and Restraints
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storage
4-1
Storage
Compartments
Storage
Storage Compartments
Glove Box
Open the glove box by lifting up on
the lever. Use the key to lock and
unlock the lighted glove box.
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2
Additional Storage Features
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Cupholders
Two cupholders are located on the
center console next to the shift
lever. Slide the handle from the left
to the right side to access the lid.
Convertible Shown, Coupe
Similar
To access a storage compartment,
pull up to open the cover.
The covers cannot be removed.
Rear Storage
Two rear storage compartments
are located in the floor of the rear
hatch/trunk area.
For Z06 and ZR1, and Grand Sport
Coupe with a manual transmission,
the right rear compartment stores
the battery and cannot be used for
storage.
Notice: Do not store heavy or
sharp objects in the rear storage
compartments located in the
hatch/trunk area. The objects
could damage the underbody.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-2
Storage
Rear Trunk Partition
Additional Storage
Features
For vehicles with the power
convertible top option only,
there is a trunk partition to keep
cargo from getting in the way of
the convertible top. The trunk
partition must be in place for the
convertible top to move. If the trunk
partition is not properly in place
the ATTACH TRUNK PARTITION
message displays. See Convertible
Top Messages on page 5‑37 for
more information.
Cargo Cover
For vehicles with this feature,
the security shade can provide
hidden storage in the rear area
of the vehicle. The shade is also
helpful in blocking the glare from
the removable roof when it is stored
in the rear compartment.
Pull the divider up and snap it onto
the snaps on both sides of the trunk.
The trunk partition is a flat carpeted
board with a horizontal flap that can
be attached to the top of the trunk to
divide the storage compartment or it
stores flat when not in use.
Center Console Storage
To use this storage area, pull the
cover up on the driver side front
edge of the console and swing it to
the passenger side.
Some vehicles might also have
input jacks for auxiliary audio
devices. See Auxiliary Devices on
page 7‑17.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storage
4-3
Using the Cargo Cover
3. Grasp the loop at the rear center
of the shade and wrap it around
the striker assembly.
4. Push the loop to the top of the
striker (base plate).
1. Hook the elastic loops on the
front corners (A) of the shade to
the T-nuts located on the front
corners of the rear hatch frame.
Convenience Net
Use the convenience net, located in
the rear, to store small loads as far
forward as possible. The net should
not be used to store heavy loads.
2. Hook the elastic loops on the
rear corners (B) of the shade to
the hooks recessed inside the
rear hatch frame, near the rear
corners.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4
Storage
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
Vehicle Messages
5-1
Engine Coolant Temperature
Instruments and
Controls
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-16
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-16
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Brake System Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
One-to-Four Shift Light
(Manual Transmission) . . . . . 5-22
Active Handling System
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Traction Control System
(TCS) Warning Light . . . . . . . 5-23
Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
High-Beam on Light . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-25
Lamps on Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Battery Voltage and Charging
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Brake System Messages . . . . 5-36
Convertible Top Messages . . . 5-37
Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-38
Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Engine Cooling System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-40
Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-41
Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-41
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-42
Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Ride Control System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Safety Belt Messages . . . . . . . 5-49
Anti-Theft Alarm System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-50
Starting the Vehicle
Controls
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-3
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-4
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Boost Gauge (ZR1) . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Engine Oil Pressure
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-53
Vehicle Reminder
Information Displays
Driver Information
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-54
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . 5-31
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-2
Instruments and Controls
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-55
Telescopic Steering Column
Controls
Steering Wheel
Adjustment
Universal Remote System
Universal Remote System . . . 5-64
Universal Remote System
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Universal Remote System
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
For vehicles with this feature, the
telescopic steering column switch
is located on the right side of the
steering column.
The lever is located on the left side
of the steering column.
To adjust the telescopic steering
column:
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever toward you.
1. Push the switch forward to move
the wheel away from you.
2. Move the steering wheel up
or down.
2. Pull the switch toward you to
move the wheel closer to you.
3. Release the lever to lock the
steering wheel in place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-3
The telescopic steering column
position can be stored with your
memory settings. See “Memory
Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel”
under Power Seat Adjustment on
page 3‑3 for more information.
To change radio stations:
b g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press to
silence the vehicle speakers only.
Press again to turn the sound on.
.
Press w or x to go to the
next or to the previous radio
station and stay there. The
For vehicles with Bluetooth or
OnStar® systems press and
radio only seeks stations with
a strong signal that are in the
selected band.
hold b g for longer than 2 seconds
to interact with those systems.
See Bluetooth on page 7‑18 and
the OnStar Owner's Guide for
more information.
Steering Wheel Controls
.
Press and hold w or x for
2 seconds until SCAN displays
and a beep sounds to scan
stations. The radio goes to a
station, plays for a few seconds,
then goes to the next station.
Press again to stop scanning.
c (Phone On Hook): Press to
reject an incoming call, or end a
current call.
w x (Next/Previous) : Press to
change radio stations or select
tracks on a CD.
.
Press and hold w or x for
4 seconds until PRESET SCAN
displays and a beep sounds to
scan presets. The radio goes
to a station, plays for a few
seconds, then goes to the
next station. Press again to
stop scanning.
For vehicles with steering wheel
controls, some audio controls can
be adjusted at the steering wheel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-4
Instruments and Controls
To select tracks on a CD:
Move the lever to the following
positions:
Horn
.
Press w or x to go to the next
or to the previous track when a
CD is playing.
Press near or on the horn symbols
on the steering wheel pad to sound
the horn.
1 (High Speed): Fast wipes.
6 (Low Speed): Slow
wipes.
.
Press and hold w or x for
Windshield Wiper/Washer
& (Delay): Use to set a delay
more than 2 seconds to scan
the current CD. The CD goes
to the next track, plays the first
10 seconds, then goes to the
next track. Press again to stop
scanning.
between wipes.
x (Delay Adjustment): Use for
a delayed wiping cycle. Turn the
intermittent adjust band down for
a longer delay or up for a shorter
delay. The wiper speed can only be
manually adjusted when the lever is
in this position.
.
Press and hold w or x for
more than 4 seconds to scan all
of the CDs loaded. The CD goes
to the next CD, plays the first
10 seconds of each track, then
goes to the next CD. Press
again to stop scanning.
9 (Off): Turns off the windshield
wipers.
8 (Mist): Move all the way down
to mist and release for a single
wiping cycle. The windshield wipers
will stop after one wipe. Hold the
band on mist longer for more wipes.
The windshield wiper lever is
located on the right side of the
steering column.
+ e − e (Volume): Press to
increase or to decrease the radio
volume.
1 to 6 (Preset Pushbuttons):
Press to play stations that are
programmed on the radio preset
pushbuttons.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-5
Heavy snow or ice can overload
the wipers. If this occurs, a circuit
breaker will stop the wipers until the
motor cools. Clear all ice and snow
from the wiper blades before using
them. If frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen them or thaw them.
Damaged wiper blades should
be replaced. See Wiper Blade
Replacement on page 10‑46.
Compass
WARNING
{
Compass Operation
In freezing weather, do not
use your washer until the
windshield is warmed. Otherwise
the washer fluid can form ice on
the windshield, blocking your
vision.
With the compass feature on, each
time the vehicle is started, the
compass will take a few seconds
to adjust and display the current
compass heading. For example,
NE is displayed for north-east.
Compass Calibration
If the fluid in the windshield washer
fluid reservoir is low, the message
CHECK WASHER FLUID will
appear on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) display. It will take
15 seconds after the bottle is
refilled for this message to turn
off. For information on the correct
washer fluid to use, see Washer
Fluid on page 10‑37 and
Windshield Washer
Press P once to turn the compass
display on or off.
The lever on the right side of the
steering column also controls the
windshield washer. There is a
button at the end of the lever.
To spray washer fluid on the
windshield, press the button and
hold it. The washer will spray until
you release the button. The wipers
will continue to clear the window for
about six seconds after the button
is released and then stop or return
to your preset speed.
If after several seconds the display
does not show a compass heading,
there may be a strong magnetic
field interfering with the compass.
Interference can be caused by a
magnetic antenna mount, note
pad holder or similar object. If the
letter C or CAL appears in the
compass window, the compass
needs calibration.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑6.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-6
Instruments and Controls
Depending on the mirror, in order
to calibrate, CAL must be displayed
in the mirror compass windows.
To adjust for compass variance:
Clock
To set the clock:
1. Find your current location and
variance zone number on the
zone map that follows.
1. Press and hold H until the
correct hour displays.
If CAL is not displayed, press P for
several seconds or until CAL is
displayed.
2. Press and hold M until the
correct minute displays.
If the compass has map lamps, it
can be placed in calibration mode
by pressing and holding the left map
light button until a C appears on the
compass display.
The clock mode automatically times
out with the changed display format
set as the current default setting.
The mirror compass can be
Power Outlets
The accessory power outlet can be
used to plug in electrical equipment,
such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
calibrated by driving the vehicle
in circles at 8 km/h (5 mph) or less
until the display reads a direction.
Compass Variance
The accessory power outlet is
located inside the center console
storage compartment, on the
forward left side.
2. Press and hold P until a Z and
a zone number displays. The
compass is now in zone mode.
The mirror is set to zone eight.
If you do not live in zone eight or
drive out of the area, the compass
variance needs to be changed to
the appropriate zone.
3. Once the zone number displays,
Remove the cover to access and
replace when not in use.
press P repeatedly until you
reach the correct zone number.
Stop pressing P and the mirror
returns to normal operation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
Cigarette Lighter
5-7
Certain electrical accessories
may not be compatible with the
accessory power outlet and could
overload vehicle or adapter fuses.
If a problem is experienced, see
your dealer.
WARNING
{
To use the cigarette lighter, push it
in all the way and let go. When it is
ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Power is always supplied to the
outlets. Do not leave electrical
equipment plugged in when the
vehicle is not in use because the
vehicle could catch fire and cause
injury or death.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter
in while it is heating does not let
the lighter back away from the
heating element when it is hot.
Damage from overheating can
occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be
When adding electrical equipment,
be sure to follow the proper
installation instructions included
with the equipment. See Add-On
Electrical Equipment on page 9‑54.
Notice: Leaving electrical
equipment plugged in for an
extended period of time while
the vehicle is off will drain the
battery. Always unplug electrical
equipment when not in use and
do not plug in equipment that
exceeds the maximum 20 ampere
rating.
It is recommended that a qualified
technician or dealer be seen for
the proper installation of your
equipment.
blown. Do not hold a cigarette
lighter in while it is heating.
Notice: Hanging heavy
equipment from the power
outlet can cause damage not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
The power outlets are designed
for accessory power plugs only,
such as cell phone charge cords.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-8
Instruments and Controls
Gauges can indicate when there
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Often gauges and warning
lights work together to indicate a
problem with the vehicle.
Ashtrays
Warning Lights,
Gauges, and
Indicators
Warning lights and gauges can
signal that something is wrong
before it becomes serious enough
to cause an expensive repair or
replacement. Paying attention to
the warning lights and gauges could
prevent injury.
The ashtray and cigarette lighter are
located on the instrument panel, in
front of the shift lever. To use the
ashtray, press on the indentation
at the top of the door.
When one of the warning lights
comes on and stays on while
driving, or when one of the gauges
shows there may be a problem,
check the section that explains what
to do. Follow this manual's advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly
and even dangerous.
Notice: If papers, pins, or other
flammable items are put in the
ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite
them and possibly damage the
vehicle. Never put flammable
items in the ashtray.
Warning lights come on when there
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Some warning lights come
on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
Loose objects, such as paper clips,
can lodge behind and beneath the
ashtray lid and prevent movement
of the lid. You should avoid putting
small, loose objects near the
ashtray.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-9
Instrument Cluster
English Coupe and Convertible Shown, Metric Similar
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-10
Instruments and Controls
ZR1 – English Shown, ZO6, and Metric Similar
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
Fuel Gauge
5-11
Speedometer
Tachometer
The speedometer shows the speed
in either kilometers per hour (km/h)
or miles per hour (mph). For more
information see “Personal Options”
under Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑55.
The tachometer displays the engine
speed in thousands of revolutions
per minute (rpm).
Notice: Fuel shuts off at about
6500 rpm for the base model,
7000 rpm for the Z06 model, and
6600 rpm for the ZR1 model. If the
vehicle continues to be driven at
the fuel shut off rpm, the engine
could be damaged. Be sure to
operate the vehicle below the
fuel shut off rpm or reduce the
vehicle's rpm quickly when the
fuel shuts off.
Odometer
To read the odometer with the
ignition off, turn on the parking
lamps.
If the vehicle needs a new odometer
installed, the mileage total of the
new odometer will be set to the
original kilometers (miles) of the
old odometer. See your dealer if
the odometer must be replaced
in the vehicle.
The fuel gauge shows how much
fuel the vehicle has left while the
engine is on.
An arrow on the fuel gauge
indicates the side of the vehicle the
fuel door is on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-12
Instruments and Controls
.
It takes a little more or less
fuel to fill up than the gauge
indicated. For example, the
gauge may have indicated half
full, but it took a little more or
less than half of the tank's
capacity to fill the tank.
When the needle approaches the
low fuel symbol, a chime sounds
and LOW FUEL appears on the
Driver Information Center (DIC)
display. There is still a little fuel left,
but the vehicle's fuel tank should be
filled soon.
Boost Gauge (ZR1)
.
.
.
The gauge pointer may move
while cornering, braking or
speeding up.
Press the RESET button to
acknowledge a DIC message(s).
Pressing the RESET button also
turns off a DIC message but the
LOW FUEL message comes on
again in 10 minutes if fuel is not
added to the vehicle.
The gauge may not indicate the
tank is empty when the ignition
is turned off.
English
The gauge reading may change
slightly within the first several
minutes after starting the
vehicle.
Here are five things that some
owners ask about. All these things
are normal and do not indicate that
anything is wrong with the fuel
gauge.
See “DIC Operation and Displays”
in Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 5‑25 for more information.
.
At the service station, the gas
pump shuts off before the gauge
reads the full.
Metric
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-13
For vehicles that have this gauge, it
is located near the instrument panel
cluster.
Engine Oil Pressure
Gauge
This gauge indicates vacuum during
light to moderate throttle and boost
under heavier throttle.
It displays the air pressure level in
the intake manifold before it enters
the engine's combustion chamber.
The gauge is automatically centered
at zero every time the engine is
started. Actual vacuum or boost
is displayed from this zero point.
Changes in ambient pressure,
such as driving in mountains and
changing weather, will slightly
change the zero reading.
Metric
English
English— Z06 and ZR1 Models
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-14
Instruments and Controls
Oil pressure should be 140 to
550 kPa (20 to 80 psi). In certain
situations such as long, extended
idles on hot days, it could read as
low as 40 kPa (6 psi) and still be
considered normal. Oil pressure
may exceed 689 kPa (100 psi)
when first started or when
accelerating. It may vary with
engine speed, outside temperature
and oil viscosity, but readings above
the shaded area show the normal
operating range. Readings in the
shaded area tell you that the engine
is low on oil, or that you might have
some other oil problem. See Engine
Oil on page 10‑15.
WARNING
{
Do not keep driving if the oil
pressure is low. The engine can
become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check
the oil as soon as possible and
have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine
oil maintenance can damage the
engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always follow the maintenance
schedule for changing engine oil.
Metric — Z06 and ZR1 Models
The engine oil pressure gauge
shows the engine oil pressure in
psi (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals) when the engine
is running.
The engine oil pressure can also
be displayed using the GAGES
button on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑25.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
Voltmeter Gauge
5-15
Engine Coolant
Temperature Gauge
Metric
This gauge shows the engine
coolant temperature. If the gauge
pointer moves into the shaded area,
the engine is too hot.
Base and Z06, English and Metric
English
The voltmeter shows the voltage
output of the battery. It shows the
voltage output of the charging
system while the engine is running.
This means that the engine coolant
has overheated. If the vehicle has
been operating under normal driving
conditions, pull off the road, stop the
vehicle and turn off the engine as
soon as possible.
The reading changes as the rate
of charge changes (with engine
speed, for example), but if the
voltmeter reads at 9 volts or below,
the instrument panel cluster and
other systems may shut down.
See Engine Overheating on
page 10‑34 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-16
Instruments and Controls
The Driver Information Center (DIC)
reads BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW
when the vehicle is at 10 volts or
below. Have it checked right away.
Driving with the voltmeter reading at
10 volts or below could drain the
battery and disable the vehicle.
Airbag Readiness Light
The system checks the airbag's
electrical system for possible
malfunctions. If the light stays on
it indicates there is an electrical
problem. The system check
includes the airbag sensor, the
pretensioners, the airbag modules,
the wiring and the crash sensing
and diagnostic module. For more
information on the airbag system,
see Airbag System on page 3‑22.
The safety belt light comes on and
stays on for several seconds, then
flashes for several more.
Safety Belt Reminders
This chime and light are repeated if
the driver remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion. If the driver
safety belt is already buckled,
neither the chime nor the light
comes on.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the engine is started, a chime
sounds for several seconds to
remind a driver to fasten the safety
belt, unless the driver safety belt is
already buckled.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-17
If there is a problem with the airbag
system, an airbag Driver Information
Center (DIC) message can also
come on. See Vehicle Messages on
page 5‑35 for more information.
The airbag readiness light flashes
for a few seconds when the engine
is started. If the light does not come
on then, have it fixed immediately.
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator
The vehicle has the passenger
sensing system. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 3‑30
for important safety information.
The rearview mirror has a
Canada and Mexico
When the vehicle is started, the
passenger airbag status indicator
will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
for on and off, for several seconds
as a system check. Then, after
several more seconds, the status
indicator will light either ON or
OFF, or either the on or off symbol,
to let you know the status to let you
know the status of the right front
passenger frontal and seat-mounted
side impact airbags (if equipped).
WARNING
{
If the airbag readiness light stays
on after the vehicle is started or
comes on while driving, it means
the airbag system might not be
working properly. The airbags in
the vehicle might not inflate in a
crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid
injury, have the vehicle serviced
right away.
passenger airbag status indicator.
If the word ON or the on symbol is
lit on the passenger airbag status
indicator, it means that the right
front passenger frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag
(if equipped) are enabled (may
inflate).
United States
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-18
Instruments and Controls
If the word OFF or the off symbol
is lit on the passenger airbag
status indicator, it means that
the passenger sensing system
has turned off the right front
passenger frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag
(if equipped). See Passenger
Sensing System on page 3‑30 for
more on this, including important
safety information.
WARNING
{
If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others,
have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 5‑16 for more
information, including important
safety information.
This comes on briefly while starting
the engine. If it does not come on,
have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer.
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
comes on and stays on, while the
engine is running, this indicates that
there is an OBD II problem and
service is required.
If, after several seconds, both status
indicator lights remain on, or if there
are no lights at all, there may be
a problem with the lights or the
passenger sensing system.
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
Malfunctions often are indicated by
the system before any problem is
apparent. Being aware of the light
can prevent more serious damage
to the vehicle. This system assists
the service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
See your dealer for service.
A computer system called OBD II
(On-Board Diagnostics-Second
Generation) monitors operation
of the fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems. It makes sure that
emissions are at acceptable levels
for the life of the vehicle, helping to
produce a cleaner environment.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-19
Notice: If the vehicle is
continually driven with this
light on, after a while, the
emission controls might not
work as well, the vehicle fuel
economy might not be as good,
and the engine might not run
as smoothly. This could lead to
costly repairs that might not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
This light comes on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
Light On Steady: An emission
control system malfunction has
been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be
required.
Light Flashing: A misfire condition
has been detected. A misfire
increases vehicle emissions and
could damage the emission control
system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.
An emission system malfunction
might be corrected by doing the
following:
.
The following can prevent more
serious damage to the vehicle:
Make sure the fuel cap is fully
installed. See Filling the Tank on
page 9‑51. The diagnostic
system can determine if the
fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or
missing fuel cap allows fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap
properly installed should turn
the light off.
Notice: Modifications made to
the engine, transmission,
.
Reduce vehicle speed.
exhaust, intake, or fuel system
of the vehicle or the replacement
of the original tires with other
than those of the same Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) can
affect the vehicle's emission
controls and can cause this light
to come on. Modifications to
these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by
the vehicle warranty. This
.
Avoid hard accelerations.
.
Avoid steep uphill grades.
If the light continues to flash, when
it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.
Find a safe place to park the
vehicle. Turn off the vehicle, wait at
least 10 seconds, and restart the
engine. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps and see
your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
.
If the vehicle has been driven
through a deep puddle of water,
the vehicle's electrical system
might be wet. The condition
is usually corrected when the
electrical system dries out.
A few driving trips should turn
the light off.
could also result in a failure
to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
See Accessories and
Modifications on page 10‑4.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-20
Instruments and Controls
.
Make sure to fuel the vehicle
with quality fuel. Poor fuel quality
causes the engine not to run as
efficiently as designed and may
cause: stalling after start-up,
stalling when the vehicle is
changed into gear, misfiring,
hesitation on acceleration,
or stumbling on acceleration.
These conditions might go away
once the engine is warmed up.
The vehicle may not pass
inspection if:
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
.
the check engine light is on with
Some state/provincial and
local governments may have
programs to inspect the on-vehicle
emission control equipment For
the inspection, the emission
system test equipment is connected
to the vehicle’s Data Link
the engine running, or if the light
does not come on when the
ignition is in ON/RUN while
the engine is off.
.
the critical emission control
systems have not been
Connector (DLC).
completely diagnosed by
the system. This can happen
if the battery has recently
been replaced or if the battery
has run down. The diagnostic
system evaluates critical
emission control systems during
normal driving. This can take
several days of routine driving.
If this has been done and the
vehicle still does not pass the
inspection, your dealer can
prepare the vehicle for
If one or more of these
conditions occurs, change
the fuel brand used. It will
require at least one full tank
of the proper fuel to turn the
light off.
See Recommended Fuel on
page 9‑48.
The DLC is under the instrument
panel to the left of the steering
wheel. See your dealer if assistance
is needed.
If none of the above have made
the light turn off, your dealer can
check the vehicle. The dealer
has the proper test equipment
and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems
that might have developed.
inspection.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-21
If the light comes on while driving
and a CHECK BRAKE FLUID
message shows on the DIC, pull
off the road and stop carefully.
The pedal may be harder to push
or the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop.
If the light is still on, have the
vehicle towed for service. See
Towing the Vehicle on page 10‑86
and Brake System Messages on
page 5‑36 for more information.
Brake System Warning
Light
WARNING
{
The brake system might not be
working properly if the brake
system warning light is on.
Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after
the vehicle has been pulled off
the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for
service.
The vehicle brake system
consists of two hydraulic circuits.
If one circuit is not working, the
remaining circuit can still work to
stop the vehicle. For normal braking
performance, both circuits need to
be working.
If this warning light stays on after
the engine is started, the parking
brake may still be set or there
could be a brake problem. Refer
to Parking Brake on page 9‑35 to
see if it is set. If the parking brake
is not set, have the brake system
inspected right away.
English
Metric
This light comes on briefly while
starting the engine. If it does not
come on, have it fixed so it is ready
to warn if there is a problem.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-22
Instruments and Controls
If the regular brake system warning
light is not on, the vehicle still has
brakes, but not antilock brakes.
If the regular brake system warning
light is also on, the vehicle does not
have antilock brakes and there is a
problem with the regular brakes.
See Brake System Warning Light on
page 5‑21.
The shift must be completed into
4 (Fourth) to turn off this feature.
This helps the vehicle get the best
possible fuel economy.
Antilock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
After shifting to 4 (Fourth), the
vehicle can be downshifted to a
lower gear.
Notice: Forcing the shift lever
into any gear except 4 (Fourth)
when the 1 TO 4 SHIFT light
comes on may damage the
transmission. Shift only from
1 (First) to 4 (Fourth) when the
light comes on.
For vehicles with the Antilock Brake
System (ABS), this light comes on
briefly when the engine is started.
One-to-Four Shift Light
(Manual Transmission)
If it does not, have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer. If the
system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
This light comes on when:
.
The engine coolant temperature
If the ABS light stays on, turn the
ignition off. If the light comes on
while driving, stop as soon as it is
safely possible and turn the ignition
off. Then start the engine again to
reset the system. If the ABS light
stays on, or comes on again while
driving, the vehicle needs service.
is higher than 76°C (169°F),
.
The vehicle is going 24 to
31 km/h (15 to 19 mph) and
When this light comes on, the
vehicle can only be shifted from
1 (First) to 4 (Fourth) instead of
1 (First) to 2 (Second).
.
The vehicle 21 percent throttle
or less.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-23
For the ZR1 this light comes on
when Performance Traction mode is
activated, along with DIC messages
for the five traction modes.
Active Handling System
Light
Traction Control System
(TCS) Warning Light
When the Active Handling System
is turned off, the light comes on,
a chime sounds, and the
TRACTION SYSTEM AND
ACTIVE HANDLING – OFF
message displays in the DIC.
The Traction Control System
is off and the Active Handling
System does not assist with
controlling the vehicle.
The Active Handling System light
comes on briefly as the engine is
started. If the light does not, have
the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If the system is working normally the
light goes off.
The Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning light comes on briefly when
the engine is started.
If the light does not, have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If the system is working normally
the light then goes off.
When the Active Handling System
is turned back on, the light turns
off, a chime sounds and the
TRACTION SYSTEM AND
ACTIVE HANDLING – ON
If the light stays on or comes on
while driving, a chime sounds and
a SERVICE ACTIVE HANDLING
SYSTEM message appears on the
DIC and the vehicle need service.
If the light stays on, or comes on
while driving and a SERVICE
TRACTION SYSTEM message
displays in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), the vehicle needs
service.
message displays in the DIC.
See Ride Control System Messages
on page 5‑44 for more information.
This light also comes on while
the vehicle is in the Competitive
Driving Mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-24
Instruments and Controls
When the TCS is turned off, this
light comes on and a TRACTION
SYSTEM OFF message displays
on the DIC. When this light is on,
the TCS system does not limit
wheel spin.
When the Light Flashes First and
Then is On Steady
Tire Pressure Light
This indicates that there may be
a problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System. The light flashes
for about a minute and stays on
steady for the remainder of the
ignition cycle. This sequence
repeats with every ignition cycle.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
When the TCS is turned back on,
this light turns off and a TRACTION
SYSTEM ON message displays on
the DIC
For vehicles with a Tire Pressure
Monitor System, this light comes on
briefly when the engine is started.
It provides information about tire
pressures and the Tire Pressure
Monitor System.
Operation on page 10‑69 for
more information.
This light also comes on while
the vehicle is in the Competitive
Driving Mode.
Security Light
See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 9‑36 and Ride Control
System Messages on page 5‑44
for more information.
When the Light is On Steady
This indicates that one or more
of the tires are significantly
underinflated.
See Active Handling System on
page 9‑37 for more information on
Competitive Driving Mode and
Performance Traction Mode.
A tire pressure message can
accompany the light. See Tire
Messages on page 5‑51 for more
information. Stop as soon as
possible, and inflate the tires to
the pressure value shown on the
Tire and Loading Information Label.
See Tire Pressure on page 10‑66
for more information.
For information regarding this light
and the vehicle's security system,
see Anti-Theft Alarm System on
page 2‑12.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-25
The light goes out when the fog
lamps are turned off. See Fog
Lamps on page 6‑5 for more
information.
High-Beam on Light
Information Displays
Driver Information
Center (DIC)
Lamps on Reminder
The Driver Information Center
(DIC) display is located on the
instrument panel cluster and shows
driver personalization features
and warning/status messages.
The DIC buttons are located on
the instrument panel, to the right
of the cluster.
This light comes on when the
high-beam headlamps are in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer on page 6‑2 for more
information.
This light comes on whenever the
parking lamps are on.
The DIC comes on when the ignition
is turned on. After displaying
CORVETTE BY CHEVROLET, the
DIC shows the information that was
last displayed before the engine
was turned off.
Front Fog Lamp Light
See Exterior Lamps Off Reminder
on page 6‑2 for more information.
If a problem is detected, a warning
message appears on the DIC
display. See Vehicle Messages on
page 5‑35 for more information.
The fog lamp light comes on when
the fog lamps are in use.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-26
Instruments and Controls
TRIP: Press this button to display
your total and trip distance driven,
the elapsed time function, your
average speed, and the engine
oil life.
DIC Operation and Displays
Depending on the features on the
vehicle, the drive gear may display
on the DIC. See “Manual Paddle
Shift” under Automatic Transmission
on page 9‑28 and “Head-Up
Display (HUD)” in the index of
the Navigation system manual
for more information.
OPTION: Press this button to
choose personal options that
are available on your vehicle,
depending on the options your
vehicle is equipped with, such
as door locks, easy entry seats,
and language.
The Driver Information Center (DIC)
has different modes which can be
accessed by pressing the following
buttons located on the instrument
panel, to the right of the instrument
panel cluster.
RESET: Press this button, used
along with the other buttons, to
reset system functions, select
personal options, and turn off or
acknowledge messages on the DIC.
. 4 (Fuel): Press this button to
display fuel information such as fuel
economy and range.
2 (Gauges): Press this button
to display gauge information like oil
pressure and temperature, coolant
temperature, automatic transmission
fluid temperature, if equipped,
battery voltage, and front/rear tire
pressures.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-27
Instantaneous Fuel Economy:
Instantaneous fuel economy
reflects only the fuel economy
that the vehicle has right now and
will change frequently as driving
conditions change. Unlike average
fuel economy, this menu item
cannot be reset.
Press the fuel button again to
display the range, such as:
FUEL Button
The fuel button displays average
fuel economy and instantaneous
fuel economy, calculated for your
specific driving conditions, and
range information.
.
RANGE 48 km or
.
RANGE 30 MI
If the LOW FUEL warning is
displayed or if RANGE is less
than 64 km (40 miles), the display
will read RANGE LOW.
Average Fuel Economy: The
average fuel economy is viewed
as a long-term approximation of
your overall driving conditions.
You should reset the average fuel
economy display every time you
refuel. If you press the RESET
button in this mode while you are
driving, the system will reset this
display and begin figuring fuel
economy from that point in time.
Press the fuel button again to
display instantaneous fuel economy,
such as:
The fuel economy data used to
determine fuel range is an average
of recent driving conditions. As your
driving conditions change, this data
is gradually updated automatically.
.
INSTANT FUEL ECONOMY
11.7 L/100 km or
.
INSTANT FUEL ECONOMY
If the vehicle has been idling for a
long time, the range displayed on
the DIC could be abnormally low.
The vehicle must be driven 8–16 km
(5–10 miles) to get an accurate
reading.
20.1 MPG
Fuel Range: The range calculates
the remaining distance you can
drive without refueling. It is based
on fuel economy and the fuel
remaining in the tank.
Press the fuel button to display
average fuel economy, such as:
.
AVERAGE FUEL ECONOMY
11.7 L/100 km or
.
AVERAGE FUEL ECONOMY
20.1 MPG
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-28
Instruments and Controls
If the oil temperature is low,
the display will show OIL
TEMPERATURE LOW. If the oil
temperature is high, the display will
show OIL TEMPERATURE HIGH.
Transmission Fluid
GAGES Button
Temperature: If you have an
automatic transmission vehicle,
this display shows the automatic
transmission fluid temperature.
The gauges button displays
oil pressure, oil temperature,
coolant temperature, transmission
fluid temperature for automatic
transmission vehicles only, battery
voltage, and tire pressure
information.
Coolant Temperature: This
display shows the engine coolant
temperature.
Press the gauges button again to
display the automatic transmission
fluid temperature, such as:
.
Press the gauges button again to
display the coolant temperature,
such as:
TRANS FLUID TEMP 51°C or
Oil Pressure: This display shows
the oil pressure.
.
TRANS FLUID TEMP 123°F
Press the gauges button to display
the oil pressure, such as:
If the transmission fluid temperature
is low, the display will show
TRANS FLUID TEMP LOW. If the
transmission fluid temperature is
high, the display will show TRANS
FLUID TEMP HIGH.
.
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE 51°C or
.
OIL PRESSURE 276 kPa or
.
COOLANT
.
OIL PRESSURE 40 PSI
TEMPERATURE 123°F
Oil Temperature: This display
shows the oil temperature.
If the coolant temperature is low,
the display will show COOLANT
TEMPERATURE LOW. If the
coolant temperature is high, the
display will show COOLANT
TEMPERATURE HIGH.
Press the gauges button again to
display the oil temperature, such as:
.
OIL TEMPERATURE 112°C or
.
OIL TEMPERATURE 234°F
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-29
Battery Voltage: This display
shows the current battery voltage.
Both of the trip odometers can
TRIP Button
be used simultaneously. The trip
odometers can be reset by pressing
the RESET button on the DIC.
The TRIP button displays the
odometer, trip distance, elapsed
time, average speed, and oil life
remaining information.
Press the gauges button again to
display the battery voltage, such as:
There is also a miles since last
ignition feature that displays the
number of kilometers (miles) driven
since you last started the vehicle.
Press and hold the RESET button
for three seconds, then release it.
The kilometers (miles) since the last
ignition cycle will be set into the trip
odometer.
.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
13.5 VOLTS
Odometer: The odometer shows
how far your vehicle has been
driven in either kilometers or miles.
Press the TRIP button to display
odometer readings, such as:
Tire Pressure: This display shows
the tire pressure for each tire.
Press the gauges button again to
display the tire pressure for the front
tires, such as:
.
ODOMETER 20008 km or
.
ODOMETER 12345 MI
.
FRONT TIRE PRESSURES
Elapsed Timer: Press the
TRIP button until ELAPSED
TIMER is displayed, such as
ELAPSED TIMER .00.
L 234 kPa R 228 kPa or
You can also display the odometer
by turning on the parking lamps.
.
FRONT TIRE PRESSURES
L 34 PSI R 33 PSI
Trip Odometers: There are two trip
odometers. Press the TRIP button
to display TRIP ODOMETER A
readings and press the button again
to display TRIP ODOMETER B
readings, such as:
Press the gauges button again to
display the tire pressure for the rear
tires, such as:
When the ignition is in on, the
DIC can be used as a stopwatch.
The display can show hours,
minutes and seconds. The elapsed
time indicator will record up to
23 hours, 59 minutes and
59 seconds, then it will reset to zero
and continue counting. The display
appears as ELAPSED TIMER .00
in the elapsed time function.
.
REAR TIRE PRESSURES
L 234 kPa R 228 kPa or
.
TRIP ODOMETER A 209.9 km or
.
REAR TIRE PRESSURES
.
.
.
TRIP ODOMETER A 130.5 MI
TRIP ODOMETER B 483.5 km or
TRIP ODOMETER B 300.5 MI
L 34 PSI R 33 PSI
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-30
Instruments and Controls
You can start or stop the elapsed
time by pressing the RESET button.
To reset the elapsed time to zero,
press the RESET button for
three seconds while the timer
is displayed.
Engine Oil Life: Press the TRIP
button until the engine oil life is
displayed, such as OIL LIFE
REMAINING 89%.
accidentally at any time other than
when the oil has just been changed.
It cannot be reset accurately until
the next oil change.
This is an estimate of the engine
oil's remaining useful life. It will
show 100% when the system is
reset after an oil change. It will
alert you to change the oil on a
schedule consistent with your
driving conditions.
See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑2 and Engine Oil on
page 10‑15 for more information.
Pressing and holding the RESET
button for at least 10 seconds will
reset the timer display to the time
since last ignition cycle.
OPTION Button
The OPTION button allows you
to access the PERSONAL
OPTIONS menu and customize
the personalization settings on your
vehicle. See Vehicle Personalization
on page 5‑55 for more information.
Average Speed: Press the TRIP
button until the average speed is
displayed, such as:
When the remaining oil life is low,
the system will alert you with the
message CHANGE ENGINE OIL.
.
AVERAGE SPEED 100 km/h or
Remember, you must reset the
engine oil life system yourself
after each oil change. It will not
reset itself. To reset the system,
see Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑22. Be careful not to
reset the engine oil life system
.
AVERAGE SPEED 62 MPH
RESET Button
Press and hold the RESET button to
reset to 0.0 km/h (mph).
The RESET button, used along
with other buttons, will reset
system functions and turn off or
acknowledge messages on the DIC.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-31
The information may be displayed
in English or metric units and
appears as an image focused
out toward the front of the vehicle.
The HUD consists of the following
information:
transmission into the next higher
gear. An arrow pointing up will
light up on the display just prior
to reaching the engine fuel
cut-off mode. This cut-off is
about 6,500 RPM for the
LS3 engine, 6,600 RPM for
the LS9 & ZR1 engines and
7,000 RPM for the LS7 engine.
Head-Up Display (HUD)
WARNING
{
If the HUD image is too bright,
or too high in your field of view, it
may take you more time to see
things you need to see when it is
dark outside. Be sure to keep the
HUD image dim and placed low in
your field of view.
.
Speedometer
.
Turn Signal Indicators
.
.
.
High-Beam Indicator Symbol
Check Gauges Warning
.
Tachometer
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge
.
Manual Paddle Shift Gear
.
Indicator (If Equipped)
For vehicles with the Head-Up
Display (HUD), you can see some
of the driver information that
appears on the instrument panel
cluster.
Transmission Fluid Temperature
Gauge, (Automatic Transmission
Vehicles Only)
These displays on the HUD are
for use when using the manual
paddle shift controls to shift the
transmission. See “Manual
Paddle Shift” in Automatic
.
.
.
.
.
Engine Oil Temperature Gauge
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
G-Force Gauge
Transmission on page 9‑28.
.
Shift Light
Boost Gauge (If Equipped)
This light is used for
Audio Functions, Street
Mode Only
performance driving to
indicate that the vehicle's
best performance level has
been reached to shift the
.
Navigation, Only with Navigation
Radio, Turn-by-Turn Guidance
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-32
Instruments and Controls
There are three HUD modes that
can be viewed in the HUD display.
Press the MODE button to scroll
through these modes in the
following order:
English
Metric
English
Metric
English
Track Mode 1 supports the G-Force
gauge and minor gauges with a
circular tachometer.
Track Mode 2 supports G-Force
gauges, boost gauge w/ZR1,
and minor gauges with a linear
tachometer.
Metric
When the desired HUD display has
been selected, release the MODE
button.
Street Mode supports audio and
navigation functions with your
choice of tachometer settings.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-33
Within each mode, the display, can
be further customized by pressing
the PAGE button. Pressing this
button in each mode will turn off
and on the following:
(X.XX G) and corresponding
G gauge bar will overwrite the
current G value.
you may miss something important,
such as a warning light. Under
important warning conditions,
the CHECK GAGES warning will
illuminate in the HUD. View your
Driver Information Center (DIC)
for more information.
.
Street Mode — No tachometer,
circular tachometer, and linear
tachometer.
.
Track Modes 1 and 2 — No
English
minor gauge, coolant
temperature, transmission
oil temperature, engine oil
temperature, engine oil
pressure, and boost gauge.
While in Track Mode 1 or 2, the
maximum G value achieved
during the current ignition cycle
can be displayed by pressing
and holding the PAGE button.
The maximum G display will be
shown until the PAGE button is
released. The maximum G value
display will be identical to the
normal G value display, except
the maximum G gauge digits
Metric
Be sure to continue scanning the
displays, controls and driving
environment just as you would in a
vehicle without HUD. If you never
look at the instrument panel cluster,
The HUD controls are located to the
left of the steering wheel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-34
Instruments and Controls
To adjust the HUD so it can be seen
properly, do the following:
2. Adjust the seat to a comfortable
driving position. If your seat
position changes, the HUD
may need to be re-adjusted.
The HUD information can be
displayed in one of six languages
including English, Spanish, French,
German, Italian or Japanese.
The speedometer can be displayed
in either English or Metric units.
1. Start the engine and press the
HUD dimmer control all the way
up by pressing the (+) button.
3. Press the up or down arrows
to center the HUD image in
your view.
The brightness of the HUD
image is determined by the
light conditions in the direction
the vehicle is facing and where
you have the HUD dimmer
control set. If you are facing a
dark object or a heavily shaded
area, the HUD may anticipate
that you are entering a dark
area and may begin to dim.
To change the language and unit
selections, see “OPTION” under
“Operation and Displays” in Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑25.
The HUD image can only be
adjusted up and down, not
side-to-side.
4. Press the dimmer control
downward until the HUD image
is no brighter than necessary.
Clean the inside of the windshield
as needed to remove any dirt or film
that reduces the sharpness or clarity
of the HUD image.
To turn HUD off, press and hold the
(–) button until the HUD display
turns off.
It is possible for sunlight to enter
the HUD making it difficult to
see the image. The display
will return to normal when the
sunlight is no longer entering
the HUD.
To clean the HUD, spray household
glass cleaner on a soft, clean cloth.
Wipe the HUD lens gently, then dry
it. Do not spray cleaner directly on
the lens because the cleaner could
leak into the unit.
If the sun comes out or it becomes
cloudy, the HUD brightness may
need to be adjusted again using
the dimmer control. Polarized
sunglasses could make the HUD
image harder to see.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-35
If the ignition is on and the HUD
image cannot be seen, check to
see if:
Battery Voltage and
Charging Messages
Vehicle Messages
Messages displayed on the DIC
indicate the status of the vehicle
or some action may be needed
to correct a condition. Multiple
messages may appear one after
another.
.
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
Something is covering the
HUD unit.
This message displays when the
vehicle has detected that the battery
voltage is dropping beyond a
reasonable point. The battery saver
system starts reducing certain
features of the vehicle that you may
be able to notice. At the point that
features are disabled, this message
is displayed. It means that the
vehicle is trying to save the charge
in the battery. Turn off unnecessary
accessories to allow the battery to
recharge.
.
The HUD dimmer control is
adjusted properly.
.
The HUD image is adjusted to
The messages that do not
the proper height.
require immediate action can be
acknowledged and cleared by
pressing the RESET button.
.
Ambient light is low, in the
direction the vehicle is facing.
The messages that require
immediate action cannot be
cleared until that action is
performed. All messages should
be taken seriously and clearing
the messages does not correct
the problem.
.
A fuse is blown. See Fuses and
Circuit Breakers on page 10‑51.
Keep in mind that the windshield
is part of the HUD system.
See Windshield Replacement on
page 10‑47.
BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH
See Voltmeter Gauge on page 5‑15.
BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW
See Voltmeter Gauge on page 5‑15.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-36
Instruments and Controls
SERVICE CHARGING SYSTEM
CHECK BRAKE FLUID
Brake System Messages
If this message displays while you
are driving, there may be a problem
with the electrical charging system.
It could mean that there is a loose
or broken drive belt or that there is
another electrical problem. Have the
vehicle checked right away by your
dealer. Driving while this message is
on could drain the battery.
This message displays, a sound
will be heard, and the brake
system warning light on the
instrument panel cluster turns
on if the ignition is on to inform the
driver that the brake fluid level is
low. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 5‑21. Have the brake
system serviced by your dealer as
soon as possible. See Brakes on
page 10‑38.
ABS (Antilock Brake System)
ACTIVE
This message displays when the
Antilock Brake System (ABS) is
adjusting brake pressure to help
avoid a braking skid.
Slippery road conditions may exist
if this message is displayed, so
adjust your driving accordingly.
The message stays on for a few
seconds after the system stops
adjusting brake pressure. See
Antilock Brake System (ABS) on
page 9‑34 for more information.
If you must drive a short distance
with the message on, be certain to
turn off the vehicle's accessories,
such as the radio and air
SERVICE ANTILOCK BRAKES
If this message displays while
you are driving, stop as soon as
possible and turn the ignition off.
Then start the engine again to reset
the system. If the message stays
on, or comes back on again while
you are driving, the vehicle is in
need of service. See your dealer.
If the antilock brake system (ABS)
warning light is on and the regular
brake system warning light
conditioner.
Multiple chimes sound when this
message is displayed.
CHANGE BRAKE PADS
To acknowledge the message, press
the RESET button. The message
reappears every 10 minutes until
this condition changes.
On vehicles with electronic brake
pad wear sensors, this message will
be displayed when the pads are
worn. See your dealer for service.
is not on, you still have brakes,
but do not have ABS.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-37
If the regular brake system warning
light is also on, you do not have
ABS and there is a problem with the
brakes. See Antilock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light on page 5‑22
and Brake System Warning Light on
page 5‑21.
SET PARK BRAKE TO
MOVE TOP
Convertible Top
Messages
If the vehicle has a manual
ATTACH TRUNK PARTITION
transmission, this message displays
and a sound will be heard if you
try to operate the power convertible
top without first setting the parking
brake. Set the parking brake
before trying to operate the power
convertible top. See Convertible Top
on page 2‑22 for more information.
If the vehicle has a power
convertible top, this message
displays and a sound will be heard
if the trunk partition is not in place.
Open the hatch/trunk and make
sure the trunk partition is secure
and no objects are on the trunk
partition. See Rear Storage on
page 4‑1 for more information.
If this message is displayed, the
Traction Control System (TCS)
and the Active Handling System
will also be disabled. The DIC will
scroll three messages: SERVICE
ANTILOCK BRAKES, SERVICE
TRACTION SYSTEM, and
SERVICE ACTIVE HANDLING,
and the instrument panel cluster
lights will come on along with a
sound. When the service message
is displayed, the computer
SHIFT TO PARK OR SET PARK
BRAKE FOR TOP
CLOSE TRUNK TO MOVE TOP
If the vehicle has an automatic
transmission, this message displays
and a sound will be heard if you try
to operate the power convertible top
without first shifting into P (Park) or
setting the parking brake. Either
shift the vehicle into P (Park) or set
the parking brake before trying to
operate the power convertible top.
See Convertible Top on page 2‑22
for more information.
This message displays and a sound
will be heard if the trunk is open
while you are trying to operate
the convertible top. Make sure
the trunk is closed before operating
the convertible top. See Convertible
Top on page 2‑22.
controlled systems will not assist the
driver. Have the system repaired by
your dealer as soon as possible.
Adjust your driving accordingly.
To acknowledge these messages,
press the RESET button.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-38
Instruments and Controls
TOO COLD TO MOVE TOP
TOP NOT SECURE
Cruise Control Messages
This message displays and a
sound will be heard when the
power convertible top button is
pressed and the power convertible
top pump motor temperature is
below −20°C (−4°F). Wait for the
power convertible top pump motor
to warm up before using the power
convertible top.
This message displays and a
sound will be heard when the
power convertible top button is
released before the top open or
close operation is complete or if the
top is closed without the header
latch engaged. Press and hold the
convertible top button to fully open
or close the top, and make sure that
the header latch is engaged after
the top is closed.
CRUISE DISENGAGED
This message displays briefly when
you disengage the cruise control
system by stepping on the brake on
an automatic transmission vehicle or
the clutch on a manual transmission
vehicle, or by turning off the cruise
control switch. See Cruise Control
on page 9‑44 for more information.
TOP MOTOR OVER
TEMPERATURE
CRUISE SET TO XXX MPH
(XXX km/h)
UNLATCH HEADER TO
MOVE TOP
This message displays and a
sound will be heard when the
power convertible top button is
pressed and the power convertible
top pump motor temperature is over
105°C (221°F). Wait for the power
convertible top pump motor to cool
down before using the power
convertible top.
See Cruise Control on page 9‑44.
This message displays and a
sound will be heard if you try to
lower the convertible top without
first unlocking the top. Move
the latch handle to unlock the
convertible top. See Convertible
Top on page 2‑22.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-39
TONNEAU AJAR (Convertible)
COOLANT OVER
TEMPERATURE
Door Ajar Messages
This message displays when
the convertible top is not closed
completely. Make sure that the
top is closed completely. See
Convertible Top on page 2‑22 for
more information.
DRIVER DOOR AJAR
This message displays and a sound
will be heard if the engine coolant
exceeds 124°C (255°F). If you have
been operating the vehicle under
normal driving conditions, pull off
the road, stop the vehicle, and turn
off the engine as soon as possible.
This message displays if the driver
door is not closed properly. Make
sure that the door is closed
completely.
HATCH AJAR (Coupe)
TRUNK AJAR (Convertible)
This message displays when the
hatch is not closed completely.
Make sure that the hatch is closed
completely. See Hatch on page 2‑10
for more information.
This message displays when the
trunk is not closed completely.
Make sure that the trunk is closed
completely. See Hatch on page 2‑10
for more information.
You can monitor the coolant
temperature with the gauges
button on the DIC or the engine
coolant temperature gauge on
the instrument panel cluster. See
Engine Overheating on page 10‑34,
Driver Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑25, and Engine Coolant
Temperature Gauge on page 5‑15.
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR
Engine Cooling System
Messages
This message displays if the
passenger door is not closed
properly. Make sure that the door
is closed completely.
CHECK COOLANT LEVEL
To acknowledge the message, press
the RESET button. The message
and sound will come back on until
this condition changes. If you do
not press the RESET button, the
message remains on until the
condition changes.
This message displays when the
engine coolant level is low. Have
the cooling system serviced by your
dealer as soon as possible. See
Engine Coolant on page 10‑29.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-40
Instruments and Controls
engine oil life system must be reset.
See “Engine Oil Life” under Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑25. Also, see Engine Oil on
page 10‑15 and Engine Oil Life
System on page 10‑22 for more
information.
ENGINE OVERHEATED –
STOP ENGINE
HOT ENGINE AIR
CONDITIONING OFF
This message displays and a sound
will be heard when the engine
has overheated. Stop and turn the
engine off immediately to avoid
severe engine damage. See Engine
Overheating on page 10‑34.
This message displays when
the engine coolant becomes
hotter than the normal operating
temperature. To avoid added strain
on a hot engine, the air conditioning
compressor is automatically turned
off. When the coolant temperature
returns to normal, the A/C operation
automatically resumes. You can
continue to drive the vehicle. If this
message continues to appear, have
the system repaired by your dealer
as soon as possible to avoid
CHECK OIL LEVEL
On some vehicles, this message
displays and two chimes sound if
the oil level in the vehicle is low.
Once the vehicle senses a change
in the engine oil level, the light
remains off.
ENGINE PROTECTION
REDUCE ENGINE RPM
This message displays if the
engine oil temperature exceeds
160°C (320°F). Check the engine
coolant temperature and engine oil
level. If the engine is too hot, see
Engine Overheating on page 10‑34.
The vehicle may need service, so
see your dealer.
If this message appears after
starting the engine, the engine oil
level may be too low. You may need
to add oil. See Engine Overheating
on page 10‑34.
compressor damage.
Engine Oil Messages
CHANGE ENGINE OIL
You can monitor the oil temperature
with the gauges button on the DIC.
See Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 5‑25.
This message displays when the
life of the engine oil has expired.
See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑2. After an oil change, the
To acknowledge the message, press
the RESET button. The message
reappears every 10 minutes until
this condition changes.
Multiple chimes sound when
this message is displayed. This
message remains displayed and
active until the issue is resolved.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-41
To acknowledge the message, press
the RESET button. The message
reappears every five minutes until
this condition changes.
LOW OIL PRESSURE
REDUCED ENGINE POWER
This message displays if low
oil pressure levels occur. If this
message appears while the engine
is running, stop the engine and do
not operate it until the cause of low
oil pressure is corrected. Severe
damage to the engine can result.
A sound will be heard when this
message is displayed. See Engine
Oil on page 10‑15.
If this message displays and the
check engine light comes on,
a noticeable reduction in the
vehicle's performance may occur.
If the REDUCED ENGINE POWER
message is displayed, but there
is no reduction in performance,
proceed to your destination. The
performance may be reduced the
next time the vehicle is driven.
If the REDUCED ENGINE
POWER message is displayed in
combination with the COOLANT
OVER TEMPERATURE message,
see Engine Overheating on
page 10‑34.
Fuel System Messages
The vehicle may be driven at a
reduced speed while the REDUCED
ENGINE POWER message is
displayed, but acceleration and
speed may be reduced. Anytime
the check engine light stays on,
the vehicle should be taken to
your dealer as soon as possible
for diagnosis and repair. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 5‑18 for more information.
Engine Power Messages
CHECK GAS CAP
ENGINE DRAG CONTROL
ACTIVE
This message displays if the fuel
cap has not been fully tightened.
Check the fuel cap to make
This message displays when
engine drag control is active.
When driving in a lower gear in
rainy, snowy, or icy conditions and
then letting up on the accelerator
or downshifting, the rear wheels
may begin to slip and this message
displays. This message stays on for
a few seconds following the engine
drag control event.
sure that it is on properly. Once
tightened, it takes at least one
overnight park to reset or clear this
message. If both the CHECK GAS
CAP message and the malfunction
indicator lamp in the instrument
panel cluster are on, you may need
to see your dealer for service.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 5‑18 for more information.
Multiple chimes sound when this
message is displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-42
Instruments and Controls
LOW FUEL
NO FOBS DETECTED
Key and Lock Messages
This message displays when the
fuel tank is less than 10 percent
full and the display is turned off.
A sound will be heard when this
message is displayed. Refill the fuel
tank as soon as possible. See Fuel
Gauge on page 5‑11.
This message displays if the vehicle
does not detect the presence of a
keyless access transmitter when
you have attempted to start the
vehicle or a vehicle door has just
closed. The following conditions
may cause this message to appear:
FOB AUTOLEARN WAIT
XX MINUTES
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to
Your Vehicle” under Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2‑3.
.
Driver-added equipment plugged
FOB BATTERY LOW
SERVICE FUEL SYSTEM
into the accessory power outlet
on the center console is causing
interference. Examples of these
devices are cell phones and cell
phone chargers, two-way radios,
power inverters, or similar items.
Try moving the keyless access
transmitter away from these
devices when starting the
vehicle. In addition, PDA devices
and remote garage and gate
openers may also generate
Electromagnetic Interference
(EMI) that may interfere with
the keyless access transmitter.
Do not carry the keyless access
transmitter in the same pocket or
bag as these devices.
See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 2‑3.
This message displays if the
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
has detected a problem within
the fuel system. Have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer. This
message also displays when the
cluster is not getting fuel information
from the PCM.
KNOWN FOB
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to
Your Vehicle” under Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2‑3.
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF FOBS
LEARNED
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to
Your Vehicle” under Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2‑3.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-43
.
.
The vehicle is experiencing
Electromagnetic
The vehicle's battery voltage is
OFF–ACCESSORY TO LEARN
low. The battery voltage must be
above 10 volts for the keyless
access transmitter to be
detected properly.
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to
Your Vehicle” under Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2‑3.
Interference (EMI). Some
locations, such as airports,
automatic toll booths, and some
gas stations have EMI fields
which may interfere with the
keyless access transmitter.
NO FOB - OFF OR RUN?
READY FOR FOB #X
This message displays when the
keyless access transmitter is not
detected inside the vehicle while
you are trying to turn the ignition
off. The vehicle may be near a
strong radio antenna signal causing
the keyless access system to be
jammed. The vehicle will remain
in ACCESSORY until the vehicle
is turned off or is restarted,
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to
Your Vehicle” under Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2‑3.
or five minutes has expired. If you
turn the ignition off and you cannot
find the keyless access transmitter,
you will not be able to restart the
vehicle. The keyless access
transmitter needs to be inside of the
vehicle in order for the vehicle to
start. See Starting the Engine on
page 9‑21 for more information.
If moving the transmitter to
different locations within the
vehicle does not help, place
the transmitter in the glove
box transmitter pocket with the
buttons facing to the right and
then press the START button.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-44
Instruments and Controls
COMPETITIVE DRIVING MODE
Lamp Messages
Ride Control System
Messages
This message displays and a
sound will be heard when the
Competitive Driving mode is
selected. The instrument panel
cluster light will be on when the
Competitive Driving mode is
selected. If your vehicle is equipped
with a manual transmission, Launch
Control is available when this
mode selected. The Traction
Control System (TCS) will not
be operating while in the
Competitive Driving mode. Adjust
your driving accordingly. This
system is available on all models
except ZR1. See Competitive
Driving Mode on page 9‑38,
including the “Launch Control”
information.
HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED
ACTIVE HANDLING
This message displays if it is dark
enough outside and the headlamps
and the Twilight Sentinel® controls
are off. This message informs the
driver that turning on the exterior
lamps is recommended. It has
become dark enough outside to
require the headlamps and/or other
exterior lamps.
This message displays when
the Active Handling System is
operating. The Active Handling
System is a computer controlled
system that assists the driver in
controlling the vehicle in difficult
driving conditions. You may feel
or hear the system working and
see the ACTIVE HANDLING
message displayed in the DIC.
This message stays on for a few
seconds following the active
TURN SIGNAL ON
This message displays and a
sound will be heard if a turn signal
is left on for 1.2 km (three-quarters
of a mile). Move the turn signal/
multifunction lever to the off
position.
handling event. This is normal when
the system is operating. See Active
Handling System on page 9‑37 and
Braking on page 9‑3.
To acknowledge this message,
press the RESET button.
ACTIVE HANDLING READY
This message displays when the
functional check of the Active
Handling System has been
completed. See Active Handling
System on page 9‑37 for more
information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-45
MAXIMUM SPEED
129 km/h (80 MPH)
PERF TRAC 1 – WET ACTIVE
HANDLING ON
PERF TRAC 2 – DRY ACTIVE
HANDLING ON
This message displays when
a malfunction is present in the
Selective Ride Control system.
The vehicle speed will be limited to
a value determined by the vehicle
when the shock absorber system
has failed and the shocks are in
their full soft mode. Have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer as soon as
possible.
This message displays and a sound
will be heard when this Performance
Traction Management mode is
selected. The instrument panel
cluster light will also be on when
this mode is selected. Launch
Control is available when this
mode selected. In this mode
the Traction Control and Active
Handling System are available
but intended for use on wet race
track conditions. Adjust your
This message displays and a sound
will be heard when this Performance
Traction Management mode is
selected. The instrument panel
cluster light will also be on when
this mode is selected. Launch
Control is available when this
mode selected. In this mode
the Traction Control and Active
Handling System are available
but intended for use on dry race
track conditions. Adjust your
To acknowledge the message, press
the RESET button. The message
reappears every 10 minutes until
this condition changes.
driving accordingly. This system
is available only on ZR1 models.
See “Performance Traction
driving accordingly. This system
is available only on ZR1 models.
See “Performance Traction
Management” and “Launch Control”
under Competitive Driving Mode on
page 9‑38 for more information
about the use of this mode.
Management” and “Launch Control”
under Competitive Driving Mode on
page 9‑38 for more information
about the use of this mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-46
Instruments and Controls
PERF TRAC 3 – SPORT
ACTIVE HANDLING ON
PERF TRAC 4 – SPORT
ACTIVE HANDLING OFF
PERF TRAC 5 – RACE ACTIVE
HANDLING OFF
This message displays and a sound
will be heard when this Performance
Traction Management mode is
selected. The instrument panel
cluster light will also be on when
this mode is selected. Launch
Control is available when this
mode selected. In this mode
the Traction Control and Active
Handling System are available
but intended for use on dry race
track conditions. Adjust your
driving accordingly. This system
is available only on ZR1 models.
See “Performance Traction
Management” and “Launch Control”
under Competitive Driving Mode on
page 9‑38 for more information
about the use of this mode.
This message displays and a sound
will be heard when this Performance
Traction Management mode is
selected. The instrument panel
cluster light will also be on when
this mode is selected. Launch
Control is available when this
mode selected. In this mode the
Traction Control is available but
intended for use on dry race track
conditions. The Active Handling
System is disabled when this mode
is selected. This mode will require
more driver skill than modes 1-3.
Adjust your driving accordingly.
This system is available only on
ZR1 models. See “Performance
Traction Management” and “Launch
Control” under Competitive Driving
Mode on page 9‑38 for more
information about the use of
This message displays and a sound
will be heard when this Performance
Traction Management mode is
selected. The instrument panel
cluster light will also be on when
this mode is selected. Launch
Control is available when this
mode selected. In this mode the
Traction Control is available but
intended for use on dry race track
conditions. The Active Handling
System is disabled when this mode
is selected. This mode will require
more driver skill than modes 1-4.
Adjust your driving accordingly.
This system is available only on
ZR1 models. See “Performance
Traction Management” and “Launch
Control” under Competitive Driving
Mode on page 9‑38 for more
information about the use of
this mode.
this mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-47
SERVICE ACTIVE HANDLING
SYSTEM
SERVICE RIDE CONTROL
SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM
This message displays when the
Selective Ride Control system
has detected a malfunction and
the system must be serviced.
See your dealer. If a fault is
present in the Selective Ride
Control system which causes
the shocks to be in their full soft
condition, the messages SERVICE
RIDE CONTROL, SHOCKS
INOPERATIVE, and MAXIMUM
SPEED 129 km/h (80 MPH) will
display together. See Selective Ride
Control on page 9‑42 for more
information.
If this message displays when you
are driving, there is a problem with
the Traction Control System (TCS)
and the vehicle is in need of
service. See your dealer. When this
message is displayed, the system
will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your
driving accordingly.
This message displays if there is a
problem with the Active Handling
System and the vehicle needs
service. The active handling system
light on the instrument panel cluster
also turns on and a sound will be
heard. See your dealer. When this
message is displayed, the system
is not working. Adjust your driving
accordingly. See Active Handling
System on page 9‑37 for more
information.
The traction control system (TCS)
warning light on the instrument
panel cluster will also turn on and
a sound will be heard.
When this message is displayed,
the computer controlled systems will
not assist the driver in controlling
the vehicle. Have the system
repaired by your dealer as soon
as possible. Adjust your driving
accordingly. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 9‑36 for
more information.
To acknowledge the message, press
the RESET button.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-48
Instruments and Controls
SHOCKS INOPERATIVE
TRACTION SYSTEM AND
ACTIVE HANDLING – OFF
TRACTION SYSTEM AND
ACTIVE HANDLING – ON
This message displays when a
malfunction is present in the
Selective Ride Control system
which is causing the shocks to
be in their full soft mode. This is a
warning to the driver that the vehicle
handling may be affected. Have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer as
soon as possible.
This message displays, the
instrument panel cluster light
turns on, and a sound will be
If the Traction Control System (TCS)
and Active Handling System are
off, this message displays briefly,
the instrument panel cluster light
turns off, and a sound will be heard
when the TCS and Active Handling
System are turned on by briefly
pressing the Active Handling
System button on the console.
See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 9‑36 and Active Handling
System on page 9‑37 for more
information.
heard when the Traction Control
System (TCS) and Active Handling
System are turned off by pressing
the Active Handling System button
on the console for five seconds.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
remains on with the TCS and Active
Handling System off. Adjust your
driving accordingly. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 9‑36
and Active Handling System on
page 9‑37 for more information.
To acknowledge the message, press
the RESET button. The message
reappears every 10 minutes until
this condition changes.
TRACTION SYSTEM ACTIVE
This message displays when the
Traction Control System (TCS) is
limiting wheel spin. Slippery road
conditions may exist if this message
is displayed, so adjust your driving
accordingly. The message stays
on for a few seconds after the
To acknowledge this message,
press the RESET button.
TCS stops limiting wheel spin.
See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 9‑36 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
BUCKLE SEATBELT
5-49
TRACTION SYSTEM – OFF
Safety Belt Messages
This message displays and stays
on, a sound will be heard, and
the traction control system (TCS)
warning light on the instrument
panel cluster turns on when the
TCS is turned off by pressing the
Active Handling System button on
the console. See Traction Control
System (TCS) Warning Light on
page 5‑23. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 9‑36 for
more information.
This message reminds you to
buckle the driver's safety belt.
BUCKLE PASSENGER
This message reminds you to
buckle the passenger's safety belt.
This message displays and a sound
will be heard when the ignition is on,
the driver's safety belt is unbuckled,
and the vehicle is in motion. You
should buckle your safety belt.
This message displays and a sound
will be heard when the ignition is on,
the driver's safety belt is buckled,
the passenger's safety belt is
If the driver remains unbuckled
when the ignition is on and the
vehicle is in motion, the reminder
will be repeated. If the driver's
safety belt is already buckled, this
message will not come on.
unbuckled with the passenger
airbag enabled, and the vehicle
is in motion. You should have the
passenger buckle their safety belt.
To acknowledge the message, press
the RESET button.
The reminder will be repeated if
the ignition is on, the vehicle is in
motion, the driver is buckled and the
passenger is still unbuckled, and the
passenger airbag is enabled. If the
passenger's safety belt is already
buckled, this message will not
come on.
This message is an additional
reminder to the safety belt reminder
light in the instrument panel cluster.
See Safety Belt Reminders on
page 5‑16 for more information.
TRACTION SYSTEM – ON
This message displays and a sound
will be heard when the Traction
Control System (TCS) is turned on
by pressing the Active Handling
System button on the console.
This message automatically clears
from the DIC display on its own.
See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 9‑36 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-50
Instruments and Controls
SERVICE ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
Anti-Theft Alarm System
Messages
Starting the Vehicle
Messages
This message displays if an
electrical problem has occurred
within the Powertrain Control
Module (PCM). Have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer.
INTRUSION SENSOR OFF
PRESS BRAKE TO START
ENGINE (Automatic
Transmission Only)
This message may display when the
anti-theft alarm has been disarmed.
This message displays if you
try to start the engine by pressing
the keyless ignition start button
without having the brake pressed.
The brake needs to be pressed
when starting the engine. See
Ignition Positions on page 9‑20 for
more information.
INTRUSION SENSOR ON
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
This message may display when the
anti-theft alarm has been armed.
This message displays and a sound
will be heard when there may be an
electrical or another system problem
with the vehicle. Have your vehicle
checked by your dealer if this
Service Vehicle Messages
SERVICE AIR CONDITIONING
message keeps appearing.
This message displays when the
electronic sensors that control
the air conditioning and heating
systems are no longer working.
Have the climate control system
serviced by your dealer if you
notice a drop in heating and air
conditioning efficiency.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-51
To acknowledge the message, press
Tire Messages
WARNING (Continued)
the RESET button. A message
reappears every 10 minutes until
the condition is corrected.
HIGH TIRE PRESSURE
message is displayed. Drive
cautiously and check your tire
pressures as soon as you can.
This message may be displayed
when one or more of the tires is
over-inflated. This message also
displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT
FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT
REAR to indicate which tire is
affected. You can receive more
than one tire pressure message
at a time. To read other messages
that may have been sent at the
same time, press the RESET
button. If a tire pressure message
appears on the DIC, stop as soon
as you can. Have the tire pressures
checked and set to those shown on
the Tire Loading Information label.
See Run-Flat Tires on page 10‑59,
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑14,
Tire Pressure on page 10‑66, and
Tire Pressure Monitor System on
page 10‑68. The DIC also shows
the tire pressure values. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
LOW TIRE PRESSURE or TIRE
LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE
This message displays when one or
more of the tires is under-inflated.
This message also displays LEFT
FRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT
REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate
which tire is affected. Multiple
chimes sound and the tire pressure
light on the instrument panel cluster
turns on when this message is
displayed. See Tire Pressure Light
on page 5‑24. You can receive more
than one tire pressure message at a
time. To read other messages that
may have been sent at the same
time, press the RESET button. If a
tire pressure message appears on
the DIC, stop as soon as you can.
Have the tire pressures checked
and set to those shown on the
WARNING
{
When the LOW TIRE
PRESSURE or TIRE FLAT
message is displayed on the
Driver Information Center, your
vehicle's handling capabilities
will be reduced during severe
maneuvers. The active handling
system will be affected. See
Active Handling System on
page 9‑37. If you drive too fast,
you could lose control of your
vehicle. You or others could be
injured. Do not drive over 90 km/h
(55 mph) when the LOW TIRE
PRESSURE or TIRE FLAT
(Continued)
Tire Loading Information label.
page 5‑25.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-52
Instruments and Controls
See Run-Flat Tires on page 10‑59,
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑14,
Tire Pressure on page 10‑66, and
Tire Pressure Monitor System on
page 10‑68. The DIC also shows
the tire pressure values. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑25.
This message displays when
one or more of the tires is flat.
This message also displays LEFT
FRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT
REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate
which tire is affected. Multiple
chimes sound and the tire pressure
light on the instrument panel cluster
comes on when this message is
displayed. See Tire Pressure Light
on page 5‑24.
TIRE FLAT
WARNING
{
When the LOW TIRE
PRESSURE or TIRE FLAT
message is displayed on the
Driver Information Center, your
vehicle's handling capabilities
will be reduced during severe
maneuvers. If you drive too fast,
you could lose control of your
vehicle. You or others could be
injured. Do not drive over 55 mph
(90 km/h) when the LOW TIRE
PRESSURE or TIRE FLAT
message is displayed. Drive
cautiously and check your tire
pressures as soon as you can.
To acknowledge the message, press
the RESET button. A message
reappears every 10 minutes until the
condition is corrected.
This message is followed by
the MAXIMUM SPEED 90 km/h
(55 MPH) message, and then by the
REDUCED HANDLING message.
The Active Handling System will
intervene more quickly when a flat
tire has been detected. Adjust your
driving accordingly.
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR
This message displays if a part
on the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) is not working
properly. The tire pressure light
also flashes and then remains
on during the same ignition cycle.
See Tire Pressure Light on
page 5‑24. Several conditions may
cause this message to appear. See
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 10‑69 for more information.
If the warning comes on and stays
on, there may be a problem with the
TPMS. See your dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-53
You can receive more than one
tire pressure message at a time.
To read other messages that may
have been sent at the same time,
press the RESET button. If a tire
pressure message appears on the
DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have
the tire pressures checked and set
to those shown on the Tire Loading
Information label. See Run-Flat
Tires on page 10‑59, Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑14, Tire Pressure
on page 10‑66, and Tire Pressure
Monitor System on page 10‑68.
The DIC also shows the tire
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE
ENGINE
Transmission Messages
SERVICE TRANSMISSION
This message displays and four
chimes sound if the transmission
fluid temperature rises above
132°C (270°F) or rises rapidly.
The transmission may shift gears
or apply the torque converter clutch
to reduce the fluid temperature.
Driving aggressively or driving
on long hills can cause the
This message displays when there
is a problem with the transmission.
See your dealer for service.
SHIFT TO PARK
If the vehicle has an automatic
transmission, this message displays
if the vehicle is not in P (Park)
when the engine is being turned off.
The vehicle will be in ACCESSORY
Once the shift lever is moved to
P (Park), the vehicle will turn off.
transmission fluid temperature
to be higher than normal. If this
message appears, you may
continue to drive at a slower speed.
Monitor the transmission fluid
temperature and allow it to cool
to at least 110°C (230°F). The
transmission fluid temperature can
be monitored with the gauges button
on the DIC. See “DIC Operation and
Displays” under Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑25 and
Automatic Transmission Fluid on
page 10‑23. Also check the engine
coolant temperature. If it is also
hot, see Engine Overheating on
page 10‑34.
pressure values. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑25.
The vehicle will remain in
ACCESSORY, without the 20 minute
time-out period, until the shift lever
is moved to P (Park) or until the
driver presses the pushbutton to
restart the vehicle. See Ignition
Positions on page 9‑20 for more
information.
To acknowledge the message, press
the RESET button. A message
reappears every 10 minutes until the
condition is corrected.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-54
Instruments and Controls
If this message is displayed during
normal vehicle operation on flat
roads, the vehicle may need
service. See your dealer for an
inspection.
The personalization features will
then be set to the default states.
See Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑55 for more information.
Vehicle Reminder
Messages
ACCESSORY MODE ON
SET PARK BRAKE FOR SEAT
RECALL
This message displays when the
vehicle is in accessory mode.
If driving in a performance or
competitive manner, the use of
(S) Sport Automatic Mode or
(S) Sport Manual Paddle Shift
gear selection is recommended.
See Automatic Transmission on
page 9‑28 for more information.
If the vehicle has a manual
transmission, this message
ICE POSSIBLE
This message displays when
the outside air temperature is
cold enough to create icy road
conditions. Adjust your driving
accordingly.
displays if you try to recall the
memory positions when the ignition
is on and the parking brake is not
set. If the vehicle is on, you must
set the parking brake in order for
the memory positions to recall.
See “Memory Seat, Mirrors and
Steering Wheel” under Power Seat
Adjustment on page 3‑3 for more
information.
To acknowledge the message, press
the RESET button. The message
reappears every 10 minutes until
this condition changes. If you do
not press the RESET button, the
message remains on the display
until the condition changes.
OPTIONS UNAVAILABLE
This message displays for a
few seconds if a keyless access
transmitter that is not labelled 1 or 2
is used and you try to personalize
the features on the vehicle by
pressing the OPTION button.
The personalization system will
not recognize the transmitter and
the DIC will not display the current
driver number or the menus
Washer Fluid Messages
UPSHIFT NOW
See Manual Transmission on
page 9‑32.
CHECK WASHER FLUID
See Washer Fluid on page 10‑37.
used to set personalizations.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-55
.
.
.
The Head-Up Display (HUD)
position and dimming level,
if your vehicle has this feature
A valid keyless access
transmitter is detected upon
opening the driver's door.
Vehicle
Personalization
The instrument panel cluster
dimming level and last selected
DIC display
If more than one valid keyless
access transmitter is detected upon
opening the driver's door, the driver
preferences for the lowest driver
number will be recalled.
Many features on your vehicle can
be personalized. This means that
the operation of these features
can be set to operate differently
depending on who is driving the
vehicle. See “Personal Options”
later in this section for the features
that you can personalize.
Separate personalization settings
are saved for two different drivers.
One of the keyless access
transmitters is assigned to driver 1.
The other is assigned to driver 2.
The back of the keyless access
transmitters are labelled 1 or 2 to
correspond to each driver.
If a keyless access transmitter
that is not labelled 1 or 2 is used,
the personalization system will not
recognize the transmitter. The Driver
Information Center (DIC) will not
display a current driver number
and the features that are normally
programmed through the DIC will be
set to the default states. Also, if the
OPTION button is pressed, the DIC
does not display the menus used to
set personalizations, but instead
displays OPTIONS UNAVAILABLE
for a few seconds.
The personalization settings for
other features are automatically
updated and saved as the driver
adjusts them. These include the
following settings and presets:
The current driver's preferences are
recalled when one of the following
occurs:
.
The radio presets, tone, volume,
.
fade, balance, equalization (EQ)
settings and source (radio
or CD)
The lock or unlock button on the
keyless access transmitter,
labelled 1 or 2, is pressed.
.
.
The last climate control setting
The appropriate memory
button, 1 or 2, located on
the driver's door is pressed.
See “Memory Seat, Mirrors and
Steering Wheel” under Power
Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3
for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-56
Instruments and Controls
Entering the Personal
Options Menu
2. Press the OPTION button and
you will enter the PERSONAL
OPTIONS menu.
Personal Options
The following options are available
for programming:
To enter the personal options menu,
use the following steps:
The DIC will display the current
driver number (1 or 2) for a
few seconds and then will
display instructions on which
buttons to use for setting the
personalizations. The RESET
button is used to select a
setting for a particular feature.
The OPTION button is used to
move to the next feature.
Display Units: This option allows
you to choose the measurement
units.
1. If you have an automatic
transmission vehicle, turn the
vehicle on with the shift lever in
P (Park).
Press the OPTION button until
DISPLAY UNITS appears on the
display, then press the RESET
button to scroll through the following
modes:
If you have a manual
transmission vehicle, turn the
vehicle on with the parking
brake set.
.
ENGLISH (default)
To avoid excessive drain on the
battery, it is recommended that
the headlamps are turned off.
3. Press the OPTION button
while the instruction screen is
displayed to enter the first
personalization menu item.
.
METRIC
If you choose ENGLISH, all
information will be displayed in
English units.
4. Once you have cycled through
all of the personal options,
pressing the OPTION button
a final time exits the personal
options menu. In addition,
If you choose METRIC, all
information will be displayed in
metric units.
When the mode you want is
selected, press the OPTION button
to set your choice and advance to
the next personal option.
if no button is pressed within
45 seconds, the DIC will exit the
personal options menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-57
Auto Memory Recall (Automatic
Transmission only): If your
When the mode you want is
selected, press the OPTION button
to set your choice and advance to
the next personal option.
Press the OPTION button until
AUTO EXIT RECALL appears on
the display, then press the RESET
button to scroll through the following
modes:
automatic transmission vehicle
has the memory package, you may
have this option. This option allows
the driver's seat, the telescopic
steering column, if your vehicle
has this feature, and the outside
rearview mirrors to automatically
move to the current driver's set
position when the engine starts.
Auto Exit Recall: If your vehicle
has the memory package, you may
have this option. This option allows
the driver's seat and telescopic
steering column, if your vehicle has
this feature, to automatically move
to the current driver's exit position
when one of the following occurs:
.
YES
.
NO (default)
If you choose YES, when you turn
the ignition off and open the driver's
door or press the unlock button
on the keyless access transmitter,
the seat and the telescopic steering
wheel, if your vehicle has this
feature, will return to their stored
exit positions for an easy exit or an
easy entrance when returning to the
vehicle.
Press the OPTION button until
AUTO MEMORY RECALL appears
on the display, then press the
RESET button to scroll through the
following modes:
.
The vehicle is turned off or in
Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) or accessory mode and
the driver's door is opened.
.
YES
.
The vehicle is turned off or in
.
NO (default)
RAP and the unlock button on
the keyless access transmitter is
pressed.
The seat and steering wheel will
only return to the stored driving
position if you press the appropriate
memory button or activate the auto
memory recall feature.
If you choose YES, the driver's seat,
the outside rearview mirrors and the
telescopic steering column, if your
vehicle has this feature, positions
are recalled when you turn the
ignition on.
In order for the Auto Exit Recall
feature to work on an automatic
transmission vehicle, the vehicle
must be in P (Park). On a manual
transmission vehicle, the parking
brake must be set.
If you choose NO, this option will
turn off.
If you choose NO, this option will
turn off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-58
Instruments and Controls
When the mode you want is
selected, press the OPTION button
to set your choice and advance to
the next personal option.
If you choose ON, the parking
lamps, the high-beam headlamps,
and the back-up lamps will come
on for 20 seconds during low light
periods when all of the following
occurs:
When the mode you want is
selected, press the OPTION button
to set your choice and advance to
the next personal option.
Approach Lights: This option
briefly turns on the parking lamps,
the high-beam headlamps and the
back-up lamps during low light
periods when the keyless access
transmitter is used to unlock the
vehicle.
Twilight Delay: This option allows
you to set the amount of time
you want the parking lamps and
high-beam headlamps to remain on
after you exit the vehicle. This will
occur when the vehicle is off or in
RAP and the headlamps are on due
to the automatic headlamp system.
The parking lamps and high-beam
headlamps will remain on until the
driver selected time expires, the
exterior lamp control is activated
or the vehicle is no longer off or
in RAP.
.
You press the unlock button on
the keyless access transmitter.
.
Both of the doors are closed.
.
The vehicle is off or in RAP.
The lamps remain on for 20 seconds
or until a door is opened, the lock
button on the keyless access
transmitter is pressed or the vehicle
is no longer off or in RAP.
Press the OPTION button until
APPROACH LIGHTS appears on
the display, then press the RESET
button to scroll through the following
modes:
.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System on page 2‑3 for more
information.
OFF
.
ON (default)
If you choose OFF, this option will
turn off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-59
Press the OPTION button until
TWILIGHT DELAY appears on the
display, then press the RESET
button to scroll through the following
modes:
Flash at Unlock: This option
activates the front and rear turn
signals for two short flashes when
the unlock or hatch/trunk button on
the keyless access transmitter is
pressed. This will only occur when
the vehicle is off.
Flash at Lock: This option
activates the front and rear turn
signals for one long flash when the
lock button on the keyless access
transmitter is pressed. This will only
occur when the vehicle is off. If the
lock button on the keyless access
transmitter is pressed again within
five seconds, the horn will sound
regardless of which setting you
have selected.
.
OFF
.
15 S
Press the OPTION button until
FLASH AT UNLOCK appears on
the display, then press the RESET
button to scroll through the following
modes:
.
30 S (default)
.
90 S
If you choose OFF, this option will
turn off.
Press the OPTION button until
FLASH AT LOCK appears on the
display, then press the RESET
button to scroll through the following
modes:
.
YES (default)
If you choose 15 S, the twilight
delay time will be set to 15 seconds.
.
NO
If you choose YES, the front and
rear turn signals will flash twice
when you press the unlock button
or the hatch/trunk button on the
keyless access transmitter.
If you choose 30 S, the twilight
delay time will be set to 30 seconds.
.
YES (default)
.
NO
If you choose 90 S, the twilight
delay time will be set to 90 seconds.
If you choose YES, the front and
rear turn signals will flash once
when you press the lock button on
the keyless access transmitter.
When the mode you want is
selected, press the OPTION button
to set your choice and advance to
the next personal option.
If you choose NO, this option will
turn off.
When the mode you want is
selected, press the OPTION button
to set your choice and advance to
the next personal option.
If you choose NO, this option will
turn off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-60
Instruments and Controls
When the mode you want is
selected, press the OPTION button
to set your choice and advance to
the next personal option.
When the mode you want is
selected, press the OPTION button
to set your choice and advance to
the next personal option.
an authorized keyless access
transmitter, however, will not be
able to open the door, even with a
transmitter in the vehicle.
FOB Reminder: This option
sounds the horn three times when
the driver's door is closed and there
is a keyless access transmitter
inside the interior of the vehicle.
This will only occur when the
vehicle is off.
Passive Door Locking: This
option allows you to select whether
the doors automatically lock during
normal vehicle exit. When the
ignition is turned off and all doors
become closed, the vehicle will
determine how many keyless
access transmitters remain in
the vehicle interior. If at least one
keyless access transmitter has
been removed from the interior
of the vehicle, the doors will lock
after a short delay.
You may temporarily disable the
passive door locking feature by
pressing the door unlock switch for
three seconds on an open door.
Passive door locking will then
remain disabled until a door lock
switch is pressed or until the power
mode transitions from the off
power mode.
Press the OPTION button until FOB
REMINDER appears on the display,
then press the RESET button to
scroll through the following modes:
Press the OPTION button until
PASSIVE DOOR LOCKING appears
on the display, then press the
RESET button to scroll through the
following modes:
.
YES
.
NO (default)
For example, if there are two
keyless access transmitters in
the vehicle and one is removed,
the other will be locked in. The
keyless access transmitter locked
in the vehicle can still be used to
start the vehicle or unlock the doors,
if needed. A person approaching the
outside of the locked vehicle without
.
If you choose YES, the horn will
sound three times when a keyless
access transmitter is inside of the
vehicle while the ignition is turned
off and the driver's door is closed.
OFF (default)
.
SILENT
.
HORN
If you choose OFF, this option will
turn off.
If you choose NO, this option will
turn off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-61
If you choose SILENT, the doors
will automatically lock a short time
after you remove a keyless access
transmitter from the interior of the
vehicle and close both doors.
Passive Door Unlock: This option
allows you to select which doors
will automatically unlock when you
approach and open the driver's door
with the keyless access transmitter.
See Door Locks on page 2‑8 for
more information.
Auto Unlock: This option allows
you to select whether the driver's
door, both doors or neither door
automatically unlocks when the
shift lever is moved into P (Park) for
automatic transmission vehicles or
when the ignition is turned off or is
in RAP for manual transmission
vehicles.
If you choose HORN, the doors will
automatically lock and the horn will
sound a short time after you remove
a keyless access transmitter from
the interior of the vehicle and close
both doors.
Press the OPTION button until
PASSIVE DOOR UNLOCK appears
on the display, then press the
RESET button to scroll through
the following modes:
Press the OPTION button until
AUTO UNLOCK appears on the
display, then press the RESET
button to scroll through the following
modes:
If you are parking in a quiet area
and do not want the horn to sound
when the doors lock, press the
lock button on the keyless access
transmitter immediately after
removing it from the interior and
closing the doors. This will lock
the doors and cancel the passive
locking for this ignition cycle.
.
DRIVER
.
BOTH (default)
.
OFF
If you choose DRIVER, only the
driver's door will automatically
unlock when you approach and
open the driver's door with the
keyless access transmitter.
.
DRIVER
.
BOTH (default)
If you choose OFF, this option will
turn off.
If you choose BOTH, both doors
will automatically unlock when you
approach and open the driver's door
with the keyless access transmitter.
When the mode you want is
selected, press the OPTION button
to set your choice and advance to
the next personal option.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-62
Instruments and Controls
If you choose DRIVER, on
For example, English will be
When the mode you want is
selected, press the OPTION button
to set your choice and advance to
the next personal option.
automatic transmission vehicles,
the driver's door will automatically
unlock when the shift lever is
moved into P (Park). On manual
transmission vehicles, the driver's
door will automatically unlock when
the ignition is turned off or is in RAP.
displayed as ENGLISH, Spanish as
ESPANOL, etc. If your vehicle has
the navigation system, you will not
have the Japanese language mode.
Personalize Name: This option
allows you to type in a name or
greeting that will appear on the DIC
display whenever the corresponding
keyless access transmitter (1 or 2)
is used or one of the memory
buttons (1 or 2) located on the
driver's door is pressed.
Press the OPTION button until
LANGUAGE appears on the display,
then press the RESET button to
scroll through the following modes:
If you choose BOTH, on automatic
transmission vehicles, both doors
will automatically unlock when the
shift lever is moved into P (Park).
On manual transmission vehicles,
both doors will automatically unlock
when the ignition is turned off or is
in RAP.
.
ENGLISH (default)
.
DEUTSCH (German)
.
FRANCAIS (French)
Press the OPTION button until
PERSONALIZE NAME appears on
the display, then press the RESET
button to scroll through the following
modes:
.
ITALIANO (Italian)
.
ESPANOL (Spanish)
When the mode you want is
selected, press the OPTION button
to set your choice and advance to
the next personal option.
If you choose a language that you
do not understand, press the
OPTION and RESET buttons
for five seconds. The DIC will
begin displaying all of the various
languages one by one for as long
as the buttons are pressed. When
the desired language is displayed,
release the buttons and the DIC
will set to this language.
.
YES
.
NO (default)
If you choose YES, you can type in
a name that will appear on the DIC
display.
Language: This option allows you
to select the language the DIC, the
Head-Up Display (HUD), if your
vehicle has this feature, and the
radio uses to display messages.
Each language mode will be
displayed in its own language.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-63
To program a name, use the
following procedure:
There are alpha/numeric
characters and a blank space
available.
7. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until the
name or greeting you want is
complete. After the name or
greeting is complete, keep
1. Enter the PERSONAL OPTIONS
menu and select the driver
number (1 or 2) that you would
like to program by following the
instructions listed previously
under “Entering the Personal
Options Menu”.
6. Then press the RESET button to
select the letter of your choice
and proceed on to the next
space to the right.
pressing the RESET button
until the display turns blank and
exits out of this option. You can
program up to 20 characters.
If you make a mistake and would
like to clear or replace a letter,
perform the following steps:
If you choose NO, this option will
turn off.
2. Press the OPTION button until
the PERSONALIZE NAME
If a customized name or greeting is
not programmed, the DIC display
will show Driver 1 or Driver 2 to
correspond with either the number
on the back of the keyless access
transmitter (1 or 2) that is being used
or to the memory button (1 or 2) that
is pressed.
6.1. Press the RESET button to
reach the letter you would
like to change.
option appears on the display.
3. Select YES under
PERSONALIZE NAME by
pressing the RESET button.
6.2. Press the OPTION button
to scroll through the letter
choices.
4. Press the OPTION button and
a cursor will display where you
can insert a letter.
6.3. Press the RESET button
to select the letter and
proceed on to the next
space to the right.
PERSONALIZE NAME is the last
option available to program in the
PERSONAL OPTIONS menu.
Pressing the OPTION button after
this setting will exit you from the
PERSONAL OPTIONS menu.
The last item you were in prior to
entering PERSONAL OPTIONS
will then display on the DIC.
5. Press the OPTION button again
until the letter you want is
displayed. To scroll through the
letters faster and without
a beeping noise, keep the
OPTIONS button depressed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-64
Instruments and Controls
Do not use this system with any
garage door opener that does not
have the stop and reverse feature.
This includes any garage door
opener model manufactured before
April 1, 1982.
Universal Remote System
Programming
Universal Remote
System
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑19 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission
(FCC) rules and Industry Canada
Standards RSS-210/220/310.
Read the instructions completely
before attempting to program the
transmitter. Because of the steps
involved, it may be helpful to
have another person assist with
programming the transmitter.
The FCC Grant of Equipment
Authorization Certificate number
is KOBFTE05A.
Be sure to keep the original
The Canadian Registration
ID number is 3521A-FTE05A.
remote control transmitter for
use in other vehicles, as well as,
for future programming. Only the
original remote control transmitter
is needed for Fixed Code
programming. The programmed
buttons should be erased when the
vehicle is sold or the lease ends.
See “Erasing Universal Home
Remote Buttons” in this section.
On vehicles with this feature there
are three round Light Emitting
Diode (LED) indicator lights above
the Universal Home Remote
buttons, follow the instructions
below.
This system provides a way to
replace up to three remote control
transmitters used to activate
devices such as garage door
openers, security systems, and
home automation devices.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-65
Park the vehicle outside of the
garage when programming a garage
door. Be sure that people and
objects are clear of the garage door
or gate that is being programmed.
To program up to three devices:
1. Press START or put the vehicle
in accessory mode. See Ignition
Positions on page 9‑20 for
additional information.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Rolling Code
Programming can only occur
when the vehicle is running or
in accessory mode.
For questions or help programming
the Universal Home Remote
System, call 1-866-572-2728
or go to learcar2u.com.
3. Locate in the garage, the
Most garage door openers sold
after 1996 are Rolling Code units.
garage door opener receiver
(motor-head unit). Locate
the “Learn” or “Smart” button.
It can usually be found where
the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit
and may be a colored button.
Press this button. After pressing
this button, complete the
following steps in less than
30 seconds.
Programming a garage door opener
involves time-sensitive actions, so
read the entire procedure before
starting. Otherwise, the device will
time out and the procedure will have
to be repeated.
2. From inside the vehicle,
press the two outside buttons
at the same time for one to
two seconds, and immediately
release them.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-66
Instruments and Controls
4. Immediately return to the
vehicle. Press and hold the
Universal Home Remote button
that will be used to control the
garage door until the garage
door moves. The indicator light,
above the selected button,
should slowly blink. This button
may need to be held for up to
20 seconds.
To program another Rolling Code
device such as an additional garage
door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat
Steps 1-6, choosing a different
function button in Step 4 than
what was used for the garage
door opener.
Most garage door openers sold
before 1996 are Fixed Code units.
Programming a garage door opener
involves time-sensitive actions, so
read the entire procedure before
starting. Otherwise, the device will
time out and the procedure will have
to be repeated.
If these instructions do not work,
the garage door opener is probably
a Fixed Code unit. Follow the
Programming instructions that follow
for a Fixed Code garage door
opener.
To program up to three devices:
1. Press START or put the vehicle
in accessory mode. See Ignition
Positions on page 9‑20 for
additional information.
5. Immediately, within one second,
release the button when
the garage door moves.
The indicator light blinks rapidly
until programming is complete.
Programming can only occur
when the vehicle is running or in
accessory mode.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Fixed Code
6. Press and release the same
button again. The garage door
should move, confirming that
programming is successful and
complete.
For questions or help programming
the Universal Home Remote
System, call 1-866-572-2728
or go to learcar2u.com.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-67
The hand held transmitter
can have between eight to
12 dip switches depending on
the brand of transmitter.
The garage door opener receiver
(motor head unit) could also
have a row of dip switches that
can be used when programming
the Universal Home Remote.
If the total number of switches
on the motor head and hand
held transmitter are different,
or if the dip switch settings are
different, use the dip switch
settings on the motor head unit
to program the Universal Home
Remote. The motor head dip
switch settings can also be used
when the original hand held
transmitter is not available.
Example of Eight Dip Switches
with Two Positions
2. To verify that the garage door
opener is a Fixed Code unit,
remove the battery cover on the
hand held transmitter supplied
by the manufacturer of the
Example of Eight Dip Switches
with Three Positions
garage door opener motor.
If there are a row of dip switches
similar to the graphic above,
the garage door opener is a
Fixed Code unit. If you do not
see a row of dip switches, return
to the previous section for
The panel of switches might not
appear exactly as they do in
the examples above, but they
should be similar.
Programming Universal Home
Remote – Rolling Code.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-68
Instruments and Controls
.
If a switch is set between
the up and down position,
write “Middle.”
The switch positions on the
hand-held transmitter could be
labeled, as follows:
.
.
.
The switch settings written
down in Step 3 now
become the button strokes
to be entered into the
Universal Home Remote
in Step 5. Be sure to enter
the switch settings written
down in Step 3, in order
from left to right, into the
Universal Home Remote,
when completing Step 5.
A switch in the up position
could be labeled as “Up,”
“+,” or “On.”
A switch in the down
position could be labeled
as “Down,” “−,” or “Off.”
A switch in the middle
position could be labeled as
“Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”
5. The indicator lights blink slowly.
Enter each switch setting
3. Write down the eight to 12 switch
settings from left to right as
follows:
from Step 3 into the vehicle's
Universal Home Remote. You
have two and one-half minutes
to complete Step 5. Now press
one button on the Universal
Home Remote for each switch
setting as follows:
4. From inside the vehicle, first
firmly press all three buttons
at the same time for about
three seconds. Release the
buttons to put the Universal
Home Remote into
.
When a switch is in the up
position, write “Left.”
.
When a switch is in the
down position, write “Right.”
programming mode.
.
If you wrote “Left,” press
the left button in the
vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-69
.
.
If you wrote “Right,” press
the right button in the
vehicle.
8. Immediately release the button
Universal Remote System
Operation
Press and hold the appropriate
button for at least half of a second.
The indicator light comes on while
the signal is being transmitted.
when the garage door moves.
The indicator light blinks rapidly
until programming is complete.
If you wrote “Middle,” press
the middle button in the
vehicle.
9. Press and release the same
button again. The garage door
should move, confirming that
programming is successful and
complete.
6. After entering all of the switch
positions, again, firmly press and
release all three buttons at the
same time. The indicator lights
turn on.
Operation can occur:
.
If the vehicle is in
To program another Fixed Code
device such as an additional garage
door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat
Steps 1-9, choosing a different
button in Step 7 than what was
used for the garage door opener.
accessory mode.
.
If the vehicle is in running.
7. Press and hold the button
that will be used to control the
garage door until the garage
door moves. The indicator
light above the selected button
should slowly blink. This button
may need to be held for up to
55 seconds.
.
If the vehicle is in Retained
Accessory Mode (RAP).
See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 9‑21 for
more information.
.
Up to an additional 10 minutes
after RAP finishes.
.
Up to 10 minutes after any door
is opened.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-70
Instruments and Controls
2. Once the indicator lights begin
to blink, release both buttons.
The codes from all buttons are
erased.
Reprogramming Universal
Home Remote Buttons
Any of the three buttons can be
reprogrammed by repeating the
instructions.
For help or information on the
Universal Home Remote System,
call the customer assistance phone
number under Customer Assistance
Offices (United States and Canada)
on page 13‑5 or Customer
Erasing Universal Home
Remote Buttons
The programmed buttons should be
erased when the vehicle is sold or
the lease ends.
Assistance Offices (Mexico) on
page 13‑5.
To erase either Rolling Code or
Fixed Code on the Universal Home
Remote device:
1. Press and hold the two outside
buttons at the same time for
approximately 20 seconds,
until the indicator lights, located
directly above the buttons, begin
to blink rapidly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighting
6-1
To override AUTO mode, turn the
control to off.
Exterior Lighting
Lighting
To reset to AUTO mode turn the
control to exterior lamps and then
back to AUTO. Automatic mode also
resets when the vehicle is turned off
and then back on again if the control
is left in the AUTO position.
Exterior Lamp Controls
Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1
Exterior Lamps Off
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Twilight Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
(Auto Signal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
; (Parking Lamp): Turns on the
parking lamps together with the
following:
The exterior lamp control is located
to the left of the steering wheel on
the multifunction lever.
.
Sidemarker Lamps
.
Taillamps
O (Exterior Lamp Control): Turn
the band with this symbol on it to
operate the exterior lamps.
.
License Plate Lamps
.
Instrument Panel Lights
The exterior lamp band has four
positions:
The parking brake indicator light
comes on and stays on when
the parking lamps are on with
the engine off and the ignition
to ACC/ACCESSORY.
Interior Lighting
Instrument Panel Illumination
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
O (Off): Turns off all lamps.
AUTO (Automatic): Sets the
exterior lamps to automatic mode.
AUTO mode turns the exterior
lamps on and off depending on
how much light is available outside
the vehicle.
5 (Headlamps): Turns on the
headlamps, together with the
previously listed lamps and lights.
Lighting Features
Entry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-7
Exterior Lighting Battery
Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-2
Lighting
The DRL system makes the front
turn signal lamps come on when the
following conditions are met:
Exterior Lamps Off
Reminder
A warning chime will sound if the
exterior lamp control is left on in
either the headlamp or parking lamp
position and the driver's door is
opened with the ignition off.
Flash-to-Pass
To use the flash-to-pass feature,
briefly pull the turn signal lever
toward you. The high-beam
indicator flashes to indicate to
the other driver that you intend to
pass. If the low-beam headlamps
are off and the fog lamps are on,
the fog lamps flash.
.
It is still daylight and the ignition
is on.
.
The exterior lamp control is in
the AUTO position.
.
The transmission is not in
Headlamp High/
Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low
beam to high, push the turn signal
lever all the way forward. To change
from high to low beam, pull the lever
rearward.
P (Park) or the parking brake
is off.
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can
make it easier for others to see the
front of your vehicle during the day.
Fully functional daytime running
lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
.
The parking brake is off or the
vehicle speed is greater than
13 km/h (8 mph).
When DRL are on, only the front
turn signal lamps will be on.
The parking lamps, taillamps,
instrument panel lights, or other
exterior lamps will not be on
when the DRL are being used.
While the high beams are on, this
light on the instrument panel cluster
will also be lit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighting
Twilight Sentinel
Twilight Sentinel® is an automatic
headlamp system. When activated,
this feature turns your headlamps
and parking lamps on and off by
sensing how dark it is outside.
6-3
When it is dark enough outside, the
front turn signal lamps turn off and
the normal low-beam headlamps
turn on.
If it is dark enough outside and
the exterior lamp control is off,
a HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED
message will display on the Driver's
Information Center (DIC). See Lamp
Messages on page 5‑44.
When it is bright enough outside,
the regular lamps go off, and the
front turn signal lamps will take over.
If the vehicle is started in a dark
garage, the automatic headlamp
system comes on immediately.
Once the vehicle leaves the garage,
it takes approximately one minute
for the automatic headlamp system
to change to DRL if it is light
outside. During that delay, the
instrument panel cluster may not
be as bright as usual. Make sure
the instrument panel brightness
knob is in the full bright position.
See Instrument Panel Illumination
Control on page 6‑5 for more
information.
Turning the exterior lamp control
to off a second time, or turning
on the headlamps will remove
the HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED
message in the DIC. If the parking
lamps or the fog lamps were turned
on instead, the HEADLAMPS
SUGGESTED message will
Be sure not to cover the light sensor
on the top of the instrument panel.
AUTO: Activates the system.
If the band is already in the AUTO
position when you start your vehicle,
Twilight Sentinel is automatically
enabled.
continue to be displayed.
If it is dark outside, your vehicle
headlamps and parking lamps will
turn on automatically.
The regular headlamp system
should be turned on when needed.
To turn off the DRL, turn the exterior
lamp control to the off position or
shift into P (Park). The DRL will
stay off until the control is toggled
again or the vehicle is shifted out
of P (Park).
Once it is bright enough outside, the
headlamps and parking lamps will
automatically turn back off.
Twilight Sentinel may also turn on
when you drive through a dimly
lit area.
This procedure applies only
to vehicles first sold in the
United States.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-4
Lighting
Once you leave the dimly lit area,
it may take about one minute
before the Twilight Sentinel turns
off. During this brief delay, the
instrument cluster may not be as
bright as usual. Make sure the
instrument panel dimmer is set to
full brightness. See Instrument
Panel Illumination Control on
page 6‑5.
See “Personal Options” under
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑55.
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals (Auto Signal)
The regular headlamp system
should be turned on when needed.
Hazard Warning Flashers
The hazard warning flashers warns
others that you have a problem.
The button is located near the
center of the instrument panel.
An arrow on the instrument panel
cluster flashes in the direction of the
turn or lane change.
To temporarily disable Twilight
Sentinel, turn the band to O.
| : Press to make the front and
rear turn signal lamps flash on
and off. Press again to turn the
flashers off.
To turn Twilight Sentinel back on,
Move the lever all the way up or
down to signal a turn.
turn the band to O again, then
release it.
Raise or lower the lever until the
arrow starts to flash to signal a lane
change. Release the lever and the
turn signal automatically flashes
three times. If more flashes are
desired, continue to hold the lever.
If the Twilight Sentinel has the
headlamps turned on and you turn
the ignition off, the headlamps will
stay on for a period of time while
you leave the vehicle.
The hazard warning flashers work
no matter what mode the ignition is
in, even if the ignition is turned off.
When the hazard warning flashers
are on, the turn signals will
not work.
Use the Driver Information Center to
turn Twilight Sentinel on or off and
to increase or decrease the length
of the delayed illumination period.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighting
6-5
The lever returns to its starting
position when it is released.
Fog Lamps
Use fog lamps for better vision in
foggy or misty conditions.
Interior Lighting
If after signaling a turn or lane
change the arrows flash rapidly or
do not come on, a signal bulb may
be burned out.
Instrument Panel
Illumination Control
The fog lamps control is located on
the multifunction lever next to the
exterior lamp control.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb
is not burned out, check the fuse.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 10‑51.
# (Fog Lamps): Turning the band
to this position will turn the fog
lamps on.
When you turn the fog lamps on,
the fog lamp light will appear on the
instrument panel cluster to indicate
that the fog lamps and the parking
lamps are on.
Turn Signal on Chime
A chime sounds if the turn signal
has been on for more than 1.2 km
(0.75 miles) of driving.
If you need to leave the turn
signal on for more than 1.2 km
(0.75 miles), turn off the signal
and then turn it back on.
If you turn the high-beam
headlamps on, the fog lamps will
turn off. They will turn on again
when you switch to low-beam
headlamps.
The knob for this feature is located
on the left side of the instrument
panel.
Push the knob in to turn on the
interior lights.
The ignition must be on for the fog
lamps to operate.
Some localities have laws that
require the headlamps to be on
along with the fog lamps.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-6
Lighting
Turn and hold the knob
Courtesy Lamps
When any door or the hatch/trunk lid
is opened, the interior lamps will go
on unless it is bright outside.
Lighting Features
clockwise to brighten the lights
or counterclockwise to dim them.
During the day, this knob will adjust
the instrument panel brightness
and at night will adjust all interior
lighting.
Entry/Exit Lighting
With entry lighting, the interior
lamps will come on when entering
the vehicle. To illuminate your exit,
the interior lamps come on for about
20 seconds when the engine is
turned off.
You can also turn the courtesy
lamps on and off by pressing the
instrument panel brightness knob.
Be sure not to have this knob turned
all the way down with the lamps
on during the day. Your Driver
Information Center (DIC) may
not be visible.
Reading Lamps
To turn the entry and exit lighting off,
quickly turn the courtesy lamps on
and off by pressing the instrument
panel brightness knob.
The inside rearview mirror includes
two reading lamps. The lamps
will go on when a door is opened.
When the doors are closed, press
each lamp switch to turn them on
individually.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighting
6-7
Battery Power Protection
Exterior Lighting Battery
Saver
This vehicle has a feature to help
prevent the battery from being
drained in case any of the following
lamps are left on; the underhood
lamp, if your vehicle has this
feature, vanity mirror lamps, cargo
lamps, reading lamps, console
or glove box lamps. If any of
these lamps are left on, they will
automatically time-out after about
10 minutes. To reset it, all of the
above lamps must be turned off
or the ignition key on.
If the manual parking lamps or
headlamps have been left on,
the exterior lamps will turn off as
soon as the ignition is turned off or
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
is active. This protects against
draining the battery in case you
have accidentally left the headlamps
or parking lamps on. The battery
saver does not work if the
headlamps are turned on after the
ignition switch is turned to off.
If you need to leave the lamps on,
use the exterior lamp control to turn
the lamps back on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-8
Lighting
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-1
For more information, see Defensive
Driving on page 9‑2.
Introduction
Determine which radio the vehicle
has and read the following pages to
become familiar with its features.
Infotainment
System
Notice: Contact your dealer
before adding any equipment.
Adding audio or communication
equipment could interfere with
the operation of the vehicle's
engine, radio, or other systems,
and could damage them. Follow
federal rules covering mobile
radio and telephone equipment.
Introduction
WARNING
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
{
Taking your eyes off the road
for extended periods could
cause a crash resulting in
injury or death to you or others.
Do not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
Radio
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Diversity Antenna System . . . . 7-11
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-11
The vehicle has Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP,
the audio system can be played
even after the ignition is turned off.
See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 9‑21 for more
information.
This system provides access to
many audio and non‐audio listings.
Audio Players
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
To minimize taking your eyes off the
road while driving, do the following
while the vehicle is parked:
Navigation/Radio System
Phone
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
For vehicles with a navigation radio
system, see the separate Navigation
System Manual.
.
Become familiar with the
operation and controls of the
audio system.
.
Set up the tone, speaker
adjustments, and preset radio
stations.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-2
Infotainment System
Theft-Deterrent Feature
Operation
THEFTLOCK® is designed to
discourage theft of the vehicle's
radio by learning a portion of the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
The radio does not operate and
LOCKED displays if the radio is
stolen or moved to a different
vehicle.
When the when the ignition is in the
off position, a blinking red light on
the upper left side of the radio
indicates that THEFTLOCK® is
armed.
Single CD Radio shown, Six-Disc CD Radio similar
The vehicle has one of these radios
as its audio system.
deterrent feature is set. For more
information, see Theft-Deterrent
Feature on page 7‑2.
An indicator light on the upper left
side of the radio flashes when the
ignition is off, to indicate the theft
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-3
For XM™:
Playing the Radio
Adjusting the Speakers
(Balance/Fade)
Top Knob (Power/Volume): Press
to turn the system on and off. Turn
to increase or decrease the volume.
Press 4 to retrieve 4 different
O e (Balance/Fade): To adjust
categories of information related to
the current song or channel: Artist,
Song Title, Category or PTY,
the Balance:
MUTE: Press to silence the
system. Press again to turn the
sound on.
Press and release O e until
BALANCE displays.
Channel Number/Channel Name.
Audio Settings
.
Turn the O e knob to move
the sound toward the right or the
left speakers.
This button is not available on the
Six-Disc CD Radio.
Press and hold O e when no tone
or speaker control is displayed to
adjust all tone and speaker controls
to the middle position. AUDIO
4 (Information): Press until the
desired display is shown, then
hold for 2 seconds until radio beeps
once to change the default display.
The selected display is now the
default.
.
Press and hold the O e knob
until the level changes to the
middle position.
SETTINGS CENTERED displays.
Adjusting the Tone
(Bass/Treble)
To adjust the Fade:
Press and release O e until FADE
displays
For RDS:
O e (Bass/Treble): To adjust the
Bass or Treble:
Press 4 to change the display.
The display options are station
name, RDS station frequency,
PTY, and the name of the program
(if available).
.
Turn the O e knob to move
the sound toward the front or the
rear speakers.
Press and release O e until
BASS or TREBLE displays.
.
Turn the O e knob to increase
or to decrease the level.
.
Press and hold the O e knob
until the level changes to the
middle position.
.
Press and hold the O e knob
until the level changes to the
middle position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-4
Infotainment System
AUTO EQ (Automatic
For vehicles with the Bose® sound
system:
AUTO n (Automatic Volume):
Automatic volume automatically
adjusts the audio system to make
up for road and wind noise, by
increasing the volume as vehicle
speed increases.
Equalization): The radio saves
separate AUTO EQ settings for
each preset and source.
For vehicles without the Bose®
sound system:
Vehicles with the Bose® sound
system include Bose® AudioPilot®
noise compensation technology.
AudioPilot® continuously adjusts
the audio system equalization to
compensate for background noise.
This feature is most effective at
lower radio volume settings where
background noise can affect how
well the audio is heard. At higher
volume settings, there may be little
or no adjustments by AudioPilot®.
For additional information on
AudioPilot®, visit bose.com/
For vehicles without the Bose®
sound system:
.
Press AUTO EQ to select
equalization settings designed
for CLASSICAL, POP, ROCK,
JAZZ, TALK, and COUNTRY.
1. Set the volume at the desired
level.
.
Selecting CUSTOM or changing
2. Press AUTO n to select
AUTO VOLUME MIN (minimum),
AUTO VOLUME MED (medium),
or AUTO VOLUME MAX
(maximum). Each higher
setting provides more volume
compensation at faster vehicle
speeds.
bass or treble, returns the EQ
to the manual bass and treble
settings.
For vehicles with the Bose® sound
system:
audiopilot.
To use AudioPilot®:
.
Press AUTO EQ to select
equalization settings from
EQ1 through EQ6.
1. Set the volume at the desired
level.
3. Press AUTO n until AUTO
VOLUME OFF displays to turn
automatic volume off.
.
Selecting CUSTOM or changing
2. Press AUTO n until AUTO
bass or treble, returns the EQ
to the manual bass and treble
settings.
VOLUME ON displays.
3. Press AUTO n until AUTO
VOLUME OFF displays to turn
off AudioPilot®.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-5
With RDS, the radio can:
Radio Messages
Radio
.
Seek to stations broadcasting
the selected type of
programming.
CAL ERR (Calibration Error):
Displays if the radio is no longer
configured properly for the vehicle.
The vehicle must be returned to
your dealer for service.
AM-FM Radio
Radio Data System (RDS)
.
Receive announcements
concerning local and national
emergencies.
RDS features are available for use
only on FM stations that broadcast
RDS information. The station name
or call letters display while the radio
is tuned to an RDS station.
LOC (Locked): Displays when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked
up. The vehicle must be returned to
your dealer for service.
.
.
Display messages from radio
stations.
Seek to stations with traffic
announcements.
This system relies upon receiving
specific information from these
stations and works only when the
information is available. In rare
cases, a radio station can broadcast
incorrect information that causes the
radio features to work improperly.
If this happens, contact the radio
station.
If any error occurs repeatedly or
cannot be corrected, contact your
dealer.
.
.
Provide the time of day.
Provide a program type (PTY)
for current programming.
.
Provide the name of the program
being broadcast.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-6
Infotainment System
TRAF (Traffic): TA (traffic) displays
when the station broadcasts traffic
announcements, the announcement
will be played.
RDS Messages
4 (Information): If the current
station has a message, INFO
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or
national emergencies. When an
alert announcement comes on
the current radio station, ALERT!
displays. The announcement
is heard, even if the volume is
low or a CD is playing. If a CD
is playing, play stops during
the announcement. Alert
displays. Press 4 to see the
message. The message can
display the artist, song title,
call in phone numbers, etc.
Press TRAF and the radio seeks
to a station that broadcasts traffic
announcements. When a station is
found, the radio stops seeking and
TA displays. NO TRAFFIC INFO
displays if a station that broadcasts
traffic announcements can not be
found.
If the entire message is not
displayed, parts of the message
appears every three seconds.
To scroll through the message,
announcements cannot be
turned off.
press and release 4. A new group
of words display after every press
of the button. Once the complete
message has displayed, INFO
disappears from the display until
another new message is received.
The last message can be displayed
by pressing this button. The last
message until a new message is
received or the radio is tuned to a
different station.
Press TRAF to turn off the traffic
announcements if TA is on the
display.
ALERT! is not affected by tests of
the emergency broadcast system.
This feature is not supported by all
RDS stations.
The radio plays the traffic
announcement even if the volume
is low. The radio interrupts the play
of a CD if the last tuned station
broadcasts traffic announcements.
This function does not apply to XM
Satellite Radio Service.
NO INFO displays when a message
is not available from a station.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
Storing Radio Stations
7-7
To scan preset stations:
Finding a Station
BAND: Press to switch between
FM1, FM2, AM, XM1 or XM2.
Drivers are encouraged to store
radio station while the vehicle is
Press and hold t or u for
four seconds until PRESET
parked, see Defensive Driving on
page 9‑2. Tune to stored radio
stations using the presets, favorites
button, and steering wheel controls,
if the vehicle has this feature.
SCAN displays. The radio goes to
the next preset station, plays for a
few seconds, then goes to the next
O e (Tune): Turn to select radio
stations.
t SEEK u : Press to go to the
previous or to the next station and
stay there.
preset station. Press t or u again
or one of the pushbuttons to stop
scanning presets.
Up to 30 stations (6 FM1, 6 FM2,
and 6 AM, 6 XM1 and 6 XM2),
and equalization settings for each
station can be programmed on the
six numbered pushbuttons.
The radio only stops at stations with
a strong signal.
The radio only scans stations with a
strong signal.
t SCAN u : Press and hold
t or u for 2 seconds until
FREQUENCY SCAN displays.
The radio goes to a station, plays
for a few seconds, then goes on
1–6 (Preset Pushbuttons):
Press to play stations that are
programmed to the radio preset
pushbuttons.
To set presets:
1. Tune to a radio station.
2. Press AUTO EQ to select the
equalization.
to the next station. Press t or u
again to stop scanning.
3. Press and hold one of the six
numbered pushbuttons until the
radio beeps once.
4. Repeat the steps for each
pushbutton.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-8
Infotainment System
Finding a Category (CAT)
Station
Satellite Radio
t SCAN u : Press and hold t or
u for 2 seconds until FREQUENCY
SCAN displays. The radio goes to a
channel, plays for a few seconds,
then goes on to the next station.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
To select an XM station by category:
XM is a satellite radio service
that is based in the 48 contiguous
United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM Satellite Radio
has a wide variety of programming
and commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality
sound. A service fee is required
to receive the XM service.
For more information, contact
XM at xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.
and xmradio.ca or call
1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
1. Press the CAT button. The last
selected category displays.
Press t or u again to stop
scanning.
2. Turn the O e knob to select a
category.
To scan preset stations:
3. Press t or u to go to a
category's station. SEEKING
CATEGORY displays.
Press and hold t or u for
four seconds until PRESET SCAN
displays. The radio goes to the
next preset station, plays for a
few seconds, then goes to the next
4. To go to another station within
that category, press the CAT
button to display the category,
preset station. Press t or u again
or one of the pushbuttons to stop
scanning presets.
then press t or u to go to
another station.
Finding an XM Channel
1–6 (Preset Pushbuttons):
Press to play channels that are
programmed to the radio preset
pushbuttons.
If the radio cannot find the desired
category, NONE displays and the
radio returns to the last station
tuned.
BAND: Press to switch between
FM1, FM2, AM, XM1 or XM2.
O e (Tune): Turn to manually
select an XM channel.
t SEEK u : Press to go to the
previous or to the next XM channel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
XM Radio Messages
7-9
SCAN: To scan the stations within
a category:
Storing XM Channels
Drivers are encouraged to store
XM channels while the vehicle is
parked, see Defensive Driving on
page 9‑2. Tune to stored radio
stations using the presets, favorites
button, and steering wheel controls,
if the vehicle has this feature.
XL (Explicit Language
Channels): These channels,
or any others, can be blocked by
calling 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.
and 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
1. Press CAT. The last selected
category displays.
2. Turn the O e knob to select a
category.
Updating: The encryption code in
the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process
should take no longer than
30 seconds.
3. Press and hold t or u until
a beep sounds and SCAN
CATEGORY displays. The radio
begins scanning the stations in
the category.
Up to 30 stations (6 FM1, 6 FM2,
and 6 AM, 6 XM1 and 6 XM2),
and equalization settings for each
station can be programmed on the
six numbered pushbuttons.
No Signal: The system is
functioning correctly, but the
vehicle is in a location that is
blocking the XM signal. When
the vehicle is moved into an open
area, the signal should return.
4. Press t or u to stop scanning.
To set presets:
1. Tune to a channel.
2. Press AUTO EQ to select the
equalization.
Loading XM: The audio system
is acquiring and processing audio
and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear
shortly.
3. Press and hold one of the six
numbered pushbuttons until the
radio beeps once.
4. Repeat the steps for each
pushbutton.
CH Off Air: This channel is not
currently in service. Tune in to
another channel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-10
Infotainment System
CH Unauth: This channel is
blocked or cannot be received with
your XM Subscription package.
Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,
this message will alternate with
the XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the
service.
AM
The range for most AM stations is
greater than for FM, especially at
night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere
with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations
boost the power levels during the
day, and then reduce these levels
during the night. Static can also
occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio
reception. When this happens, try
reducing the treble on the radio.
CH Unavail: This previously
assigned channel is no longer
assigned. Tune to another station.
If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station
for that preset button.
Unknown: If this message is
received when tuned to channel 0,
there may be a receiver fault.
Consult with your dealer.
No Info: No artist, song title,
category, or text information is
available at this time on this
channel. The system is working
properly.
Chk XMRcvr: If this message does
not clear within a short period of
time, the receiver may have a fault.
Consult with your dealer.
Radio Reception
FM Stereo
Not Found: There are no channels
available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
Frequency interference and static
can occur during normal radio
reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience
accessories, and external electronic
devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there is
interference or static, unplug the
item from the accessory power
outlet.
FM signals only reach about
16 to 65 km (10 to 40 miles).
Although the radio has a built-in
electronic circuit that automatically
works to reduce interference, some
static can occur, especially around
tall buildings or hills, causing the
sound to fade in and out.
XM Locked: The XM receiver in
the vehicle may have previously
been in another vehicle. For security
purposes, XM receivers cannot be
swapped between vehicles. If this
message is received after having
the vehicle serviced, check with
your dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-11
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Diversity Antenna System
Audio Players
XM Satellite Radio Service gives
digital radio reception from coast
to coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada.
Just as with FM, tall buildings or
hills can interfere with satellite radio
signals, causing the sound to fade
in and out. In addition, traveling
or standing under heavy foliage,
bridges, garages, or tunnels may
cause loss of the XM signal for a
period of time.
The AM-FM antenna is a hidden
self tuning system. It optimizes the
AM and FM signals relative to the
vehicle's position and radio station
source. No maintenance or
CD Player
Care of the CD Player
Do not add labels to a CD, it could
get caught in the CD player. Use a
marking pen to write on the top of
the CD if a description is needed.
adjustments are needed.
Satellite Radio Antenna
Do not use CD lens cleaners, they
could damage the CD player.
For vehicles with XM Satellite Radio
Service, the antenna is located on
the roof or on the trunk lid of the
vehicle. Keep the antenna clear
of obstructions for clear radio
reception.
Notice: If a label is added to a
CD, or more than one CD is
inserted into the slot at a time,
or an attempt is made to play
scratched or damaged CDs, the
CD player could be damaged.
While using the CD player, use
only CDs in good condition
without any label, load one CD at
a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of
foreign materials, liquids, and
debris.
Cellular Phone Usage
Cellular phone usage may cause
interference with the vehicle's radio.
This interference may occur when
making or receiving phone calls,
charging the phone's battery,
or simply having the phone on.
This interference causes an
increased level of static while
listening to the radio. If static is
received while listening to the
radio, unplug the cellular phone
and turn it off.
If an error displays, see “CD
Messages” later in this section.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-12
Infotainment System
Six-Disc CD Radio:
Care of CDs
Using the CD Player
If more than one CD has been
loaded, a number for each CD
displays.
Store CD(s) in their original cases
or other protective cases and
The CD player can play smaller
8 cm (3 inch) single CDs with an
adapter ring.
away from direct sunlight and dust.
The CD player scans the bottom of
the disc. If the bottom of a CD is
damaged it may not play properly or
at all. Do not touch the bottom of a
CD while handling it. Pick up CDs
by grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.
M (Load): Press to load CDs into
the CD player.
A CD in the player it stays in the
player when the ignition is turned
off. When the ignition or radio is
turned on, the CD starts to play
where it stopped, if it was the last
selected audio source.
To insert one CD:
1. Press M.
2. Load a CD and insert the CD
partway into the slot, label side
up when INSERT CD # displays.
The player pulls the CD in.
Loading a CD
If the surface of a CD is dirty, take
a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water,
and clean it. Make sure the wiping
process starts from the center to
the edge.
Single CD Radio:
Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up, until the player pulls
the CD in. The CD begins playing
automatically.
To insert multiple CDs:
1. Press and hold M for 2 seconds.
Two beeps sound and LOAD
ALL DISCS displays.
The CD symbol displays when a CD
is inserted, and the track number
displays when each new track starts
to play.
2. Load a CD and insert the CD
partway into the slot, label side
up when INSERT CD # displays.
The player pulls the CD in.
3. Wait for INSERT CD # to display
after the previous CD is loaded,
then load the next CD. The CD
player takes up to 6 CDs.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-13
To load more than one CD but
less than six, complete Steps 1
through 3. When finished loading
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to play
a CD when listening to the radio.
CD displays when a CD is in the
player. If your system has a remote
playback device, pressing this
button a second time allows the
remote device to play.
t SCAN u : To scan one CD,
press and hold either arrow for
more than 2 seconds until SCAN
displays and a beep sounds.
The radio goes to the next track,
plays for 10 seconds, then goes to
the next track. Press either arrow
again, to stop scanning.
CDs, press the M button to cancel
the loading function. The radio
begins to play the last CD loaded.
Playing a CD
X (Eject): Press to eject a CD
from the Single CD Radio and the
Six‐Disc CD Radio.
O e (Tune): Turn to go to the
To scan all loaded CDs, press and
hold either arrow for more than
4 seconds until SCAN displays and
a beep sounds. Use this feature to
listen to 10 seconds of the first track
of each loaded CD. Press either
arrow again, to stop scanning.
next or previous track.
{ (Reverse): Press and hold to
Single CD Radio: Press X to eject
a CD.
reverse within the current track.
| (Fast Forward): Press and hold
to fast forward through the current
track.
Six-Disc CD Radio:
Press X to eject the CD that is
currently playing.
AUTO EQ (Automatic
t SEEK u : Press the left arrow
to go to the start of the current track
if more than 8 seconds have played.
Press the right arrow to go to the
start of the next track. If either
arrow is held or pressed more
than once, the player continues
moving backward or forward
through the CD.
Equalization): Press to select
the equalization setting while
playing a CD. The equalization
is stored when a CD is played.
For more information on AUTO EQ,
see “AUTO EQ” listed previously in
this section.
To eject multiple CDs:
1. Press and hold X for
2 seconds. A beep sounds
and EJECT ALL displays.
2. The ejected CD can be removed
when REMOVE DISC displays.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio
when a CD is playing. The inactive
CD(s) remains inside the radio for
future listening.
To stop ejecting the CDs, press
the M or X.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-14
Infotainment System
.
.
Press and release RDM until
RANDOM ALL DISCS displays
to play the tracks on all of the
CDs that are loaded in random
order.
The CD is automatically pulled
back into the player if the CD is
not removed after 25 seconds.
Pushing a CD back into the player,
before the 25 second time period
is complete causes the player to
sense an error and the CD player
tries to eject the CD several times
before stopping.
Six-Disc CD Radio:
.
Press RPT until REPEAT
displays to repeat a track.
.
Press RPT until REPEAT ONE
DISC displays to repeat an
entire CD
Press and release RDM until
RANDOM OFF displays to turn
off random play.
.
Press RPT until REPEAT OFF
displays to turn off repeat.
R (Song List): The Song List
feature can save 20 track selections.
Wait for the timer to expire before
RDM (Random): Press to hear
the tracks in random, rather than
sequential order, on one CD or all
of the loaded CDs.
pressing X again. Pressing X
repeatedly after trying to push a CD
in manually causes the CD players
25-second eject timer to reset.
To save tracks:
1. If S-LIST is displayed,
press R to turn it off.
Single CD Radio:
RPT (Repeat): Press to hear a
track or an entire CD over again.
2. Select the desired CD by
pressing the numbered
Press and release RDM, until
RANDOM DISC PLAY displays.
Press and release the RDM until
RANDOM OFF displays to turn off
random play.
pushbutton and then use u or
O e knob to select the track to
be saved.
Single CD Radio:
Press RPT to hear a track over
again, REPEAT displays. Press
again to turn off repeat, REPEAT
OFF displays.
Six-Disc CD Radio:
3. Press and hold R until a beep
sounds and ADDED SONG
displays.
.
Press and release RDM until
RANDOM DISC PLAY displays
to play the tracks on one CD in
random order. Once all tracks on
this disc have played, RANDOM
DISC PLAY will repeat.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to save
other selections.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-15
SONGLIST FULL displays if more
than 20 selections are stored.
To delete the entire song list:
Supported File Structure
Radios with the MP3 feature support
up to:
1. Press R to turn song list on.
To play tracks:
S-LIST displays.
.
50 folders.
1. Press R. One beep sounds and
S-LIST displays. The recorded
tracks begin to play in the order
they were saved
2. Press and hold R for more than
4 seconds. One beep sounds
and SONGLIST EMPTY displays
to confirm that the song list has
been deleted.
.
11 folders in depth.
.
50 playlists.
.
255 files.
2. Press t or u to go back or
.
10 sessions.
forward within the saved tracks.
If a CD is ejected, and the song
list contains saved tracks from that
CD, those tracks are automatically
deleted from the song list. Any
tracks saved to the song list again
are added to the bottom of the list.
Root Directory:
To delete tracks:
The root directory is treated as a
folder. Files are stored in the root
directory when the disc or storage
device does not contain folders.
Files accessed from the root
1. Press R to turn song list on.
S-LIST displays.
2. Press t or u, use the O e
knob to select the desired track
to be deleted.
To end song list mode, press R.
One beep sounds and S-LIST is
removed from the display.
directory display as F1 ROOT.
Empty Folder:
3. Press and hold R until SONG
MP3 Format
Folders that do not contain files are
skipped, and the player advances to
the next folder that contains files.
REMOVED displays.
Radios with the MP3 feature can
only play CD-R discs. Do not mix
standard audio and MP3 files on the
same disc.
After a track has been deleted, the
remaining tracks are moved up the
list. When another track is added to
the song list, the track is added to
the end of the list.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-16
Infotainment System
Supported Bit Rates
Playing an MP3
{ (Previous Folder): Press to
go to the first track in the previous
folder. Press and hold to reverse
through the current track.
The following bit rates are
Insert a CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls it in,
and READING displays. The CD
should begin playing and the CD
symbol displays.
supported: 32 kbps, 40 kbps,
56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps,
112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps,
192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and
320 kbps or a variable bit rate.
| (Next Folder): Press to go to
the first track in the next folder.
Press and hold to fast forward the
current track.
If the ignition or radio is turned off
with a CD-R in the player, it stays
in the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD-R starts
to play where it stopped, if it was
the last selected audio source.
File Naming
RDM (Random): Press to hear
the tracks in random, rather than
sequential order, on one CD, one
folder, or all of the loaded CDs.
ID3v1 and ID3v2 tags are
supported. The track name
contained in the ID3 tag is shown
on the display. The display only
shows up to 32 characters for track
and file names.
As each new track starts to play,
the track number displays.
Press and release RDM until:
.
RANDOM DISC PLAY displays
If the track name is not contained in
the ID3 tag, the display shows the
file name without the file extension.
Order of Play
to play the tracks on the CD in
random order.
Tracks are played sequentially in
the following order:
.
RANDOM FOLDER displays to
play the tracks in the folder in
random order.
Playlists
1. Playlists.
Playlists that do not have a .m3u or
.wpl extension may not work.
2. Files contained in the root
directory.
.
RANDOM ALL DISCS displays
to play the tracks on all of the
CDs that are loaded in random
order.
Preprogrammed playlists created by
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real
Jukebox™ software are supported
and they cannot be edited using the
radio.
3. Files contained in folders.
O / e (Tune): Turn to go to the
.
next or previous track.
RANDOM OFF displays to turn
off random play.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-17
RPT (Repeat): Press to hear a
track, CD, or a folder over again.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio
when a CD is playing. The inactive
CD remains inside the radio for
future listening.
Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to
the radio’s front auxiliary input jack
to use a portable audio player. The
radio displays AUX INPUT DEVICE
when a device is connected and
begins playing audio from that
device.
Press and release RPT until:
.
REPEAT displays to repeat a
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to play
a CD when listening to the radio.
The CD symbol displays when a CD
is loaded.
track.
.
REPEAT ONE DISC displays to
repeat a CD.
Top Knob (Power/Volume): Turn
to increase or decrease the volume
of the portable player. Additional
volume adjustments can be made
from the portable device.
.
REPEAT FOLDER displays to
Auxiliary Devices
repeat a folder.
.
REPEAT OFF displays to turn off
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
repeated play.
The radio system has an auxiliary
input jack located on the right side
of the faceplate. This is not an audio
output; do not plug the headphone
set into the front auxiliary input jack.
An external audio device can be
connected to the auxiliary input jack
for use as another source for audio
listening.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio
while a portable audio device is
playing. The portable audio device
continues playing.
t SEEK u : Press t to go to the
start of the current track, if more
than eight seconds have played.
Press u to go to the next track.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to
play a CD while a portable audio
device is playing. Press again and
the system begins playing audio
from the connected portable audio
player. If a portable audio player is
connected, AUX INPUT DEVICE
displays. If a portable audio player
is not connected, AUX INPUT
DEVICE does not display.
Press t or u more than once
to continue moving backward or
forward through the CD.
4 (Information): Press to display
the artist name and album contained
in the ID3 tag.
Drivers are encouraged to set
up any auxiliary device while the
vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive
Driving on page 9‑2.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-18
Infotainment System
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to
a minimum. The system may not
recognize voice commands if there
is too much background noise.
Bluetooth Controls
Phone
Use the buttons located on the
steering wheel to operate the
in‐vehicle Bluetooth system.
See Steering Wheel Controls on
page 5‑3 for more information.
Bluetooth
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system
can use a Bluetooth capable cell
phone with a Hands Free Profile
to make and receive phone calls.
The system can be used while
the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY position. The range
of the Bluetooth system can be
up to 9.1 m (30 ft). Not all phones
support all functions, and not all
phones are guaranteed to work with
the in-vehicle Bluetooth system.
See www.gm.com/bluetooth for
more information on compatible
phones.
When to Speak: A short tone
sounds after the system responds
indicating when it is waiting for a
voice command. Wait until the tone
and then speak.
b g (Push To Talk) : Press to
answer incoming calls, to confirm
system information, and to start
speech recognition.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a
calm and natural voice.
c (Phone On Hook): Press to
end a call, reject a call, or to cancel
an operation.
Audio System
When using the in‐vehicle Bluetooth
system, sound comes through
the vehicle's front audio system
speakers and overrides the
audio system. Use the audio
system volume knob, during
a call, to change the volume
level. The adjusted volume level
remains in memory for later calls.
To prevent missed calls, a minimum
volume level is used if the volume
is turned down too low.
Pairing
A Bluetooth cell phone must be
paired to the Bluetooth system and
then connected to the vehicle before
it can be used. See your cell phone
manufacturers user guide for
Bluetooth functions before pairing
the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone
is not connected, calls will be made
using OnStar® Hands‐Free Calling,
if available. Refer to the OnStar
owner's guide for more information.
Voice Recognition
The Bluetooth system uses voice
recognition to interpret voice
commands to dial phone numbers
and name tags.
For additional information say
“Help” while you are in a voice
recognition menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-19
Pairing Information
Pairing a Phone
This name will be used to
indicate which phones are
paired and connected to the
vehicle, see “Listing All Paired
and Connected Phones” later in
this section for more information.
.
Up to five cell phones can be
1. Press and hold b g for
paired to the Bluetooth system.
two seconds.
.
The pairing process is disabled
2. Say “Bluetooth”.
when the vehicle is moving.
3. Say “Pair”. The system responds
with instructions and a four‐digit
PIN number. The PIN number is
used in Step 5.
.
Pairing only needs to be
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pair
additional phones.
completed once, unless the
pairing information on the cell
phone changes or the cell phone
is deleted from the system.
Listing All Paired and Connected
Phones
4. Start the pairing process on the
cell phone that you want to pair.
For help with this process, see
your cell phone manufacturers
user guide.
The system can list all cell phones
paired to it. If a paired cell phone is
also connected to the vehicle, the
system responds with “is connected”
after that phone name.
.
Only one paired cell phone can
be connected to the Bluetooth
system at a time.
.
If multiple paired cell phones
5. Locate the device named “Your
Vehicle” in the list on the cell
phone. Follow the instructions
on the cell phone to enter the
PIN number that was provided in
Step 3. After the PIN number is
successfully entered, the system
prompts you to provide a name
for the paired cell phone.
are within range of the system,
the system connects to the first
available paired cell phone in
the order that they were first
paired to the system. To link
to a different paired phone, see
“Linking to a Different Phone”
later in this section.
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds.
2. Say “Bluetooth”.
3. Say “List”.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-20
Infotainment System
Deleting a Paired Phone
3. Say “Change phone”.
Digit Store: This command allows
a phone number to be stored as a
name tag by entering the digits one
at a time.
.
If the phone name you want to
delete is unknown, see “Listing All
Paired and Connected Phones”.
If another cell phone is
found, the response will be
“<Phone name> is now
connected”.
Delete: This command is used to
delete individual name tags.
1. Press and hold b g for
.
If another cell phone is not
found, the original phone
remains connected.
two seconds.
Delete All Name Tags: This
command deletes all stored name
tags in the Hands Free Calling
Directory and the OnStarTurn by
Turn Destinations Directory.
2. Say “Bluetooth”.
3. Say “Delete”. The system asks
Storing and Deleting Phone
Numbers
for which phone to delete.
4. Say the name of the phone you
want to delete.
The system can store up to
30 phone numbers as name tags
in the Hands Free Directory that is
shared between the Bluetooth and
OnStar systems.
Using the “Store” Command
Connecting to a Different Phone
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds.
To connect to a different cell phone,
the Bluetooth system looks for the
next available cell phone in the
order in which all the available cell
phones were paired. Depending
on which cell phone you want to
connect to, you may have to use
this command several times.
2. Say “Store”.
The following commands are used
delete and store phone numbers.
3. Say the phone number or group
of numbers you want to store all
at once with no pauses, then
follow the directions given by the
system to save a name tag for
this number.
Store: This command will store
a phone number, or a group of
numbers as a name tag
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds.
2. Say “Bluetooth”.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-21
Using the “Digit Store” Command
Using the “Delete” Command
Using the “List” Command
If an unwanted number is
recognized by the system, say
“Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
1. Press and hold b g for
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds.
two seconds.
2. Say “Delete”.
2. Say “Directory”.
3. Say “Hands Free Calling”.
4. Say “List”.
3. Say the name tag you want to
delete.
To hear all of the numbers
recognized by the system, say
“Verify” at any time.
Using the “Delete All Name Tags”
Command
Making a Call
1. Press and hold b g for
Calls can be made using the
following commands.
This command deletes all
stored name tags in the Hands
Free Calling Directory and the
OnStarTurn by Turn Destinations
Directory.
two seconds.
2. Say “Digit Store”.
Dial or Call: The dial or
call command can be used
interchangeably to dial a phone
3. Say each digit, one at a time,
that you want to store. After
each digit is entered, the system
repeats back the digit it heard
followed by a tone. After the
last digit has been entered,
say “Store”, and then follow the
directions given by the system to
save a name tag for this number.
number or a stored name tag.
To delete all name tags:
Digit Dial: This command allows
a phone number to be dialed by
entering the digits one at a time.
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds.
2. Say “Delete all name tags”.
Re‐dial : This command is used to
dial the last number used on the cell
phone.
Listing Stored Numbers
The list command will list all the
stored numbers and name tags.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-22
Infotainment System
Using the “Dial” or “Call”
Command
To hear all of the numbers
recognized by the system, say
“Verify” at any time.
Receiving a Call
When an incoming call is received,
the audio system mutes and a ring
tone is heard in the vehicle.
1. Press and hold b g for
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds.
two seconds.
.
2. Say “Dial” or “Call”.
Press b g to answer the call.
2. Say “Digit Dial”.
3. Say the entire number without
pausing or say the name tag.
.
Press c to ignore a call.
3. Say each digit, one at a time,
that you want to dial. After each
digit is entered, the system
repeats back the digit it heard
followed by a tone. After the
last digit has been entered,
say “Dial”.
Call Waiting
Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
speakers.
Call waiting must be supported on
the cell phone and enabled by the
wireless service carrier.
Using the “Digit Dial” Command
.
Press b g to answer an
incoming call when another
call is active. The original call
is placed on hold.
The digit dial command allows a
phone number to be dialed by
entering the digits one at a time.
After each digit is entered, the
system repeats back the digit it
heard followed by a tone.
Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
speakers.
.
Press b g again to return to the
original call.
Using the “Re‐dial” Command
1. Press and hold b g for
If an unwanted number is
recognized by the system, say
“Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
.
To ignore the incoming call, no
two seconds.
action is required.
2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial”.
.
Press c to disconnect the
current call and switch to the call
on hold.
Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
speakers.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-23
To Transfer Audio to the Bluetooth
System From a Cell Phone
Three‐Way Calling
To mute a call, press b g, and then
say “Mute Call”.
Three‐way calling must be
supported on the cell phone and
enabled by the wireless service
carrier.
During a call with the audio on the
To cancel mute, press b g, and
then say “Un‐mute Call”.
cell phone, press b g. The audio
transfers to the vehicle. If the audio
does not transfer to the vehicle,
use the audio transfer feature on
the cell phone. See your cell phone
manufacturers user guide for more
information.
Transferring a Call
1. While on a call, press b g.
2. Say “Three‐way call”.
Audio can be transferred between
the Bluetooth system and the cell
phone.
3. Use the dial or call command to
dial the number of the third party
to be called.
The cell phone must be paired
and connected with the Bluetooth
system before a call can be
transferred. The connection process
can take up to two minutes after the
ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
Voice Pass-Thru
4. Once the call is connected,
Voice pass‐thru allows access to
the voice recognition commands on
the cell phone. See your cell phone
manufacturers user guide to see if
the cell phone supports this feature.
press b g to link all the callers
together.
Ending a Call
To Transfer Audio From the
Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone
Press c to end a call.
Muting a Call
To access contacts stored in the cell
phone:
During a call with the audio in the
vehicle:
1. Press and hold b g for
During a call, all sounds from inside
the vehicle can be muted so that the
person on the other end of the call
cannot hear them.
two seconds.
1. Press b g.
2. Say “Transfer Call”.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system
responds “Bluetooth ready”,
followed by a tone.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-24
Infotainment System
3. Say “Voice”. The system
responds “OK, accessing
<phone name>”.
Clearing the System
Unless information is deleted out
of the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system,
it will be retained indefinitely.
This includes all saved name tags in
the phone book and phone pairing
information. For information on how
to delete this information, see the
previous sections on Deleting a
Paired Phone and Deleting
The cell phone's normal prompt
messages will go through its
cycle according to the phone's
operating instructions.
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
(DTMF) Tones
Name Tags.
The Bluetooth system can send
numbers and the numbers stored
as name tags during a call. You
can use this feature when calling a
menu driven phone system. Account
numbers can also be stored for use.
Other Information
The Bluetooth® word mark and
logos are owned by the Bluetooth®
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
by General Motors is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
Sending a Number or Name Tag
During a Call
1. Press b g. The system
responds “Ready”, followed
by a tone.
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑19 for FCC information.
2. Say “Dial”.
3. Say the number or name tag
to send.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
8-1
Climate Control Systems
Climate Controls
Dual Automatic Climate Control System
Climate Control Systems
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
With this system the heating, cooling, and ventilation can be controlled.
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
A. Driver Temperature Controls
B. Display
F. Air Conditioning
G. Fan Control
C. Passenger Temperature Control
D. AUTO
H. Air Delivery Mode Control
I. Defrost
E. Recirculation
J. Rear Window Defogger
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-2
Climate Controls
When the vehicle is first started,
the display shows the driver's
temperature setting, the outside
temperature, the fan speed and the
air delivery, for about 10 seconds.
After a ten second display of the
current settings, the word AUTO,
the driver's temperature setting
and the outside temperature will
be shown. The system operates
to reach the set temperature as
quickly as possible. The AUTO
control system works best with the
windows up and the removable roof
installed or the convertible top up.
available. The system starts out
blowing air at the floor but may
change modes automatically as
the vehicle warms up to maintain
the chosen temperature setting.
The length of time needed for
warm up depends on the outside
temperature and the length of
time that has elapsed since the
vehicle was last driven.
The outside temperature is shown
in the center of the display.
The digital display will show the
readings in Fahrenheit or Celsius.
See “Personal Options” under
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑55 for information
1. Press the AUTO button.
3. Wait for the system to regulate.
This may take from 10 to
2. Adjust the temperature to a
comfortable setting between
16°C (60°F) and 32°C (90°F).
Choosing the coldest or warmest
temperature setting will not
cause the system to heat or
cool any faster. A setting of
23°C (73°F) is suggested.
on changing your display.
30 minutes. Then adjust the
temperature, if necessary.
Automatic Operation
Do not cover the solar sensor
located in the center of the
instrument panel, near the
windshield. For more information
on the solar sensor, see “Sensor”
later in this section.
AUTO (Automatic): Press the
AUTO button to place the entire
system in the automatic mode.
When automatic operation is active,
the system automatically controls
the inside temperature, the air
delivery mode, and the fan speed.
In cold weather, the system will
start at reduced fan speeds to
avoid blowing cold air into your
vehicle until warmer air is
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
8-3
Pressing the arrows will delete
AUTO from the digital display.
The fan graphics with the fan speed
bars will be shown. The AUTO
button must be pressed to return
to the automatic fan control.
To change the current mode, select
one of the following:
Manual Operation
Driver Power/Temperature: Press
the driver temperature knob to
turn the climate control system
off. This is the only setting that
completely shuts off the fan.
The digital display shows only
the outside temperature. The driver
and the passenger set temperature
and the air intake mode can still be
adjusted when the climate control
is off.
H (Vent): Air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets, with some
air directed to the floor outlets.
% (Bi-Level): Air is divided
between the instrument panel and
floor outlets.
If the airflow seems low when the
fan speed is at the highest setting,
the passenger compartment air
filter may need to be replaced. For
more information, see Passenger
Compartment Air Filter on page 8‑7.
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the
floor outlets, with some air directed
to the windshield and side window
defogger outlets.
N (Air Delivery Mode Control):
Press this button to manually lock in
the current air delivery setting and
to stop the automatic mode control.
Passenger Power/Temperature:
Press the passenger temperature
knob to turn the passenger's climate
control system on or off. Turn the
knob to increase or decrease the
temperature for the passenger. If the
passenger's climate control system
is off, the driver's temperature knob
will control the temperature for the
entire vehicle.
- (Floor/Defog): This mode clears
the windows of fog or moisture.
Air is directed to the windshield
and the floor outlets, with a
small amount to the side window
outlets. In this mode, the system
automatically turns off the
Pressing N deletes AUTO from
the digital display and the mode
graphics will be shown. To change
the setting, press N again. The
AUTO button must be pressed to
return to the automatic mode
selection.
recirculation and runs the
air-conditioning compressor
unless the outside temperature
is at or below freezing. The
recirculation mode cannot be
selected while in the defog mode.
x 9 w (Fan): Press to increase
or decrease the fan speed. The fan
speed setting will appear in the
display.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-4
Climate Controls
On hot days, open the windows to
let hot inside air escape; then close
them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for the vehicle to cool down.
It also helps the system to operate
more efficiently.
1 (Defrost): This mode clears the
windows of fog or frost more quickly.
Air is directed to the windshield,
with a small amount directed to the
side window outlets. The indicator
light comes on and the digital
display will show the defrost mode
symbol and fan speed when the
front defrost mode is being used. In
this mode, the system automatically
turns off the recirculation and runs
the air-conditioning compressor,
unless the outside temperature is
at or below freezing. Recirculation
cannot be selected while in the
^ (Air Conditioning Off): Press
to turn the air conditioning
compressor off. Press AUTO to
return to automatic operation.
When in AUTO, the air conditioning
compressor comes on automatically,
as needed.
For quick cool down on hot
days press the AUTO button and
adjust the temperature to a cool,
comfortable setting. To achieve
maximum cool down, do the
following:
Air conditioning does not
operate at temperatures below
about 2°C to 4°C (35°F to 40°F).
In temperatures above 4°C (40°F),
the air conditioning cannot be
turned off in defrost and defog,
as it helps to remove moisture
from the vehicle. It also helps to
keep the windows clear.
1. Select H mode.
2. Press ?.
defrost mode. Pressing 1 again
will return the system to the last
operating mode.
3. Select the a/c on.
You may notice a slight change
in engine performance when the
air-conditioning compressor shuts
off and turns on again. This is
normal. The system is designed to
make adjustments to help with fuel
economy while still maintaining the
selected temperature.
4. Select the coolest temperature.
5. Select the highest fan speed.
For severe ice conditions, turn
the driver's temperature knob to
32°C (90°F) while in defrost mode.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the
windows are clear.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
8-5
Using these settings together for
long periods of time may cause
the air inside of your vehicle to
become too dry. To prevent this
from happening, after the air in
the vehicle has cooled, turn the
recirculation mode off.
If the outside temperature goes up,
the displayed temperature will not
change until:
Sensors
The solar sensor on the vehicle
monitors the solar heat and
uses the information to maintain
the selected temperature when
operating in AUTO mode by
automatically adjusting the
temperature, fan speed and air
delivery system. The system
may also supply cooler air to the
side of the vehicle facing the sun.
The recirculation mode will also
be activated, as necessary. Do not
cover the solar sensor located on
the top of the instrument panel near
the windshield or the system will
not work properly.
.
The vehicle's speed is above
19 km/h (12 mph) for 5 minutes.
.
The vehicle's speed is above
52 km/h (32 mph) for
2.5 minutes.
The air conditioning system
removes moisture from the air,
so a small amount of water might
drip under the vehicle while idling
or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.
These delays prevent false
readings. If the temperature goes
down, the outside temperature
will be shown when you start the
vehicle. If it has been turned off
for less than three hours, the
temperature will be recalled from
the previous vehicle operation.
? (Recirculation): Press to
turn the recirculation mode on or off.
An indicator light comes on to show
that recirculation is on. This mode
prevents outside air from entering
your vehicle. It can be used to
prevent outside air and odors from
entering your vehicle and to help
cool the air inside your vehicle more
quickly. Recirculation mode is not
available in defrost or defog mode.
There is also an inside temperature
sensor located to the left of the
ignition switch. The automatic
climate control system uses this
sensor to receive information, so
if you block or cover it, the system
will not function properly.
There is also a sensor located
behind the front bumper.
This sensor reads the outside
air temperature and helps to
maintain the temperature inside
the vehicle. Any cover on the front
of the vehicle could give a false
reading in the temperature.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-6
Climate Controls
The vehicle has heated outside
rearview mirrors. The mirrors will
heat to help clear fog or frost from
the surface of the mirrors when the
rear window defogger button is
pressed.
Rear Window Defogger
Air Vents
Use the tab located on the air
outlets to change the direction
of the airflow.
The rear window defogger uses a
warming grid to remove fog or frost
from the rear window.
The rear window defogger only
works when the engine is running.
Operation Tips
For vehicles with a power
convertible top, the rear window
defogger and heated mirrors are
automatically disabled when the
power convertible top is moving
or down.
.
Clear away any ice, snow or
= (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. Be sure to clear
as much snow from the rear window
as possible. An indicator light
comes on to show that the rear
window defogger is on.
leaves from the air inlets at the
base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into your
vehicle.
.
Use of non-GM approved hood
Notice: Do not use anything
sharp on the inside of the rear
window. If you do, you could cut
or damage the warming grid, and
the repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Do not
attach a temporary vehicle
deflectors may adversely affect
the performance of the system.
The rear window defogger turns off
about 10 minutes after the button
is pressed when traveling less than
48 km/h (30 mph). If turned on
again, the defogger only runs for
about five minutes before turning
off. The defogger can also be turned
off by turning off the engine.
.
Keep the area around the base
of the instrument panel console
and air path under the seats
clear of objects to help circulate
the air inside of your vehicle
more effectively.
license, tape, a decal or anything
similar to the defogger grid.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
8-7
The passenger compartment air
filter is located on the passenger
side of the engine compartment
near the battery. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 10‑10.
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
The passenger compartment air
filter removes certain particles from
the air including pollen and dust
particles. Reductions in airflow,
which may occur more often in
dusty areas, indicate that the
filter may need to be replaced.
See Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 11‑8.
To check or replace the air filter:
3. Remove the filter and install the
new air filter.
4. Replace the filter cover.
5. Attach the retainer clips.
Notice: Driving without a
passenger compartment air filter
in place can cause water and
small particles, like paper and
leaves, to be pulled into your
climate control system which may
cause damage to it. Make sure
you always replace the old filter
with a new one.
1. Remove the cover retainer
clips (A) from the passenger
compartment air filter cover.
2. Remove the cover.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-8
Climate Controls
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-1
Retained Accessory
Ride Control Systems
Driving and
Operating
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Shifting Into Park (Automatic
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Parking (Manual
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Parking Over Things
That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Traction Control
System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Active Handling System . . . . . 9-37
Competitive Driving Mode . . . 9-38
Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . 9-42
Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . 9-42
Driving Information
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Racing or Other Competitive
Cruise Control
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Fuel
Engine Exhaust
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-49
California Fuel
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Running the Vehicle While
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 9-10
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-13
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Automatic Transmission
Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-28
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-49
Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51
Filling a Portable Fuel
Manual Transmission
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . 9-32
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
Brakes
Starting and Operating
Towing
Antilock Brake
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-18
Front Air Dam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
General Towing
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Conversions and Add-Ons
Add-On Electrical
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-2
Driving and Operating
Death and injury associated with
drinking and driving is a global
tragedy.
Driving Information
WARNING (Continued)
Driver distraction can cause
collisions resulting in injury or
possible death. These simple
defensive driving techniques
could save your life.
Defensive Driving
Alcohol affects four things that
anyone needs to drive a vehicle:
judgment, muscular coordination,
vision, and attentiveness.
Defensive driving means “always
expect the unexpected.” The first
step in driving defensively is to wear
your safety belt, see Safety Belts on
page 3‑9.
Police records show that
almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve
alcohol. In most cases, these
deaths are the result of someone
who was drinking and driving.
In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related
deaths have been associated with
the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
Drunk Driving
WARNING
{
WARNING
{
Assume that other road users
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and other
drivers) are going to be careless
and make mistakes. Anticipate
what they might do and be ready.
In addition:
Drinking and then driving is
very dangerous. Your reflexes,
perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even
a small amount of alcohol. You
can have a serious — or even
fatal — collision if you drive after
drinking. Do not drink and drive or
ride with a driver who has been
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if
you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
.
Allow enough following
distance between you and
the driver in front of you.
.
Focus on the task of driving.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-3
For persons under 21, it is against
the law in every U.S. state to drink
alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental
reasons for these laws.
Average reaction time is about
Control of a Vehicle
three‐fourths of a second. But that
is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two
or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition,
alertness, coordination, and
eyesight all play a part. So do
alcohol, drugs, and frustration.
But even in three‐fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at
100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m
(66 feet). That could be a lot of
distance in an emergency, so
keeping enough space between
the vehicle and others is important.
The following three systems
help to control the vehicle while
driving — brakes, steering, and
accelerator. At times, as when
driving on snow or ice, it is easy to
ask more of those control systems
than the tires and road can provide.
Meaning, you can lose control of
the vehicle. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 9‑36 and
Active Handling System on
The obvious way to eliminate the
leading highway safety problem is
for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive.
Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person's system
can make crash injuries worse,
especially injuries to the brain,
spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been
drinking — driver or passenger — is
in a crash, that person's chance of
being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not
been drinking.
page 9‑37.
Adding non‐dealer accessories
can affect vehicle performance.
See Accessories and Modifications
on page 10‑4.
And, of course, actual stopping
distances vary greatly with the
surface of the road, whether it is
pavement or gravel; the condition
of the road, whether it is wet, dry,
or icy; tire tread; the condition of the
brakes; the weight of the vehicle;
and the amount of brake force
applied.
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on
page 5‑21.
Braking action involves perception
time and reaction time. Deciding to
push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is
reaction time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-4
Driving and Operating
Avoid needless heavy braking.
Some people drive in spurts,
heavy acceleration followed by
heavy braking, rather than keeping
pace with traffic. This is a mistake.
The brakes might not have time
to cool between hard stops.
The brakes will wear out much
faster with a lot of heavy braking.
Keeping pace with the traffic and
allowing realistic following distances
eliminates a lot of unnecessary
braking. That means better braking
and longer brake life.
Under certain weather or operating
conditions, occasional brake
squeak, squeal, or other noise
might be heard with the vehicle's
performance braking system.
This brake system is designed
for superior fade resistance
and consistent operation using
high performance brake pads.
Brake noise and brake dust are
normal and do not affect system
performance.
Magnetic Speed Variable
Assist Steering System
This system continuously adjusts
the effort felt when steering at all
vehicle speeds. It provides ease
when parking, yet a firm, solid feel
at highway speeds.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a
reasonable speed.
Traction in a curve depends on the
condition of the tires and the road
surface, the angle at which the
curve is banked, and vehicle speed.
While in a curve, speed is the one
factor that can be controlled.
Adding non‐dealer accessories
can affect vehicle performance.
See Accessories and Modifications
on page 10‑4.
If the engine ever stops while the
vehicle is being driven, brake
normally but do not pump the
brakes. If the brakes are pumped,
the pedal could get harder to push
down. If the engine stops, there will
still be some power brake assist but
it will be used when the brake is
applied. Once the power assist is
used up, it can take longer to stop
and the brake pedal will be harder
to push.
Steering
If there is a need to reduce speed,
do it before entering the curve, while
the front wheels are straight.
Power Steering
If power steering assist is lost
because the engine stops or the
system is not functioning, the
vehicle can be steered but it will
take more effort.
Try to adjust the speed so you can
drive through the curve. Maintain a
reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until out of the curve,
and then accelerate gently into the
straightaway.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
Off-Road Recovery
The vehicle's right wheels can drop
off the edge of a road onto the
shoulder while driving.
9-5
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering
can be more effective than braking.
For example, you come over a hill
and find a truck stopped in your
lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out
from between parked cars and stops
right in front of you. These problems
can be avoided by braking — if you
can stop in time. But sometimes you
cannot stop in time because there
is no room. That is the time for
evasive action — steering around
the problem.
An emergency like this requires
close attention and a quick decision.
If holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o'clock
positions, it can be turned a full
180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have
to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
quickly straighten the wheel once
you have avoided the object.
The vehicle can perform very well
in emergencies like these. First
apply the brakes. See Braking on
page 9‑3. It is better to remove
as much speed as possible from
a collision. Then steer around
the problem, to the left or right
depending on the space available.
If the level of the shoulder is only
slightly below the pavement,
recovery should be fairly easy.
Ease off the accelerator and
then, if there is nothing in the
way, steer so that the vehicle
straddles the edge of the pavement.
The fact that such emergency
situations are always possible is a
good reason to practice defensive
driving at all times and wear safety
belts properly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-6
Driving and Operating
Turn the steering wheel 8 to 13 cm
(3 to 5 inches), about one-eighth
turn, until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn the
steering wheel to go straight down
the roadway.
Of course, traction is reduced when
water, snow, ice, gravel, or other
material is on the road. For safety,
slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to
slow down on slippery surfaces
because stopping distance is longer
and vehicle control more limited.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of
the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid
most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions,
and by not overdriving those
conditions. But skids are always
possible.
Loss of Control
While driving on a surface with
reduced traction, try to avoid
Let us review what driving experts
say about what happens when the
three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not
have enough friction where the tires
meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
The three types of skids correspond
to the vehicle's three control
sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including reducing
vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
gear. Any sudden changes could
cause the tires to slide. You might
not realize the surface is slippery
until the vehicle is skidding. Learn
to recognize warning clues — such
as enough water, ice, or packed
snow on the road to make a
systems. In the braking skid,
the wheels are not rolling. In the
steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes
tires to slip and lose cornering force.
And in the acceleration skid, too
much throttle causes the driving
wheels to spin.
In any emergency, do not give up.
Keep trying to steer and constantly
seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease
your foot off the accelerator pedal
and quickly steer the way you
mirrored surface — and slow
down when you have any doubt.
want the vehicle to go. If you start
steering quickly enough, the vehicle
may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Remember: Antilock brakes help
avoid only the braking skid.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-7
Except Z06, ZR1, and Grand
Sport: Be sure to check the oil
level often during racing or other
competitive driving and keep the
level at or near 1 L (1 quart) above
the upper mark that shows the
proper operating range on the
engine oil dipstick. After the
competitive driving, remove
excess oil so that the level on
the dipstick is not above the
upper mark that shows the
Z06, ZR1, and Grand Sport Only:
For racing or competitive driving, it
is recommended that the loading of
the vehicle be limited to the driver
only, with no other cargo, and that
tires be inflated to 180 kPa (26 psi)
for a maximum speed of 230 km/h
(143 mph).
Racing or Other
Competitive Driving
Racing or competitive driving
may affect the vehicle warranty.
See the warranty book before
using the vehicle for racing or
other competitive driving.
If the vehicle is a Z06, ZR1,
Notice: If you use the vehicle
for racing or other competitive
driving, the engine may use more
oil than it would with normal use.
Low oil levels can damage the
engine. For information on how
to add oil, see Engine Oil on
page 10‑15.
or Grand Sport model, it has
greaseable outer ends on both
of the rear toe‐links. Under
normal use, lubrication should
be performed as described in
the maintenance schedule.
See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑2 and Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 11‑6.
If using the vehicle for racing,
lubrication should be performed
at the end of each racing day.
See your dealer for lubrication
and make sure any needed
repairs are made at once. Proper
procedures for performing these
services can be found in the service
manual. See Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 13‑15.
proper operating range.
Z06, ZR1, and Grand Sport
Only: For racing or competitive
driving, it is recommended that
the brake fluid be replaced with a
high performance brake fluid that
has a dry boiling point greater than
279°C (534°F). After conversion to
the high performance brake fluid,
follow the brake fluid service
Z06, ZR1, and Grand Sport Only:
Be sure to check the oil level
often during racing or other
competitive driving and keep the
level at or near the upper mark
that shows the proper operating
range on the engine oil dipstick.
recommendations outlined by the
fluid manufacturer. Do not use
silicone or DOT‐5 brake fluids.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-8
Driving and Operating
If the vehicle is used for racing or
other competitive driving, the rear
axle fluid temperatures may be
higher than would occur in normal
driving. We recommend that the
rear axle fluid be drained and
refilled with new fluid after every
24 hours of racing or competitive
driving. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 11‑6 for
what fluid to use.
When performed as instructed,
these procedures will not damage
the brakes. During the burnishing
procedure, the brake pads will
smoke and produce an odor.
The braking force and pedal travel
may increase. After the procedure
is complete, the brake pads may
appear white at the rotor contact.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2, 5 times.
This should take about
10 minutes.
4. After completing the 50 stops,
cool the brakes by driving
for 8 km (5 miles) at 97 kph
(60 mph).
As with all high performance brake
systems, some amount of brake
squeal is normal.
Street High Performance Brake
Burnishing Procedure
Racing/Track Brake Burnish
Procedure
ZR1 Brake Burnish Procedure
Run this procedure in a safe
manner and in compliance with all
local and state ordinances/laws
regarding motor vehicle operation.
Run this procedure only on dry
pavement.
Notice: These procedures are
specific to the ZR1 with ceramic
brake rotors. These procedures
should not be run on other
Corvette models as damage
may result.
To prepare the ZR1 brake system
for track events and racing, the
Street High Performance Brake
Burnish as described previously
should be completed.
1. From a stop, accelerate as
rapidly as possible without
activating traction control to
a speed of 97 kph (60 mph).
In addition to completing the Street
High Performance Brake Burnishing
Procedure, the following additional
procedure needs to be completed to
make the ZR1 brake system ready
for track events and racing.
Notice: The new vehicle break‐in
period should be completed
before performing the brake
burnish procedure or damage
may occur to the powertrain/
engine. See New Vehicle Break-In
on page 9‑18.
2. Use enough pedal force to
completely stop the vehicle in
4 to 5 seconds. If ABS activates,
braking is too hard.
This procedure should only be
run on a track and only on dry
pavement.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
WARNING (Continued)
9-9
Notice: Brake pedal fade will
occur during this track burnish
procedure and can cause brake
pedal travel and force to increase.
This could extend stopping
distance until the brakes are
fully burnished.
Driving on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can reduce
vehicle traction and affect your
ability to stop and accelerate.
Always drive slower in these types
of driving conditions and avoid
driving through large puddles and
deep‐standing or flowing water.
Flowing or rushing water creates
strong forces. Driving through
flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this
happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be
very cautious about trying to
drive through flowing water.
1. Drive a normal first lap and not
too aggressive.
2. Laps 2 and 3 should be
gradually driven faster and
more aggressive, while allowing
for reduced brake output and
increased stopping distance
due to brake fade.
WARNING
{
Wet brakes can cause crashes.
They might not work as well in
a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could
lose control of the vehicle.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water
can build up under your vehicle's
tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road
is wet enough and you are going
fast enough. When your vehicle
is hydroplaning, it has little or no
contact with the road.
3. Lap 4 as near to full speed,
while allowing for reduced brake
output and increased stopping
distance due to brake fade.
After driving through a large
puddle of water or a car/vehicle
wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work
normally.
4. Laps 5 and 6 should be cool
down laps
(Continued)
5. Lap 7 should be normal driving
or an easy out lap.
There is no hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to
slow down when the road is wet.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-10
Driving and Operating
Other driving tips include:
Other Rainy Weather Tips
WARNING
{
.
Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
Besides slowing down, other wet
weather driving tips include:
If you do not shift down, the
brakes could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would
then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
.
Keep interior temperature cool.
.
Allow extra following distance.
.
Keep your eyes moving — scan
.
the road ahead and to the sides.
Pass with caution.
.
.
Check the rearview mirror and
Keep windshield wiping
vehicle instruments often.
equipment in good shape.
.
Keep the windshield washer fluid
Hill and Mountain Roads
reservoir filled.
Driving on steep hills or through
mountains is different than driving
on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
driving in these conditions include:
.
Have good tires with proper
tread depth. See Tires on
page 10‑58.
WARNING
{
.
Turn off cruise control.
.
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)
or with the ignition off is
dangerous. The brakes will
Keep the vehicle serviced and in
good shape.
Highway Hypnosis
.
Check all fluid levels and brakes,
tires, cooling system, and
transmission.
have to do all the work of slowing
down and they could get so hot
that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking
or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Always have the
engine running and the vehicle in
gear when going downhill.
Always be alert and pay attention
to your surroundings while driving.
If you become tired or sleepy, find
a safe place to park your vehicle
and rest.
.
Shift to a lower gear when going
down steep or long hills.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-11
.
Stay in your own lane. Do not
swing wide or cut across the
center of the road. Drive at
speeds that let you stay in
your own lane.
Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive
wheels will spin and polish the
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
surface under the tires even more.
Drive carefully when there is snow
or ice between the tires and the
road, creating less traction or grip.
Wet ice can occur at about 0°C
(32°F) when freezing rain begins to
fall, resulting in even less traction.
Avoid driving on wet ice or in
freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
on page 9‑34 improves vehicle
stability during hard stops on
slippery roads, but apply the brakes
sooner than when on dry pavement.
.
.
Top of hills: Be
alert — something
could be in your lane
(stalled car, accident).
Pay attention to special road
signs (falling rocks area, winding
roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take
appropriate action.
Allow greater following distance on
any slippery road and watch for
slippery spots. Icy patches can
occur on otherwise clear roads in
shaded areas. The surface of a
curve or an overpass can remain
icy when the surrounding roads
are clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while
on ice.
Drive with caution, whatever the
condition. Accelerate gently so
traction is not lost. Accelerating too
quickly causes the wheels to spin
and makes the surface under the
tires slick, so there is even less
traction.
Turn off cruise control on slippery
surfaces.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-12
Driving and Operating
Blizzard Conditions
WARNING (Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Being stuck in snow can be in a
serious situation. Stay with the
vehicle unless there is help nearby.
If possible, use the Roadside
Assistance Program (United States
and Canada) on page 13‑8 or
Roadside Assistance Program
(Mexico) on page 13‑10. To get
help and keep everyone in the
vehicle safe:
cannot be seen or smelled. It can
cause unconsciousness and even
death.
.
Adjust the climate control
system to a setting that
circulates the air inside
the vehicle and set the fan
speed to the highest setting.
See Climate Control System
in the Index.
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
.
Clear away snow from around
the base of your vehicle,
especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑26.
.
.
Turn on the hazard warning
Check again from time to
flashers.
time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
.
Snow can trap exhaust gases
under your vehicle. This can
cause deadly CO (Carbon
Tie a red cloth to an outside
mirror.
.
Open a window about 5 cm
(2 in) on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
Monoxide) gas to get inside.
CO could overcome you and kill
you. You cannot see it or smell it,
so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle,
especially any that is blocking the
exhaust.
WARNING
{
Snow can trap engine exhaust
under the vehicle. This may
cause exhaust gases to get
inside. Engine exhaust contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which
.
Fully open the air outlets
on or under the instrument
panel.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-13
Run the engine for short periods
only as needed to keep warm, but
be careful.
Rocking the Vehicle to Get
it Out
If the Vehicle is Stuck
Slowly and cautiously spin the
wheels to free the vehicle when
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
Turn the steering wheel left and
right to clear the area around
the front wheels. Turn off any
traction system. Shift back and forth
between R (Reverse) and a forward
gear, or with a manual transmission,
between 1 (First) or 2 (Second) and
R (Reverse), spinning the wheels
as little as possible. To prevent
transmission wear, wait until the
wheels stop spinning before shifting
gears. Release the accelerator
pedal while shifting, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transmission is in gear.
Slowly spinning the wheels in the
forward and reverse directions
causes a rocking motion that could
free the vehicle. If that does not
get the vehicle out after a few
tries, it might need to be towed out.
If the vehicle does need to be towed
out, see Towing the Vehicle on
page 10‑86.
To save fuel, run the engine for only
short periods as needed to warm
the vehicle and then shut the engine
off and close the window most of
the way to save heat. Repeat this
until help arrives but only when you
feel really uncomfortable from the
cold. Moving about to keep warm
also helps.
If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the
traction system off and use the
rocking method.
WARNING
{
If the vehicle's tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and
you or others could be injured.
The vehicle can overheat,
causing an engine compartment
fire or other damage. Spin the
wheels as little as possible and
avoid going above 55 km/h
(35 mph) as shown on the
speedometer.
If it takes some time for help to
arrive, now and then when you run
the engine, push the accelerator
pedal slightly so the engine
runs faster than the idle speed.
This keeps the battery charged to
restart the vehicle and to signal for
help with the headlamps. Do this
as little as possible to save fuel.
For information about using tire
chains on the vehicle, see Tire
Chains on page 10‑80.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-14
Driving and Operating
Tire and Loading Information
Label
Vehicle Load Limits
WARNING
{
It is very important to know
how much weight your vehicle
can carry. This weight is called
the vehicle capacity weight
and includes the weight of
all occupants, cargo and all
nonfactory‐installed options.
Two labels on your vehicle
show how much weight it may
properly carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label
and the Certification label.
Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), or either the
maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
If you do, parts on the vehicle
can break, and it can change
the way the vehicle handles.
These could cause you to
lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the
life of the vehicle.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and
Loading Information label is
attached to the center pillar
(B-pillar) of your vehicle.
With the driver's door open, you
will find the label attached below
the door latch. This label shows
the number of occupant seating
positions (A), and the maximum
vehicle capacity weight (B) in
kilograms and pounds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-15
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit
The Tire and Loading
Information label also
the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (1400 − 750
shows the size of the original
equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation
pressures (D). For more
information on tires and inflation
see Tires on page 10‑58 and
Tire Pressure on page 10‑66.
1. Locate the statement
“The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on your vehicle's
placard.
(5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
There is also important loading
information on the vehicle
Certification label. It tells
you the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
for the front and rear axle.
See “Certification Label” later
in this section.
6. If your vehicle will be towing
a trailer, the load from your
trailer will be transferred to
your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo
and luggage load capacity
of your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals
the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs
Your vehicle is neither
designed nor intended
to tow a trailer.
and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-16
Driving and Operating
Example 1
Example 2
Example 3
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 1 = (400 kg) (181 lbs)
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 2 = 181 kg (400 lbs)
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 3 = 181 kg (400 lbs)
B. Subtract Occupant Weight @
68 kg (150 lbs) × 1 = 68 kg
(150 lbs)
B. Subtract Occupant Weight @
68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg
(300 lbs)
B. Subtract Occupant Weight @
91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 181 kg
(400 lbs)
C. Available Occupant and Cargo
Weight = 113 kg (250 lbs)
C. Available Cargo Weight = 45 kg
(100 lbs)
C. Available Cargo Weight =
0 kg (0 lbs)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-17
Refer to your vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information label for
specific information about your
vehicle's capacity weight and
seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers
and cargo should never exceed
your vehicle's capacity weight.
It tells you the gross weight
capacity of your vehicle, called
the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR
includes the weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, fuel and
cargo. Never exceed the GVWR
for your vehicle, or the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for
either the front or rear axle.
WARNING (Continued)
maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
If you do, parts on the vehicle
can break, and it can change
the way the vehicle handles.
These could cause you to
lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the
life of the vehicle.
Certification Label
Do not load your vehicle with
more weight than it was
designed to carry. See “Steps
for Determining Correct Load
Limit” earlier in this section.
Notice : Overloading the
vehicle may cause damage.
Repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty.
WARNING
{
Do not overload the vehicle.
Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), or either the
A vehicle specific Certification
label is attached to the rear
edge of the driver's door.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-18
Driving and Operating
If you put things inside your
vehicle — like suitcases,
Starting and
Operating
WARNING (Continued)
tools, packages or anything
else — they will go as fast as
the vehicle goes. If you have to
stop or turn quickly, or if there is
a crash, they will keep going.
.
Never stack heavier
things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above
the tops of the seats.
New Vehicle Break-In
Follow these recommended
guidelines during the first 2 414 km
(1,500 miles) of driving this vehicle.
Parts have a break-in period and
performance will be better in the
long run.
.
.
Do not leave an
unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
WARNING
{
Things you put inside your
vehicle can strike and injure
people in a sudden stop or
turn, or in a crash.
For the first 322 km (200 miles):
When you carry something
inside the vehicle, secure
it whenever you can.
.
To break in new tires, drive at
moderate speeds and avoid hard
cornering for the first 322 km
(200 miles).
.
Put things in the rear area
of your vehicle. Try to
spread the weight evenly.
.
New brake linings also need a
break- in period. Avoid making
hard stops during the first
322 km (200 miles). This is
recommended every time
brake linings are replaced.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-19
For the first 80 km (500 miles):
For the first 2 414 km (1,500 miles):
WARNING (Continued)
.
.
Avoid full throttle starts and
Do not participate in track
abrupt stops.
events, sport driving schools,
or similar activities during the
first 2 414 km (1,500 miles).
When damaged, the exposed
edges can be very sharp.
A person could be injured
by these sharp edges. Use
caution when washing the
vehicle, coming in contact with,
or removing damaged carbon
fiber parts. See your dealer for
replacement.
.
Do not exceed 4,000 rpm.
.
Avoid driving at any one
.
Check engine oil with every
constant speed, fast or slow,
including the use of cruise
control.
refueling and add if necessary.
Oil and fuel consumption may be
higher than normal during the
first 2 414 km (1,500 miles).
.
Avoid downshifting to brake
or slow the vehicle when the
engine speed will exceed
4000 rpm.
Front Air Dam
The vehicle is equipped with a front
air dam which has minimal ground
clearance.
Under normal operation, these
components will occasionally
contact some road surfaces
(speed bumps, driveway
ramps, etc.). This can be heard
inside the vehicle as a scraping
noise. This is normal and does
not indicate a problem.
.
Do not let the engine labor.
Never lug the engine in high
gear at low speeds. With a
manual transmission, shift to
the next lower gear. This rule
applies at all times, not just
during the break-in period.
Vehicles with the ZR-1 package,
or Z‐06 vehicles with RPO ULZ,
also come with a splitter made from
carbon fiber.
Use care when approaching bumps
or objects on road surfaces and
avoid them when possible.
WARNING
{
ZR‐1s, and Z‐06s with RPO ULZ,
contain parts made from carbon
fiber.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-20
Driving and Operating
In an emergency:
Ignition Positions
/ (START): Press this button
while your foot is on the brake for
an automatic transmission, or while
pressing in the clutch for a manual
transmission, to start the engine.
If the vehicle is in OFF or Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) mode, the
keyless access transmitter must
be inside the vehicle to start the
engine.
1. Brake using a firm and steady
pressure. Do not pump the
brakes repeatedly. This may
deplete power assist, requiring
increased brake pedal force.
2. Shift the vehicle to neutral. This
can be done while the vehicle is
moving. After shifting to neutral,
firmly apply the brakes and steer
the vehicle to a safe location.
9 Acc. (STOPPING THE ENGINE/
OFF/ACCESSORY): When the
vehicle is stopped with the engine
on, press the button once to turn
the engine off.
3. Come to a complete stop, shift
to P (Park), and turn the ignition
to LOCK/OFF. On vehicles with
an automatic transmission, the
shift lever must be in P (Park)
to turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK/OFF position.
The vehicle has an electronic
keyless ignition with a push-button
start.
Do not turn the engine off when the
vehicle is moving. This will cause a
loss of power assist in the brake
and steering systems and disable
the airbags.
In order to shift out of P (Park),
the vehicle must be running or in
Acc. mode and the regular brake
pedal must be applied.
4. Set the parking brake. See
Parking Brake on page 9‑35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
Starting the Engine
9-21
When the engine is on or the
vehicle is in accessory power
mode, it is recommended that a
manual transmission be placed
in R (Reverse). An automatic
transmission must be placed in
P (Park). Then press the Acc. button
to turn the engine off and place
the vehicle in RAP. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 9‑21 for more information.
If an automatic vehicle is not
correctly placed in P (Park) a
SHIFT TO PARK message will
display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC).
wipers while the engine is off.
Use accessory mode if you must
have the vehicle in motion while the
engine is off, for example, if the
vehicle is being pushed or towed.
Move the shift lever to P (Park)
or N (Neutral) for an automatic
transmission. For a manual
transmission the vehicle can be
started in Neutral or any other
gear as long as the clutch pedal is
pressed. To restart a vehicle with a
manual transmission when you are
already moving, use the Neutral
position only. To restart a vehicle
with an automatic transmission
when you are already moving,
use N (Neutral).
After being in accessory mode for
about 10 minutes, the vehicle will
automatically enter RAP or OFF,
depending on if the doors are
opened or closed.
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories can be
used for up to 10 minutes after the
engine is turned off:
Notice: Do not try to shift to
P (Park) if the vehicle is moving.
If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to P (Park)
only when the vehicle is stopped.
For more information, see
Transmission Messages on
page 5‑53.
.
Audio System
.
Power Windows
When the engine is off, press
this button to place the vehicle in
accessory mode. ACCESSORY
MODE ON will display on the
Driver Information Center (DIC).
This mode allows you to use things
like the radio and the windshield
The keyless access transmitter must
be inside the vehicle for the ignition
to work.
These features continue to work up
to 10 minutes after the engine is
turned off or until either door is
opened. If a door is opened, the
power windows and audio system
will shut off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-22
Driving and Operating
Cell phone chargers can interfere
with the operation of the Keyless
Access System. Battery chargers
should not be plugged in when
starting or turning off the engine.
2. When the engine begins
cranking, let go of the button and
the engine cranks automatically
until it starts. If the battery in the
keyless access transmitter is
weak, the DIC displays FOB
BATTERY LOW. You can still
drive the vehicle.
4. If the engine does not start and
no DIC message is displayed,
wait 15 seconds before trying
again to let the cranking motor
cool down.
To start the vehicle, do the following:
If the engine does not start after
5-10 seconds, especially in very
cold weather (below −18°C
1. For vehicles with an automatic
transmission, with your foot
on the brake pedal, press the
START button located on the
instrument panel. For vehicles
with a manual transmission, you
must also press in the clutch
pedal while pressing the START
button.
See “Battery Replacement”
under Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation on
page 2‑3 for more information.
If the fob battery is dead, you
need to insert the fob into
the fob slot to enable engine
starting. See “NO FOBS
or 0°F), it could be flooded with
too much gasoline. Try pushing
the accelerator pedal all the way
to the floor while cranking for up
to 15 seconds maximum. Wait at
least 15 seconds between each
try, to allow the cranking motor
to cool down. When the engine
starts, let go of the accelerator.
If the vehicle starts briefly but
then stops again, repeat these
steps. This clears the extra
If there is not a keyless access
transmitter in the vehicle or if
there is something causing
interference with it, the DIC will
display NO FOBS DETECTED.
See Key and Lock Messages on
page 5‑42 for more information.
DETECTED” under Key and
Lock Messages on page 5‑42.
3. Do not race the engine
immediately after starting it.
Operate the engine and
transmission gently until the
oil warms up and lubricates
all moving parts.
gasoline from the engine.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-23
Notice: Cranking the engine for
long periods of time, by pressing
the START button immediately
after cranking has ended, can
overheat and damage the
cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
between each try, to allow the
cranking motor to cool down.
Notice: The engine is designed
to work with the electronics in
the vehicle. If electrical parts
or accessories are added, you
could change the way the engine
operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your
dealer. If you do not, the engine
might not perform properly. Any
resulting damage would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
off and the vehicle goes into the
Accessory Mode. The DIC displays
SHIFT TO PARK. Once the shifter is
moved to P (Park), the vehicle turns
off. If the vehicle has a manual
transmission, it is recommended
that you move the shift lever to
R (Reverse) and set the parking
brake after you turn off the engine
by pressing and holding the Acc.
(Off/Accessory) button.
The vehicle has a
Computer-Controlled
Cranking System. This feature
assists in starting the engine
and protects components.
If the keyless access transmitter is
not detected inside the vehicle when
it is turned to off, the DIC displays
NO FOB – OFF OR RUN?.
Stopping the Engine
If the vehicle has an automatic
transmission, move the shift lever
to P (Park) and press and hold the
Acc. (Off/Accessory) button, located
on the instrument panel, until the
engine shuts off. If the shift lever
is not in P (Park), the engine shuts
Once cranking has been initiated,
the engine continues cranking
for a few seconds or until the vehicle
starts. If the engine does not start,
cranking automatically stops after
15 seconds to prevent cranking
motor damage. To prevent gear
damage, this system also prevents
cranking if the engine is already
running.
See Key and Lock Messages on
page 5‑42 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-24
Driving and Operating
1. Hold the brake pedal down
and set the parking brake.
See Parking Brake on page 9‑35
for more information.
Leaving the Vehicle With the
Engine Running (Automatic
Transmission)
Shifting Into Park
(Automatic Transmission)
WARNING
{
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)
by holding in the button on the
lever and pushing the lever all
the way toward the front of the
vehicle.
WARNING
{
It can be dangerous to get out of
the vehicle if the shift lever is not
fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine
running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure the vehicle will
not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, use the steps
that follow.
It can be dangerous to leave the
vehicle with the engine running.
The vehicle could move suddenly
if the shift lever is not fully in
P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running,
it could overheat and even catch
fire. You or others could be
3. Press the Acc. button (ignition
switch) to turn the engine off.
injured. Do not leave the vehicle
with the engine running.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-25
If you have to leave the vehicle
with the engine running, be sure
the vehicle is in P (Park) and the
parking brake is firmly set before
you leave it. After you have moved
the shift lever into P (Park), hold
down the regular brake pedal. See if
you can move the shift lever away
from P (Park) without first pushing
the button on the lever. If you can,
it means that the shift lever was not
fully locked into P (Park).
If torque lock does occur, you may
need to have another vehicle push
yours a little uphill to take some of
the pressure from the transmission
parking pawl, so you can pull the
shift lever out of P (Park).
Torque Lock (Automatic
Transmission)
If you are parking on a hill and
you do not shift the transmission
into P (Park) properly, the weight
of the vehicle may put too much
force on the parking pawl in the
transmission. You may find it
difficult to pull the shift lever out of
P (Park). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the
parking brake and then shift into
P (Park) properly before you leave
the driver seat. To find out how, see
“Shifting Into P (Park)” previously in
this section.
Shifting Out of Park
Shift lock release prevents shifting
out of P (Park) unless the vehicle is
running or in Accessory mode and
the brake pedal is applied.
The shift lock release is always
functional except in the case of an
uncharged or low voltage (less than
9‐volt) battery. See Jump Starting
on page 10‑82 for more information.
When you are ready to drive, move
the shift lever out of P (Park) before
you release the parking brake.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-26
Driving and Operating
To shift out of P (Park) use the
following:
Parking (Manual
Transmission)
Engine Exhaust
1. Apply the brake pedal.
WARNING
{
Before you get out of the vehicle,
move the shift lever into R (Reverse)
and firmly apply the parking brake.
Once the shift lever has been
placed into R (Reverse) with the
clutch pedal pressed in, you can
turn the ignition off and release
the clutch.
2. Press the shift lever button.
Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and
even death.
3. Move the shift lever to the
desired position.
If you still are unable to shift out of
P (Park):
1. Fully release the shift lever
button.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
.
The vehicle idles in areas
Parking Over Things
That Burn
2. While holding down the brake
pedal, press the shift lever
button again.
with poor ventilation (parking
garages, tunnels, deep snow
that may block underbody
airflow or tail pipes).
WARNING
{
3. Move the shift lever to the
desired position.
.
The exhaust smells or
Things that can burn could touch
hot exhaust parts under the
vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass,
or other things that can burn.
sounds strange or different.
If you still cannot move the shift
lever from P (Park), consult your
dealer or a professional towing
service.
.
The exhaust system leaks
due to corrosion or damage.
.
The vehicle’s exhaust system
has been modified, damaged
or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-27
Running the Vehicle
While Parked
It is better not to park with the
engine running. But if you ever have
to, here are some things to know.
WARNING (Continued)
WARNING
{
.
There are holes or openings
in the vehicle body from
damage or after-market
modifications that are not
completely sealed.
It can be dangerous to get out
of the vehicle if the automatic
transmission shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when
the engine is running unless you
have to. If you have left the
WARNING
{
If unusual fumes are detected or
if it is suspected that exhaust is
coming into the vehicle:
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed
area with poor ventilation is
engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park).
dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness
and even death. Never run the
engine in an enclosed area
that has no fresh air ventilation.
For more information, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑26.
.
Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
.
Have the vehicle repaired
immediately.
Never park the vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed
area such as a garage or a
building that has no fresh air
ventilation.
Follow the proper steps to be
sure the vehicle will not move.
See Shifting Into Park (Automatic
Transmission) on page 9‑24.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-28
Driving and Operating
from P (Park) when the vehicle is
running. If you cannot shift out of
P (Park), ease pressure on the shift
lever and push the shift lever all the
way into P (Park) as you maintain
brake application. Then press the
shift lever button and move the shift
lever into another gear. See Shifting
Out of Park on page 9‑25.
Automatic
Transmission
WARNING
{
It is dangerous to get out of the
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when
the engine is running unless
you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park).
See Shifting Into Park (Automatic
Transmission) on page 9‑24.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to
back up.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)
while the vehicle is moving
forward could damage the
transmission. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse)
only after the vehicle is stopped.
There are several different positions
for the shift lever.
P (Park): This position locks the
rear wheels. It is the best position
to use when starting the engine
because the vehicle cannot move
easily.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to
get out of snow, ice, or sand without
damaging the transmission, see If
the Vehicle is Stuck on page 9‑13.
Be sure the shift lever is fully in
P (Park) before starting the engine.
The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control
system. You have to fully apply the
brakes and then press the shift
lever button before you can shift
N (Neutral): In this position, the
engine does not connect with the
wheels. To restart the engine when
the vehicle is already moving, use
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-29
N (Neutral) only. If the vehicle needs
towing, see Towing the Vehicle on
page 10‑86.
power for passing, push the pedal
down to achieve the desired level
of acceleration.
Downshifting the transmission in
slippery road conditions could result
in skidding. See “Skidding” under
Loss of Control on page 9‑6.
WARNING
{
Shifting into a drive gear while the
engine is running at high speed is
dangerous. Unless your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could move very rapidly.
You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift
into a drive gear while the engine
is running at high speed.
S (Sport Mode): When in
S (Sport Mode), the transmission
will work as an automatic until
you use the Manual Paddle Shift
Controls, which activates driver
manual gear selection. See “Manual
Paddle Shift” in this section. While
in S (Sport Mode), the transmission
will have more noticeable upshifts
for sportier vehicle performance.
The Manual Paddle Shift system
is activated from S (Sport Mode)
by pushing the paddle, above the
steering wheel spokes, to up-shift
to the next gear, or pulling on the
paddle, behind the steering wheel
spokes, to down-shift to the
next gear.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park)
or N (Neutral) with the engine
running at high speed may
Manual Mode
damage the transmission.
Manual Paddle Shift
When accelerating the vehicle from
a stop in snowy and icy conditions,
you may want to shift to 2 (Second)
or 3 (Third) gear. A higher gear
allows you to gain more traction on
slippery surfaces. If traction control
is active, upshifts are delayed to
increase your control of the vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Be sure
the engine is not running at high
speed when shifting the vehicle.
While in S (Sport Mode), the paddles
located on the steering wheel can
be used to manually up-shift or
down-shift the transmission.
D (Drive): This position is for
normal driving. It provides the best
fuel economy. If you need more
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-30
Driving and Operating
See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 9‑36 Traction Control
System (TCS).
will select 2 (Second) gear as the
vehicle stops. From a stop, the
vehicle will start from and hold
2 (Second) gear unless the driver
manually paddle shifts into a
different gear or selects D (Drive).
The driver can select 1 (First) gear
for maximum acceleration from
a stop.
The Manual Paddle Shift system
will not allow either an up-shift or a
down-shift if the vehicle speed is too
fast or too slow, nor will it allow a
start from 4 (Fourth) or higher gear.
The Manual Paddle Shift system
can be deactivated by moving the
shifter from S (Sport Mode) back to
D (Drive), or by holding either
up‐shift button for more than
one second.
If up-shifting does not occur when
needed, vehicle speed will be
limited to protect the engine.
When the transmission gear does
not respond to a shift change, the
DIC will show an X over the gear
display.
The driver may choose to briefly
activate the Manual Paddle Shift
system while in D (Drive). Tapping
either the upshift or downshift
controls will place the transmission
in Manual Paddle Shift mode. The
driver may then exit Manual Paddle
Shift mode by holding either upshift
control for two seconds. The system
will return to automatic shifting after
10 seconds of cruising at a steady
speed, or when the vehicle comes
to a stop.
When using the Manual Paddle
Shift feature while in S (Sport Mode),
the current gear will be displayed in
the Driver Information (DIC), or the
Head-Up Display (HUD), if the
When a requested shift is denied
due to the speed restrictions shown,
the DIC will momentarily show an X
over the gear display and a chime
will sound.
vehicle has either of these features.
If the vehicle has a Navigation
system, see “Head-Up
Display (HUD)” in the Index
of the navigation manual.
While the Manual Paddle Shift
gear selection system is active,
the transmission will automatically
downshift through the gears as the
vehicle slows. The transmission
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-31
If the vehicle has a HUD, and the
transmission gear does not respond
to a shift change, a chime will sound
and the HUD will momentarily show
an X over the gear display.
To prevent damage to the
To prevent damage to the
powertrain, Manual Paddle
powertrain, Manual Paddle
downshifts to a lower gear cannot
be done above certain speeds.
The maximum speed allowed for
downshifting of gears 1 (First)
through 4 (Fourth) are:
downshifts to a lower gear cannot
be done above certain speeds.
The maximum speed allowed for
downshifting of gears 1 (First)
through 4 (Fourth) are:
Manual Paddle Shift operation
is available for use with Cruise
Control. See Cruise Control on
page 9‑44 Cruise Control for more
information.
.
.
Into 4 (Fourth) gear over
Into 4 (Fourth) gear over
250 km/h (155 mph)
234 km/h (145 mph)
.
.
Into 3 (Third) gear over
Into 3 (Third) gear over
The vehicle speeds required for
Manual Paddle Shift up-shifts
depend on several vehicle inputs,
which will vary the allowed up-shift
speed by a few km/h (mph).
188 km/h (117 mph)
176 km/h (109 mph)
.
.
Into 2 (Second) gear over
120 km/h (75 mph)
Into 2 (Second) gear over
113 km/h (70 mph)
.
.
Into 1 (First) gear over
68 km/h (42 mph).
Into 1 (First) gear over
64 km/h (40 mph).
For vehicles with a 2.56:1 Axle
Ratio (RPO GM8)
If the driver does not request
an upshift as the engine speed
approaches fuel shut off RPM,
the engine speed will be limited to
protect the engine. See Tachometer
on page 5‑11 Tachometer for more
information.
For vehicles with a 2.73:1 Axle
Ratio (RPO GU2)
.
Up-shifts to 4 (Fourth) gear
.
Up-shifts to 4 (Fourth) gear
require approximately 31 km/h
(19 mph).
require approximately 35 km/h
(22 mph).
.
Up-shifts to 5 (Fifth) gear require
.
Up-shifts to 5 (Fifth) gear require
approximately 39 km/h (24 mph).
approximately 45 km/h (28 mph).
.
Up-shifts to 6 (Sixth) gear
.
Up-shifts to 6 (Sixth) gear
require approximately
57 km/h (35 mph).
require approximately 65 km/h
(41 mph).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-32
Driving and Operating
You can shift into 1 (First) when
you are going less than 64 km/h
(40 mph). If you come to a complete
stop and it is hard to shift into
1 (First), put the shift lever in Neutral
and let up on the clutch. Press the
clutch pedal back down. Then shift
into 1 (First).
Neutral: Use this position
when you start or idle the engine.
The shift lever is in Neutral when
it is centered in the shift pattern,
not in any gear.
Manual Transmission
R (Reverse): To back up, press
down the clutch pedal and shift into
R (Reverse). Just apply pressure
to get the lever past 5 (Fifth) and
6 (Sixth) into R (Reverse). Let up
on the clutch pedal slowly while
pressing the accelerator pedal.
2 (Second): Press the clutch pedal
as you let up on the accelerator
pedal and shift into 2 (Second).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch
pedal as you press the accelerator
pedal.
The six-speed manual transmission
has a feature that allows you
This is the shift pattern for the
six-speed manual transmission.
3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth)
to safely shift into R (Reverse)
while the vehicle is rolling at less
than 5 km/h (3 mph). You will be
locked out if you try to shift into
R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving faster than 5 km/h (3 mph).
and 6 (Sixth): Shift into 3 (Third),
4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth) and 6 (Sixth) the
same way you do for 2 (Second).
Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as
you press the accelerator pedal.
Here is how to operate the
transmission:
1 (First): Press the clutch pedal
and shift into 1 (First). Then slowly
let up on the clutch pedal as you
press the accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator
pedal and press the brake pedal.
Just before the vehicle stops, press
the clutch pedal and the brake
pedal, and shift to Neutral.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-33
Shift Speeds
(Manual Transmission)
Manual Transmission Recommended
Shift Speeds in km/h (mph)
Acceleration Shift Speed
WARNING
{
Engine
1 to 2
2 to 3
3 to 4
4 to 5
5 to 6
80 (50)
If you skip a gear when you
downshift, you could lose control
of the vehicle. You could injure
yourself or others. Do not shift
down more than one gear at a
time when you downshift.
All Engines
24 (15)
40 (25)
64 (40)
72 (45)
If the engine speed drops below
900 rpm, or if the engine is not
running smoothly, you should
downshift to the next lower gear.
You may have to downshift two
or more gears to keep the engine
running smoothly or for good engine
performance.
One to Four Shift Light
(Manual Transmission)
This chart shows when to shift to
the next higher gear for the best fuel
economy.
Notice: When shifting gears, do
not move the shift lever around
unnecessarily. This may damage
the transmission. Shift directly
into the next gear.
When this light comes on, you can
only shift from 1 (First) to 4 (Fourth)
instead of 1 (First) to 2 (Second).
See One-to-Four Shift Light (Manual
Transmission) on page 5‑22 for
more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-34
Driving and Operating
The six-speed transmission has
a spring that centers the shift
lever near 3 (Third) and 4 (Fourth).
This spring helps you know which
gear you are in when you are
shifting. Be careful when shifting
from 1 (First) to 2 (Second) or
downshifting from 6 (Sixth) to
5 (Fifth). The spring will try to pull
the shift lever toward 4 (Fourth) and
3 (Third). Make sure you move the
lever into 2 (Second) or 5 (Fifth).
If you let the shift lever move in the
direction of the pulling, you may end
up shifting from 1 (First) to 4 (Fourth)
or from 6 (Sixth) to 3 (Third).
Downshifting
(Manual Transmission)
Brakes
Do not downshift into the gear
shown below at a speed greater
than shown in the table:
Antilock Brake
System (ABS)
This vehicle has the Antilock
Brake System (ABS), an advanced
electronic braking system that helps
prevent a braking skid.
1 (First)
80 km/h (50 mph)
119 km/h (74 mph)
2 (Second)
163 km/h
(101 mph)
3 (Third)
When the engine is started and
the vehicle begins to drive away,
ABS checks itself. A momentary
motor or clicking noise might be
heard while this test is going on,
and it might even be noticed that
the brake pedal moves a little.
This is normal.
209 km/h
(130 mph)
4 (Fourth)
Notice: If you skip more than one
gear when you downshift, or if
you race the engine when you
release the clutch pedal while
downshifting, you could damage
the engine, clutch, driveshaft or
the transmission. Do not skip
gears or race the engine when
downshifting.
If there is a problem with ABS, this
warning light stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
on page 5‑22.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
Parking Brake
9-35
If driving safely on a wet road
and it becomes necessary to slam
on the brakes and continue braking
to avoid a sudden obstacle, a
computer senses that the wheels
are slowing down. If one of the
wheels is about to stop rolling,
the computer will separately work
the brakes at each wheel.
stopping distance. If you get too
close to the vehicle in front of you,
there will not be enough time to
apply the brakes if that vehicle
suddenly slows or stops. Always
leave enough room up ahead to
stop, even with ABS.
The parking brake lever is located to
the right of the center console.
To set the parking brake, hold the
brake pedal down. Pull the parking
brake lever up. If the ignition is on,
the brake system warning light will
come on.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
the brake pedal down firmly and let
ABS work. You might hear the ABS
pump or motor operating and feel
the brake pedal pulsate, but this is
normal.
ABS can change the brake pressure
to each wheel, as required, faster
than any driver could. This can help
the driver steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
To release the parking brake, hold
the brake pedal down. Then push
the release button in as you move
the parking brake lever all the
way down.
As the brakes are applied, the
computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls
braking pressure accordingly.
Notice: Driving with the parking
brake on can overheat the brake
system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system
parts. Make sure that the parking
brake is fully released and the
brake warning light is off before
driving.
Braking in Emergencies
ABS allows the driver to steer and
brake at the same time. In many
emergencies, steering can help
more than even the very best
braking.
Remember: ABS does not change
the time needed to get a foot up to
the brake pedal or always decrease
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-36
Driving and Operating
If cruise control is being used when
TCS begins to limit wheel spin, the
cruise control will automatically
disengage. Cruise control may be
reengaged when road conditions
allow. See Cruise Control on
page 9‑44.
Brake Assist
Ride Control Systems
This vehicle has a brake assist
feature designed to assist the
driver in stopping or decreasing
vehicle speed in emergency driving
conditions. This feature uses the
stability system hydraulic brake
control module to supplement
the power brake system under
conditions where the driver has
quickly and forcefully applied the
brake pedal in an attempt to quickly
stop or slow down the vehicle.
The stability system hydraulic brake
control module increases brake
pressure at each corner of the
vehicle until the ABS activates.
Minor brake pedal pulsation or
pedal movement during this time
is normal and the driver should
continue to apply the brake pedal
as the driving situation dictates.
The brake assist feature will
automatically disengage when
the brake pedal is released or
brake pedal pressure is quickly
decreased.
Traction Control
System (TCS)
The vehicle has a Traction Control
System (TCS) that limits wheel spin.
This is especially useful in slippery
road conditions. The system
operates only if it senses that the
rear wheels are spinning too much
or are beginning to lose traction.
When this happens, the system
works the rear brakes and reduces
engine power (by closing the throttle
and managing engine spark) to limit
wheel spin.
The SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM
message and the TCS warning light
will come on if there is a problem
with TCS. See Ride Control System
Messages on page 5‑44.
The TRACTION SYSTEM ACTIVE
message displays on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) when TCS
is limiting wheel spin. See Ride
Control System Messages on
page 5‑44. The system may be
heard or felt while it is working,
but this is normal.
When this light and the SERVICE
TRACTION SYSTEM message
are on, the system will not limit
wheel spin. Adjust your driving
accordingly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-37
TCS automatically comes on
whenever the vehicle is started.
To limit wheel spin, especially in
slippery road conditions, the system
should always be left on. TCS can
be turned off if needed.
shift with the drive wheels
The ACTIVE HANDLING message
will come on when the system is
operating. See Ride Control System
Messages on page 5‑44 for more
information. The system may be
heard or felt while it is working.
This is normal.
spinning with a loss of traction, it
is possible to cause damage to
the transmission. Do not attempt
to shift when the drive wheels do
not have traction. Damage caused
by misuse of the vehicle is not
covered. See the warranty book
for additional information.
Adding non‐dealer/non-retailer
accessories can affect the vehicle's
performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 10‑4 for more
information.
To turn the system off, press the
button located on the console.
The SERVICE ACTIVE HANDLING
SYSTEM message is displayed, the
instrument cluster light comes on,
and a sound is heard if there is a
problem with the system.
The system can be turned on or off
at any time by pressing the ACTIVE
HANDLING button. The DIC will
display the appropriate message
when the button is pushed.
Active Handling System
The Active Handling System is
a computer controlled system
that helps the driver maintain
directional control of the vehicle
in difficult driving conditions.
This is accomplished by selectively
applying any one of the vehicle's
brakes.
See Ride Control System Messages
on page 5‑44 for more information.
Notice: When traction control is
turned off, or Competitive Driving
Mode is active, it is possible to
lose traction. If you attempt to
When this light and the SERVICE
ACTIVE HANDLING SYSTEM
message are on, the system is not
operational. Adjust your driving
accordingly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-38
Driving and Operating
The Active Handling System comes
on automatically whenever the
vehicle is started. To help maintain
directional control of the vehicle,
the system should always be left
on. The system can be turned off
if needed. If the Active Handling
System is turned off, the Traction
Control System will also be turned
off. Adjust your driving accordingly.
If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
system detects a flat tire and the
Driver Information Center (DIC)
displays TIRE FLAT, or if the
TPM system is malfunctioning and
the DIC displays SERVICE TIRE
MONITOR, the Active Handling
System will be affected as follows:
Competitive Driving Mode
Competitive Driving Mode,
Performance Traction Management,
and Launch Control are systems
designed to allow increased
performance while accelerating
and/or cornering. This is
accomplished by regulating and
optimizing the engine, brakes,
and suspension performance.
These modes are for use at a
closed course race track and are
not intended for use on public
roads. They will not compensate
for a driver’s inexperience or lack
of familiarity with the race track.
Drivers who prefer to allow the
system to have more control of
the engine, brake, and suspension
are advised to turn the normal
traction control and active handling
systems on. See Racing or Other
Competitive Driving on page 9‑7
for more information.
.
The Active Handling System
cannot be turned off by the
driver.
.
If the Active Handling System
is off, it will be turned on
automatically.
.
Competitive Driving Mode
or Performance Traction
Management is unavailable.
To turn the system off, press the
Active Handling button on the
console until TRACTION SYSTEM
AND ACTIVE HANDLING
.
The Active Handling System
will feel different in aiding and
maintaining directional control.
SYSTEM — OFF is displayed.
The system can be turned back on
at any time by pressing the button.
The DIC will display the appropriate
message when the button is
pushed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-39
Notice: Do not attempt to shift
when the drive wheels are
spinning and do not have
traction. This may cause damage
to the transmission. Damage
caused by misuse of the vehicle
is not covered by the vehicle
warranty. See the warranty book
for additional information.
Performance Traction
Management (ZR1)
Performance Traction Management
integrates the Traction Control,
Active Handling and Selective
Ride Control systems to provide
improved and consistent
performance when cornering.
The amount of available engine
power is based on the mode
selected, track conditions, driver
skill, and the radius of each corner.
This light is on when the vehicle is
in the Competitive Driving Mode.
This optional handling mode can be
selected by pressing the ACTIVE
HANDLING button on the console
quickly two times. COMPETITIVE
DRIVING MODE displays in the
Driver Information Center (DIC).
See Ride Control System Messages
on page 5‑44 for more information.
Competitive Driving Mode
(Except ZR1)
Competitive Driving Mode allows
full engine power while the Active
Handling System helps maintain
directional control of the vehicle
by selective brake application.
In this mode, TCS is off and
Launch Control is available.
Adjust your driving style to account
for the available engine power.
See Launch Control later in this
section.
When the ACTIVE HANDLING
button is pressed again, the Active
Handling and TCS systems are on.
The TRACTION SYSTEM AND
ACTIVE HANDLING-ON message
displays briefly in the DIC and a
chime is heard.
This light is on when the vehicle
is in the Performance Traction
Management Mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-40
Driving and Operating
This optional handling mode
The following is a DIC display
description and the recommended
usage of each mode:
can be selected by pressing the
ACTIVE HANDLING button on the
console quickly two times. PERF
TRAC 1 - WET ACTIVE HANDLING
ON displays in the DIC.
PERF TRAC 1 – WET ACTIVE
HANDLING ON
.
Intended for all driver skill levels
To experience the performance
benefit of this system, after entering
a curve and at the point where
the driver would normally start
to increase acceleration, the
accelerator pedal can be fully
pressed. The Performance Traction
Management system will modify the
level of engine power for a smooth
and consistent corner exit.
.
Wet or damp conditions
only — not intended for use in
heavy rain or standing water
.
Active Handling is on and engine
power is reduced based on
conditions
To select a mode while in
Performance Traction Management,
turn the knob located on the
console.
PERF TRAC 2 – DRY ACTIVE
HANDLING ON
The Performance Traction
.
For use by less experienced
drivers or while learning a new
track
Management system contains
five modes. These modes are
selected by turning the Selective
Ride Control/Performance Traction
Management knob on the center
console. The driver scrolls up
or down through modes 1–5 by
rotating the knob to the right or left.
.
Dry conditions only
.
Active Handling is on and engine
power is slightly reduced
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
Launch Control
9-41
PERF TRAC 3 – SPORT
ACTIVE HANDLING ON
PERF TRAC 5 – RACE ACTIVE
HANDLING OFF
A Launch Control feature is
available, within Competitive
Driving Mode (except ZR1) or
.
.
For use by drivers who are
For use by experienced drivers
familiar with the track
who are familiar with the track
Performance Traction Management
(ZR1), on vehicles with a manual
transmission to allow the driver
to achieve high levels of vehicle
acceleration in a straight line.
Launch Control is a form of traction
control that manages tire spin
while launching the vehicle. This
feature is intended for use during
closed course race events where
consistent zero to sixty and quarter
mile times are desirable.
.
.
Dry conditions only
Dry conditions only
.
.
Requires more driving skill than
mode 2
Requires more driving skill than
in other modes
.
.
Active Handling is on and more
engine power is available than in
mode 2
Active Handling is off and engine
power is available for maximum
cornering speed
Press and release the ACTIVE
HANDLING button to turn off
Performance Traction Management
and return to the Active Handling
and Traction Control Systems.
The TRACTION SYSTEM AND
ACTIVE HANDLING-ON message
displays briefly in the DIC and a
chime is heard.
PERF TRAC 4 – SPORT
ACTIVE HANDLING OFF
.
For use by drivers who are
familiar with the track
.
Dry conditions only
.
Requires more driving skill than
modes 2 or 3
.
Active Handling is off and
available engine power is the
same as mode 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-42
Driving and Operating
Launch Control is only available
when the following criteria are met:
accelerator pedal to wide open
throttle. A smooth, quick release of
the clutch, while maintaining the
fully pressed accelerator pedal, will
manage wheel slip. Complete
shifts as described in Manual
Transmission on page 9‑32.
Limited-Slip Rear Axle
Vehicles with a limited-slip rear axle
can give more traction on snow,
mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works
like a standard axle most of the
time, but when traction is low,
this feature allows the drive wheel
with the most traction to move the
vehicle.
.
Competitive Driving Mode is
selected (except ZR1) or any
of the Performance Traction
Management modes are
selected (ZR1). The TCS
light comes on the instrument
panel and the appropriate
DIC message displays.
After the vehicle is launched, the
system continues in Competitive
Mode (except ZR1) or Performance
Traction Management (ZR1).
.
The vehicle is not moving.
Selective Ride Control
Competitive Driving Mode,
.
The steering wheel is pointing
The vehicle may have a ride control
system called Magnetic Selective
Ride Control. The system provides
the following performance benefits:
Performance Traction Management,
and Launch Control are systems
designed for a closed course race
track and not intended for use on
public roads. The systems are not
intended to compensate for lack of
driver experience or familiarity with
the race track.
straight.
.
The clutch is pressed and the
vehicle is in first gear.
.
Reduced Impact Harshness
.
The accelerator pedal is rapidly
.
applied to wide open throttle.
Improved Road Isolation
.
The Launch Control feature will
initially limit engine speed as
the driver rapidly applies the
Improved High-Speed Stability
.
Improved Handling Response
.
Better Control of Body Ride
Motions
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
ZR1
9-43
The setting can be changed
at any time. Based on road
Except ZR1
conditions, steering wheel angle
and the vehicle speed, the system
automatically adjusts to provide
the best handling while providing
a smooth ride. The Tour and Sport
modes will feel similar on a smooth
road. Select a new setting whenever
driving conditions change.
Three Driver Information
Center (DIC) messages (SERVICE
RIDE CONTROL, SHOCKS
INOPERATIVE and MAXIMUM
SPEED 80 MPH (129 KM/H) display
when a malfunction occurs with
the Selective Ride Control system.
Refer to Ride Control System
Messages on page 5‑44 for more
information.
This knob is located on the center
console. Turn it to select the
suspension of your choice.
This knob is located on the
center console. Turn it to select
the suspension of your choice.
The knob will return to the center
position when released. The switch
will illuminate the current
TOUR: Use for normal city and
highway driving. This setting
provides a smooth, soft ride.
suspension setting.
SPORT: Use where road conditions
or personal preference demand
more control. This setting provides
more “feel”, or response to the road
conditions.
TOUR: Use for normal city and
highway driving. This setting
provides a smooth, soft ride.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-44
Driving and Operating
SPORT: Use where road conditions
or personal preference demand
more control. This setting provides
more “feel”, or response to the road
conditions.
When this mode is selected,
turning the Selective Ride knob
will change the Performance
Traction Management mode
and the suspension setting
will be determined automatically.
See Competitive Driving Mode on
page 9‑38 for more information.
Cruise Control
With cruise control, a speed of
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more can
be maintained without keeping your
foot on the accelerator. Cruise
control does not work at speeds
below about 40 km/h (25 mph).
The setting can be changed
at any time. Based on road
conditions, steering wheel angle
and the vehicle speed, the system
automatically adjusts to provide
the best handling while providing a
smooth ride. The Tour and Sport
modes will feel similar on a smooth
road. Select a new setting whenever
driving conditions change.
Cruise control will not work if the
parking brake is set, or if the master
cylinder brake fluid level is low.
Three Driver Information Center
(DIC) messages (SERVICE
RIDE CONTROL, SHOCKS
INOPERATIVE and MAXIMUM
SPEED 80 MPH (129 KM/H) display
when a malfunction occurs with
the Selective Ride Control system.
Refer to Ride Control System
Messages on page 5‑44 for more
information.
WARNING
{
Cruise control can be dangerous
where you cannot drive safely at
a steady speed. So, do not use
the cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
The Selective Ride knob will not
display the Tour or Sport setting
when the Performance Traction
Management mode is selected.
Cruise control can be dangerous
on slippery roads. On such roads,
fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use
cruise control on slippery roads.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-45
If the vehicle is in cruise control,
and has the Traction Control
System (TCS), and it begins to
limit wheel spin, the cruise control
automatically disengages. See
Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 9‑36. When road conditions
allow the cruise control to be safely
used again, it can be turned
back on.
Resuming a Set Speed
+ (Resume/Accelerate): Use to
make the vehicle accelerate or
resume a previously set speed.
If the cruise control is set at a
desired speed and then the brakes
are applied, the cruise control is
disengaged without erasing the set
speed from memory.
T (Set): Press this button at the
end of the lever to set the speed.
Setting Cruise Control
Once the vehicle speed reaches
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more,
move the cruise control switch
If the cruise button is on when not in
use, it could get bumped and go into
cruise when not desired. Keep the
cruise control switch off when cruise
is not being used.
briefly from R to S. The vehicles
returns to the previous set speed
and stays there.
1. Move the cruise control switch
to on.
If the switch is held at resume/
accelerate the vehicle keeps going
faster until the switch is released or
the brake is applied. Do not hold the
switch at resume/accelerate, unless
you want the vehicle to go faster.
2. Get up to the speed desired.
3. Press T at the end of the lever
and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
When the cruise control is engaged,
the CRUISE SET TO XX MPH
message displays on the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See
Cruise Control Messages on
page 5‑38.
The vehicle has cruise control.
9 (Off): Turns the system off.
R (On): Turns the system on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-46
Driving and Operating
Increasing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
Reducing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control works
on hills depends upon the vehicle
speed, load, and the steepness
of the hills. When going up steep
hills, you might want to step on
the accelerator pedal to maintain
the vehicle speed. When going
downhill, you might have to brake
or shift to a lower gear to keep the
vehicle's speed down. When the
brakes are applied the cruise control
is disengaged.
If the cruise control system is
already activated,
If the cruise control system is
already activated,
.
.
Use the accelerator pedal to get
Press and hold the set button
until the lower speed desired is
reached, then release it.
to the higher speed. Press J at
the end of the lever, then release
the button and the accelerator
pedal. If the accelerator pedal is
held longer than 60 seconds,
cruise control will turn off.
.
To slow down in small amounts,
briefly press J. Each time this
is done, the vehicle goes about
1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.
.
Move the cruise switch from R to
S. Hold it there until desired
speed is reached, and then
release the switch.
Passing Another Vehicle While
Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to
increase the vehicle speed. When
you take your foot off the pedal,
the vehicle will slow down to the
previous set cruise speed.
.
To increase the vehicle speed in
small amounts, move the switch
briefly to S. Each time this is
done, the vehicle goes about
1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-47
.
.
If driving in hilly terrain, cruise
control may not be able to
maintain vehicle speed if an
up-shift or down-shift is not
selected by the driver. While
driving on hilly terrain and cruise
control is active with a manual
paddle shift gear selection, the
driver must select the proper
gear for the terrain or select
D (Drive) on the gear range
selector for full automatic
To turn off the cruise control
system , move the cruise control
Cruise Control in Sport and
Manual Paddle Shift Gear
Selection
switch to 9.
When the vehicle is in S (Sport) and
the manual paddle shift controls
are not being used, cruise control
operates in the same manner as
D (Drive).
When cruise control is disengaged,
the CRUISE DISENGAGED
message displays on the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See
Cruise Control Messages on
page 5‑38.
When the vehicle is in S (Sport) and
the manual paddle shift controls are
being used, cruise control operates
as follows:
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed is
erased from memory by moving the
transmission operation.
.
If cruise control is active and
Ending Cruise Control
switch to 9 or if the ignition is
turned off.
a gear is selected with the
manual paddle shift controls,
the vehicle speed is maintained
in the driver selected gear and
will not automatically up-shift
or down-shift the transmission
while the driver’s gear selection
is active.
.
To disengage cruise control;
step lightly on the brake pedal.
If the vehicle has a manual
transmission, lightly tap the
clutch to end the cruise control
session.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-48
Driving and Operating
The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) on
page 12‑1.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel
is an important part of the proper
maintenance of this vehicle. To help
keep the engine clean and maintain
optimum vehicle performance, we
recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline.
Recommended Fuel
If the vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine
(VIN Code W), use premium
unleaded gasoline with a posted
octane rating of 91 or higher.
Look for the TOP TIER label on the
fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets
enhanced detergency standards
developed by auto companies. A list
of marketers providing TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline can be found at
www.toptiergas.com.
You can also use regular unleaded
gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher, but the vehicle's acceleration
could be slightly reduced, and a
slight audible knocking noise,
commonly referred to as spark
knock, might be heard. If the octane
is less than 87, a heavy knocking
noise might be heard when driving.
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated
at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. Otherwise, you could
damage the engine. If heavy
knocking is heard when using
gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher, the engine needs service.
The 8th digit of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) shows
the code letter or number that
identifies the vehicle's engine.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-49
If the vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine
(VIN Code T) or the 7.0L V8 engine
(VIN Code E), use premium
unleaded gasoline with a posted
octane rating of 91 or higher.
For best performance, use premium
unleaded gasoline with a posted
octane rating of 93. In an
emergency, you can use regular
unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating of 87 or higher. If 87 octane
fuel is used, do not perform any
aggressive driving maneuvers such
as wide open throttle applications.
You might also hear audible spark
knock during acceleration. Refill the
tank with premium fuel as soon as
possible to avoid damaging the
engine. If heavy knocking is heard
when using gasoline rated at
be affected. The malfunction
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline
indicator lamp could turn on and the
vehicle might fail a smog‐check test.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 5‑18. If this occurs, return to
your authorized dealer for diagnosis.
If it is determined that the condition
is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
should meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada.
Some gasolines contain an
octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
against the use of gasolines
containing MMT. See Fuel Additives
on page 9‑50 for additional
information.
Fuels in Foreign
Countries
If you plan on driving in another
country outside the United States or
Canada, the proper fuel might be
hard to find. Never use leaded
gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text
on fuel. Costly repairs caused by
use of improper fuel would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
California Fuel
Requirements
If the vehicle is certified to meet
California Emissions Standards,
it is designed to operate on fuels
that meet California specifications.
See the underhood emission control
label. If this fuel is not available in
states adopting California emissions
standards, the vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting
91 octane or higher, the engine
needs service.
To check the fuel availability, ask
an auto club, or contact a major oil
company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
federal specifications, but emission
control system performance might
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-50
Driving and Operating
For customers who do not use
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel
System Treatment PLUS, added
to the fuel tank at every engine oil
change, can help clean deposits
from fuel injectors and intake
valves. GM Fuel System Treatment
PLUS is the only gasoline additive
recommended by General Motors.
It is available at your dealer.
Notice: This vehicle was not
designed for fuel that contains
methanol. Do not use fuel
containing methanol. It can
corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic
and rubber parts. That damage
would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
Fuel Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines
in the United States are now
required to contain additives
that help prevent engine and fuel
system deposits from forming,
allowing the emission control
system to work properly. In most
cases, nothing should have to be
added to the fuel. However, some
gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet
U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency regulations. To help keep
fuel injectors and intake valves
clean, or if the vehicle experiences
problems due to dirty injectors or
valves, look for gasoline that is
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline. Look for the TOP TIER
label on the fuel pump to ensure
gasoline meets enhanced
Some gasolines that are
not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an
Gasolines containing oxygenates,
such as ethers and ethanol, and
reformulated gasolines might
be available in your area. We
recommend that you use these
gasolines, if they comply with the
specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
other fuels containing more than
10% ethanol must not be used in
vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant
where you buy gasoline whether the
fuel contains MMT. We recommend
against the use of such gasolines.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce
the life of spark plugs and the
performance of the emission
control system could be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp
might turn on. If this occurs, return
to your dealer for service.
detergency standards developed
by the auto companies. A list of
marketers providing TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline can be found
at www.toptiergas.com.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-51
Filling the Tank
WARNING
{
Fuel vapor burns violently and a
fuel fire can cause bad injuries.
To help avoid injuries to you and
others, read and follow all the
instructions on the fuel pump
island. Turn off the engine when
refueling. Do not smoke near
fuel or when refueling the vehicle.
Do not use cellular phones. Keep
sparks, flames, and smoking
materials away from fuel. Do not
leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is
against the law in some places.
Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away
from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located
behind a hinged fuel door on the
driver side of the vehicle.
The fuel door release button is
located on the instrument panel to
the left of the steering wheel. Push
the button to release the fuel door.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-52
Driving and Operating
nozzle. Clean fuel from painted
surfaces as soon as possible.
See “Washing the Vehicle” in
Exterior Care.
WARNING
{
Fuel can spray out on you if you
open the fuel cap too quickly.
If you spill fuel and then
something ignites it, you could
be badly burned. This spray can
happen if the tank is nearly full,
and is more likely in hot weather.
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait
for any hiss noise to stop. Then
unscrew the cap all the way.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it
clockwise until it clicks. Make sure
the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if
the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. This would
allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 5‑18.
There is also a manual fuel door
release tab. It is located against the
upper trim in the rear compartment
on the driver side of the vehicle. Pull
the tab to release the fuel door.
The CHECK GAS CAP message
displays on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is not
properly installed. See Fuel System
Messages on page 5‑41 for more
information.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not
top off or overfill the tank and wait a
few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the
To remove the fuel cap, turn it
slowly counterclockwise.
While refueling, let the cap hang by
the tether below the fuel fill opening.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-53
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container
WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
{
If a fire starts while you are
refueling, do not remove the
nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel
by shutting off the pump or by
notifying the station attendant.
Leave the area immediately.
.
Bring the fill nozzle in contact
with the inside of the fill
opening before operating the
nozzle. Contact should be
maintained until the filling is
complete.
WARNING
{
Never fill a portable fuel container
while it is in the vehicle. Static
electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel
vapor. You can be badly burned
and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
.
.
Do not smoke while
pumping fuel.
Notice: If you need a new fuel
cap, be sure to get the right type.
Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may
not fit properly. This may cause
the malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage the fuel
tank and emissions system. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 5‑18.
Do not use a cellular phone
while pumping fuel.
.
Dispense fuel only into
approved containers.
.
Do not fill a container while
it is inside a vehicle, in a
vehicle's trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than
the ground.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-54
Driving and Operating
Add-on equipment can drain the
vehicle 12‐volt battery, even if the
vehicle is not operating.
Towing
Conversions and
Add-Ons
General Towing
Information
The vehicle is neither designed nor
intended to tow a trailer.
The vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to add anything
electrical to the vehicle, see
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3‑34 and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3‑35.
Add-On Electrical
Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything
electrical to the vehicle unless
you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can
damage the vehicle and the
damage would not be covered
by the vehicle's warranty. Some
add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from
working as they should.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-1
Manual Transmission
Park Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-45
Wiper Blade
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Windshield Replacement . . . 10-47
Vehicle Care
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-24
Cooling System (Engine) . . . 10-28
Cooling System
(Intercooler) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-34
Overheated Engine
General Information
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
California Proposition
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3
Accessories and
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Bulb Replacement
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
High Intensity Discharge
Protection
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Lifting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-36
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-44
Automatic Transmission Shift
Lock Control Function
(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Headlamps, Front Turn
Signal and Parking
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and
Stoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Vehicle Checks
Doing Your Own
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Engine Compartment
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-22
Automatic Transmission
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-2
Vehicle Care
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
Tire Pressure for High-Speed
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67
Tire Pressure Monitor
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Different Size Tires and
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-78
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
Electrical System
Jump Starting
Electrical System
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Engine Compartment Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Instrument Panel Fuse
Towing
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-86
Recreational Vehicle
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
Appearance Care
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93
Wheels and Tires
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Run-Flat Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-61
Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Tire Terminology and
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-3
California Proposition
65 Warning
California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements
General Information
For service and parts needs,
visit your dealer. You will receive
genuine GM parts and GM-trained
and supported service people.
Most motor vehicles, including this
one, contain and/or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. Engine
exhaust, many parts and systems,
many fluids, and some component
wear by-products contain and/or
emit these chemicals.
Certain types of automotive
applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners,
and lithium batteries contained
in remote keyless transmitters,
may contain perchlorate materials.
Special handling may be necessary.
For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
Genuine GM parts have one of
these marks:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-4
Vehicle Care
Damage to vehicle components
resulting from the installation or use
of non‐GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, is not
covered under the terms of the
vehicle warranty and may affect
remaining warranty coverage for
affected parts.
When you go to your GM dealer
and ask for GM Accessories,
you will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will
perform the work using genuine
GM Accessories.
Accessories and
Modifications
Adding non‐dealer accessories
to the vehicle can affect vehicle
performance and safety, including
such things as airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling,
emissions systems, aerodynamics,
durability, and electronic systems
like antilock brakes, traction control,
and stability control. Some of
these accessories could even
cause malfunction or damage not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Also, see Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 3‑35.
GM Accessories are designed to
complement and function with other
systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer can accessorize the vehicle
using genuine GM Accessories.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-5
Notice: Lifting your vehicle
improperly can damage your
vehicle and result in costly
repairs not covered by your
warranty. To lift your vehicle
properly, follow the advice in
this part.
Lifting the Vehicle
WARNING
{
WARNING
Getting under a vehicle when it is
jacked up is dangerous. If the
vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed.
Never get under a vehicle when
it is supported only by a jack.
{
Lifting a vehicle can cause an
injury. The vehicle can slip off the
jack and roll over you or other
people. You and they could be
badly injured. Find a level place
to lift your vehicle. To help
To help prevent vehicle damage:
.
Be sure to place a block or
pad between the jack and the
vehicle.
prevent the vehicle from moving:
WARNING
{
.
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
Make sure the jack you are
using spans at least two
crossmember ribs.
Raising the vehicle with the
jack improperly positioned can
damage the vehicle or the vehicle
may fall and cause your or others
injury.
2. Put an automatic
transmission shift lever in
P (Park), or shift a manual
transmission to 1 (First) or
R (Reverse).
.
Lift only in the areas shown
in the following pictures.
For additional information, see
your dealer and the Chevrolet
Corvette service manual.
3. Turn off the engine.
If you ever use a jack to lift your
vehicle, follow the instructions that
came with the jack, and be sure to
use the correct lifting points to avoid
damaging your vehicle.
To be even more certain the
vehicle won't move, you can put
blocks in front of and behind the
wheels.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-6
Vehicle Care
Lifting From the Front
1. Locate the front lifting points (A),
according to the illustration
shown.
3. Lift the vehicle with the jack,
making sure the jack spans at
least two of the crossmember
ribs (B).
The front lifting points can be
accessed from either side of your
vehicle, behind the front tires.
2. Be sure to place a block or pad
between the jack and the
vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-7
Lifting From the Rear
1. Locate the rear lifting points (A),
according to the illustration
shown.
3. Lift the vehicle with the jack,
making sure the jack spans at
least two of the crossmember
ribs (B).
The rear lifting points can be
accessed from the rear of the
vehicle, on either the driver's or
passenger's side.
2. Be sure to place a block or
pad between the jack and the
vehicle.
For more information, see Doing
Your Own Service Work on
page 10‑8.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-8
Vehicle Care
This vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to do your own
service work, see Servicing the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 3‑34.
Vehicle Checks
WARNING (Continued)
Doing Your Own
Service Work
.
Be sure to use the proper
nuts, bolts, and other
fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily
confused. If the wrong
fasteners are used, parts
can later break or fall off.
You could be hurt.
Keep a record with all parts receipts
and list the mileage and the date of
any service work performed. See
Maintenance Records on page 11‑9.
WARNING
{
You can be injured and the
vehicle could be damaged if you
try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
.
Be sure you have sufficient
If doing some of your own service
work, use the proper service
manual. It tells you much more
about how to service the vehicle
than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information
on page 13‑15.
knowledge, experience,
the proper replacement
parts, and tools before
attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-9
Hood
To open the hood:
1. Pull the hood release lever with
this symbol on it. It is located
inside the vehicle below the
instrument panel on the
driver side.
2. Go to the side of the vehicle and
pull up on the rear edge of the
hood, near the windshield.
Before closing the hood, be sure
all the filler caps are on properly.
Then, just pull the hood down and
close it firmly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-10
Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview
6.2 L LS3 V8 Engine (Without dry sump engine oil tank)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-11
A. Clutch Master Cylinder
Reservoir (If Equipped).
See Hydraulic Clutch on
page 10‑24.
G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When
to Add Engine Oil” under Brake
Fluid on page 10‑41.
H. Engine Oil Dipstick. See
“Checking Engine Oil” under
Engine Oil on page 10‑15.
B. Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir. See “Adding Washer
Fluid” under Washer Fluid on
page 10‑37.
I. Engine Compartment Fuse
Block on page 10‑52.
C. Brake Fluid Reservoir.
See “Brake Fluid” under
Brakes on page 10‑38.
J. Passenger Compartment
Air Filter (Out of View). See
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter on page 8‑7.
D. Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap. See Engine
Coolant on page 10‑29.
K. Battery on page 10‑43.
If the vehicle has the 6.2 L LS3
V8 engine (without the dry sump
engine oil tank) and you are facing
the front of the vehicle.
E. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 10‑24.
F. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir.
See Power Steering Fluid on
page 10‑36.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-12
Vehicle Care
6.2 L LS9 V8 Engine
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-13
A. Intercooler. See Cooling System
(Engine) on page 10‑28 or
Cooling System (Intercooler) on
page 10‑29.
H. Passenger Compartment
Air Filter (Out of View).
See Passenger Compartment
Air Filter on page 8‑7.
B. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 10‑24.
I. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When
to Add Engine Oil” under
Engine Oil on page 10‑15.
C. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
and Cap. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 10‑36.
J. Dry Sump Engine Oil Tank.
See “Changing Engine Oil
and Filter” Brake Fluid on
page 10‑41.
D. Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap. See Engine
Coolant on page 10‑29.
K. Engine Oil Dipstick. See
“Checking Engine Oil” under
Engine Oil on page 10‑15.
E. Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir. See “Adding Washer
Fluid” under Washer Fluid on
page 10‑37.
L. Remote Positive (+) Terminal
(Out of View). See Jump
Starting on page 10‑82.
F. Clutch Master Cylinder
Reservoir (If Equipped).
See Hydraulic Clutch on
page 10‑24.
M. Engine Compartment Fuse
Block on page 10‑52.
If the vehicle has the 6.2 L LS9
Supercharged V8 engine and you
are facing the front of the vehicle.
G. Brake Fluid Reservoir.
See “Brake Fluid” under
Brakes on page 10‑38.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-14
Vehicle Care
6.2 L LS3 V8 Engine (With dry sump engine oil tank) or 7.0 L LS7 V8 Engine
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
Engine Oil
10-15
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 10‑24.
H. Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap. See Engine
Coolant on page 10‑29.
To ensure proper engine
B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir.
See Power Steering Fluid on
page 10‑36.
performance and long life,
careful attention must be paid
to engine oil. Following these
simple, but important steps will
help protect your investment:
I. Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir. See “Adding Washer
Fluid” under Washer Fluid on
page 10‑37.
C. Engine Compartment Fuse
Block on page 10‑52.
J. Brake Fluid Reservoir.
See “Brake Fluid” under
Brake Fluid on page 10‑41.
.
Always use engine oil approved
D. Remote Positive (+) Terminal
(Out of View). See Jump
to the proper specification and
of the proper viscosity grade.
See “Selecting the Right
Engine Oil.”
Starting on page 10‑82.
K. Clutch Master Cylinder
Reservoir. See Hydraulic
Clutch on page 10‑24.
E. Engine Oil Dipstick. See
“Checking Engine Oil” under
Engine Oil on page 10‑15.
.
Check the engine oil level
regularly and maintain the
proper oil level. See “Checking
Engine Oil” and “When to Add
Engine Oil.”
If the vehicle has the 6.2 L LS3
V8 engine with the manual
transmission (with the dry sump
engine oil tank) or the 7.0 L LS7
V8 engine and you are facing the
driver side of the vehicle.
F. Dry Sump Engine Oil Tank. See
“Changing Engine Oil and Filter”
Engine Oil on page 10‑15.
G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When
to Add Engine Oil” under
.
Change the engine oil at the
appropriate time. See Engine Oil
Life System on page 10‑22.
Engine Oil on page 10‑15.
.
Always dispose of engine oil
properly. See “What to Do With
Used Oil.”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-16
Vehicle Care
Obtaining an accurate oil level
reading is essential:
Checking Engine Oil (Except
ZO6, ZR1, and Grand Sport)
When to Add Engine Oil
(Except ZO6, ZR1, and Grand
Sport)
1. If the engine has been running
recently, turn off the engine and
allow several minutes for the oil
to drain back into the oil pan.
Checking your oil level too soon
after engine shut off will not
provide an accurate oil level
reading.
If the CHECK OIL LEVEL message
displays on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), check the engine
oil level right away. For more
information, see Engine Oil
Messages on page 5‑40. Check
the engine oil level regularly;
this is an added reminder.
If the oil is below the cross-hatched
area at the tip of the dipstick, add
one liter/quart of the recommended
oil and then recheck the level.
See “Selecting the Right Engine Oil”
for an explanation of what kind of
oil to use. For engine oil crankcase
capacity, see Capacities and
2. Pull the dipstick and clean it with
a paper towel or cloth, then push
it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and
check the level.
It is a good idea to check the engine
oil level at each fuel fill. In order
to get an accurate reading, the
vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle
is a yellow loop. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 10‑10 for the location
of the engine oil dipstick.
Specifications on page 12‑2.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-17
See Racing or Other Competitive
Driving on page 9‑7 for additional
information on engine oil.
These vehicles have a
racetrack‐ready dry sump
engine lubrication system.
Checking Engine Oil (ZO6,
ZR1, and Grand Sport)
This high‐performance system
operates differently than a standard
engine lubrication system and
requires a special procedure when
checking the engine oil level. Follow
this procedure closely when
Notice: Do not add too much oil.
Oil levels above or below the
acceptable operating range
shown on the dipstick are harmful
to the engine. If you find that
you have an oil level above the
operating range, i.e. the engine
has so much oil that the oil level
gets above the cross-hatched
area that shows the proper
operating range, the engine could
be damaged. You should drain
out the excess oil or limit your
driving of the vehicle and seek a
service professional to remove
the excess amount of oil.
checking the engine oil level.
The engine oil level must be
checked when the engine is warm.
Cold oil level in the dry sump tank
may not indicate the actual amount
of oil in the system. With this
A. Engine Oil Dipstick
B. Engine Oil Fill Cap
system, engine oil is contained in
an external tank, separate from the
engine. Under normal operating
conditions, the oil pan under the
engine does not store any oil. If the
vehicle has been parked for an
extended period without the engine
being started, some oil will seep
back into the oil pan, reducing the
amount of oil held in the dry sump
tank and there could be no engine
oil at all showing on the dipstick.
It is a good idea to check the engine
oil level at each fuel fill. In order to
get an accurate reading, the vehicle
must be on level ground.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑10 for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a
yellow loop. The dipstick is located
on the dry sump engine oil tank.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑10 for the location of the
dry sump engine oil tank.
Add enough oil to put the level
somewhere in the proper operating
range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when through.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-18
Vehicle Care
This is normal since the dipstick is
designed to read engine oil level
only after the engine has run long
enough to reach normal operating
temperature. Do not add engine
oil based on cold engine dipstick
readings. The engine oil level on the
dipstick will also be inaccurate if
checked while the engine is running.
4. Remove the dipstick from the
external engine oil tank and
clean it with a lint‐free paper
towel or a cloth. Re‐insert the
dipstick into the external oil tank,
pushing it all the way in until it
stops.
level. See “Selecting the Right
Engine Oil” for an explanation of
what kind of oil to use. For engine
oil crankcase capacity, see
Capacities and Specifications on
page 12‑2.
See Racing or Other Competitive
Driving on page 9‑7 for additional
information on engine oil.
5. Remove the dipstick from the oil
tank and read the level on the
cross‐hatched area. Oil levels
that fall in the cross‐hatched
area are normal.
1. To obtain an accurate engine
oil level reading, warm up the
engine to at least 80°C (175°F).
Cold oil will not give a correct oil
level reading.
Notice: Do not add too much oil.
Oil levels above or below the
acceptable operating range
shown on the dipstick are harmful
to the engine. If you find that
you have an oil level above the
operating range, i.e. the engine
has so much oil that the oil level
gets above the cross-hatched
area that shows the proper
When to Add Engine Oil
(ZO6, ZR1, and Grand Sport)
2. Once the engine is warm, turn
off the engine. Checking the oil
while the engine is running will
result in an incorrect oil level
reading.
operating range, the engine could
be damaged. You should drain
out the excess oil or limit your
driving of the vehicle and seek a
service professional to remove
the excess amount of oil.
3. Wait at least five minutes
(but not more than 20 minutes)
to allow oil to drain and settle in
the engine.
If the oil is below the cross-hatched
area at the tip of the dipstick, add
one liter/quart of the recommended
oil through the oil fill cap opening in
the oil tank and then recheck the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-19
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑10 for the location of the
external engine oil tank and fill cap.
2. Once the oil has been drained
from the engine, remove the
engine oil filter and allow the
oil to drain.
Add enough oil to put the level
somewhere in the proper operating
range. Push the dipstick all the way
back into the oil tank when through.
3. Re‐install both drain plugs and
tighten them to 2 Y (18 lb ft).
4. Replace the oil filter and
tighten it to 30 Y (22 lb ft).
See Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 11‑8 for the
correct filter.
Changing Engine Oil and Filter
(ZO6, ZR1, and Grand Sport)
These vehicles have a
racetrack‐ready dry sump
engine lubrication system.
This high‐performance system
operates differently than a standard
engine lubrication system and
requires a special procedure when
changing the engine oil and filter.
Follow this procedure closely when
changing the engine oil and filter.
5. Oil is filled through the opening
in the top of the external engine
oil tank. Remove the oil fill cap.
ZO6 Shown, ZR1 and Grand Sport
Similar
A. Engine Oil Drain Plugs
B. Seals
6. Add 9.9 L (10.5 quarts) of oil to
the oil tank. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 12‑2.
1. Remove the two engine oil drain
plugs from the bottom of the
engine oil pan. One drain plug
drains the external oil tank
7. Install the oil fill cap and insert
the dipstick, if removed.
via the oil transfer supply line.
The other drain plug drains
residual oil from the crankcase
sump. Allow the oil to drain.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-20
Vehicle Care
8. Start the engine and let it run
at idle for at least 15 seconds.
This will circulate the fresh
engine oil through the lubrication
system.
It is recommended to use
Mobil 1® engine oils that meet
the requirements of the dexos™
specification.
Use of Substitute Engine Oils if
dexos™ is unavailable: In the
9. Shut off the engine and check
the oil level as described under
“Checking Engine Oil (ZO6,
ZR1, and Grand Sport).”
Your vehicle was filled at the factory
with dexos™ approved engine oil.
event that dexos™ approved engine
oil is not available at an oil change
or for maintaining proper oil level,
you may use substitute engine oil
displaying the API Starburst symbol
and of SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade.
Use of oils that do not meet the
dexos™ specification, however,
may result in reduced performance
under certain circumstances.
Notice: Use only engine oil
that is approved to the dexos™
specification or an equivalent
engine oil of the appropriate
viscosity grade. Engine oils
approved to the dexos™
specification will show the
dexos™ symbol on the container.
Failure to use the recommended
engine oil or equivalent can result
in engine damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty. If you
are unsure whether your oil
is approved to the dexos™
specification, ask your service
provider.
Selecting the Right Engine Oil
Selecting the right engine oil
depends on both the proper oil
specification and viscosity grade:
Specification
Use and ask for engine oils with
the dexos™ certification mark.
Oils meeting the requirements
of your vehicle should have the
dexos™ certification mark on the
container. This certification mark
indicates that the oil has been
approved to the dexos™
Viscosity Grade
SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity
grade for the vehicle. Do not
use other viscosity oils such as
SAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W-50.
specification.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-21
Cold Temperature Operation: In an
area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −29°C
(−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil should
be used. An oil of this viscosity
grade will provide easier cold
starting for the engine at extremely
low temperatures. When selecting
an oil of the appropriate viscosity
grade, be sure to always select
an oil that meets the required
specification, dexos™. See
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain
elements that can be unhealthy for
your skin and could even cause
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
your skin for very long. Clean your
skin and nails with soap and water,
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or
properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the
manufacturer's warnings about the
use and disposal of oil products.
“Specification” for more information.
Used oil can be a threat to the
environment. If you change your
own oil, be sure to drain all the
oil from the filter before disposal.
Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash or pouring it on the
ground, into sewers, or into streams
or bodies of water. Recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects
used oil.
Engine Oil Additives/Engine
Oil Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil.
The recommended oils with the
dexos™ specification and displaying
the dexos™ certification mark
are all that is needed for good
performance and engine protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not
recommended and could cause
engine damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-22
Vehicle Care
When the system has calculated
that oil life has been diminished,
it indicates that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE
OIL message comes on. Change
the oil as soon as possible within
the next 1 000 km (600 miles). It is
possible that, if driving under the
best conditions, the oil life system
might indicate that an oil change
is not necessary for up to a year.
The engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and,
at this time, the system must be
reset. Your dealer has trained
service people who will perform this
work and reset the system. It is also
important to check the oil regularly
over the course of an oil drain
interval and keep it at the proper
level.
How to Reset the Engine Oil
Life System
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Reset the system whenever the
engine oil is changed so that the
system can calculate the next
engine oil change. To reset the
system:
This vehicle has a computer that
indicates when to change the
engine oil and filter. This is based
on engine revolutions and engine
temperature, and not on mileage.
Based on driving conditions, the
mileage at which an oil change is
indicated can vary considerably.
For the oil life system to work
properly, the system must be reset
every time the oil is changed.
1. Press the TRIP button so
the OIL LIFE percentage is
displayed.
2. Press RESET and hold for
two seconds. OIL LIFE
REMAINING 100% will appear.
Z06, ZR1, and Grand Sport models
have a racetrack‐ready dry sump
engine lubrication system. This
high‐performance system operates
differently than a standard engine
lubrication system and requires a
special procedure when changing
the engine oil and filter. See Engine
Oil on page 10‑15.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
message comes back on when the
vehicle is started, the engine oil life
system has not reset. Repeat the
procedure.
If the system is ever reset
accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 5 000 km (3,000 miles)
since the last oil change.
Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-23
procedure can be found in the
service manual. To purchase a
service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information
on page 13‑15.
Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Manual Transmission
Fluid
It is not necessary to check the
manual transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the
only reason for fluid loss. If a leak
occurs, take the vehicle to the
dealer service department and
have it repaired as soon as
possible. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 11‑6 for
the proper fluid to use.
How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Notice: Use of the incorrect
automatic transmission fluid may
damage the vehicle, and the
damages may not be covered by
the vehicle's warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission
fluid listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on
page 11‑6.
It is not necessary to check
the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the
only reason for fluid loss. If a leak
occurs, take the vehicle to the
dealer service department and have
it repaired as soon as possible.
The vehicle is not equipped with a
transmission fluid level dipstick.
There is a special procedure
for checking and changing the
transmission fluid. Because this
procedure is difficult, this should
be done at the dealer service
department. Contact the dealer
for additional information or the
Change the fluid and filter at the
intervals listed in Scheduled
Maintenance on page 11‑2, and
be sure to use the fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑6.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-24
Vehicle Care
Refer to the Maintenance
Hydraulic Clutch
It is not necessary to regularly
check clutch fluid unless you
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑10 for the location of the
engine air cleaner/filter.
Schedule for the proper fluid
to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 11‑6.
The fluid requires changing every
two years. See Scheduled
suspect there is a leak in the
system. Adding fluid will not correct
a leak. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the
system inspected and repaired.
Notice: If you spray water into
the engine air cleaner/filter intake
and water enters the engine air
cleaner/filter housing, you could
damage your vehicle's engine.
The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Do not spray
water into the engine air cleaner/
filter intake and/or housing.
Maintenance on page 11‑2.
How to Check and Add Fluid
Visually check the clutch fluid
reservoir to make sure the fluid level
is at the MIN (minimum) line on the
side of the reservoir. The hydraulic
clutch fluid system should be closed
and sealed.
When to Check and What
to Use
If cleaning the vehicle with the hood
open, take care not to spray water
directly near the filter opening of
the air cleaner, as shown in the
illustration, as this could damage
the vehicle's engine.
Do not remove the cap to check
the fluid level or to top‐off the fluid
level. Remove the cap only when
necessary to add the proper fluid
until the level reaches the MIN line.
The hydraulic clutch fluid reservoir
cap has this symbol on it. See
Engine Compartment Overview on
page 10‑10 for reservoir location.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-25
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter
at the scheduled maintenance
intervals and replace them at
the first oil change after each
80 000 km (50,000 mile) interval.
See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑2 for more information.
If driving in dusty/dirty conditions,
inspect the filter at each engine oil
change.
To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
remove the filter from the vehicle
and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter
remains caked with dirt, a new filter
is required.
To inspect or replace the engine air
cleaner/filter:
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
page 10‑9.
6.2 L V8 Engine LS3 Shown, 6.2 L
V8 Engine LS9 and 7.0 L
V8 Engine LS7 Similar
A. Tube
B. Clamp
C. Duct
2. Remove the tube (A) from the air
cleaner assembly.
3. Loosen the clamp (B) at the
throttle body and remove the
duct (C).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-26
Vehicle Care
6.2 L V8 Engine LS3 Shown, 6.2 L
V8 Engine LS9 and 7.0 L
V8 Engine LS7 Similar
6.2 L V8 Engine LS3
6.2 L V8 Engine LS9 Shown, 7.0 L
V8 Engine LS7 Similar
6. To access the air filter element,
gently pull the air cleaner
assembly upward until the
fasteners are released from
the retainer pins in the upper
radiator support.
A. Mass Air Flow Sensor
Connector
B. Connector Lock
4. Remove the connector lock (B)
located at the bottom of
the mass air flow sensor
connector (A).
The LS3 engine has three
retainer pins and the LS7 and
LS9 engines have two.
5. Press on the top and bottom
of the mass air flow sensor
connector (A) and remove.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-27
7. To remove the filter from the
LS3 and LS7 engines, remove
the six screws (A) securing the
filter cover (B) then pull away
from to gain access to the air
filter (C).
WARNING
{
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you
or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it
helps to stop flames if the engine
backfires. Use caution when
To remove the filter assembly
from the LS9 engine, remove
the six screws securing the filter
cover. The filter cover and the
air filter are one piece.
working on the engine and do not
drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
8. Inspect or replace the filter
or filter cover assembly.
6.2 L V8 Engine LS3 Shown, 6.2 L
V8 Engine LS9 and 7.0 L
V8 Engine LS7 Similar
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is
off, dirt can easily get into the
engine, which could damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter
in place when you are driving.
See Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 11‑8.
A. Screw
9. Reverse Steps 2 through 7 to
replace the air cleaner/filter
cover.
B. Filter Cover
C. Filter
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-28
Vehicle Care
Cooling System (Engine)
The cooling system allows the
engine to maintain the correct
working temperature.
WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
{
An electric engine cooling fan
under the hood can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can cause injury. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
Do not run the engine if there is
a leak. If you run the engine, it
could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you
could be burned. Get any leak
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
Notice: Using coolant other
than DEX-COOL® can cause
premature engine, heater core,
or radiator corrosion. In addition,
the engine coolant could require
changing sooner, at 50 000 km
(30,000 miles) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant
in the vehicle.
WARNING
{
Heater and radiator hoses, and
other engine parts, can be very
hot. Do not touch them. If you do,
you can be burned.
7.0L Engine shown, 6.2L Engine
similar
(Continued)
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan
B. Coolant Surge Tank with
Pressure Cap
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-29
4. Tighten the bleeder valve if there
is coolant flowing out of the
bleeder valve.
Checking Coolant
Cooling System
(Intercooler)
The 6.2L LS9 supercharged
V8 engine has an intercooler
cooling system. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 10‑10 for location of the
intercooler.
5. If there is no coolant flowing out
of the bleeder valve, there could
be a leak in the system. Tighten
the bleeder valve and contact
the dealer for service.
The intercooler cooling system has
a special procedure for draining
and adding coolant. Because this
procedure is difficult, see the dealer
for service if the intercooler is low
on coolant. The procedure can also
be found in the service manual.
To purchase a service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering
Information on page 13‑15.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle
is filled with DEX-COOL® engine
coolant. This coolant is designed to
remain in the vehicle for 5 years or
240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever
occurs first.
1. Verify that the engine and
intercooler are no longer hot.
2. Place a cloth to absorb possible
coolant loss under the driver's
side bleeder valve (A).
The following explains the cooling
system and how to check and add
coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating,
see Engine Overheating on
page 10‑34.
3. Loosen, but do not completely
unscrew the bleeder valve to
check for coolant in the system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-30
Vehicle Care
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL
coolant. If using this mixture,
nothing else needs to be added.
This mixture:
Notice: If an improper coolant
mixture is used, the engine could
overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Too much water in the mixture
can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and other
parts.
What to Use
WARNING
{
Adding only plain water or some
other liquid to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water
and other liquids, can boil before
the proper coolant mixture will.
The vehicle's coolant warning
system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water
or the wrong mixture, the engine
could get too hot but you would
not get the overheat warning.
The engine could catch fire and
you or others could be burned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL
coolant.
.
Gives freezing protection down
to −37°C (−34°F), outside
temperature.
.
Gives boiling protection up
Notice: If extra inhibitors
to 129°C (265°F), engine
temperature.
and/or additives are used in
the vehicle's cooling system,
the vehicle could be damaged.
Use only the proper mixture of
the engine coolant listed in this
manual for the cooling system.
See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑6 for more
information.
.
Protects against rust and
corrosion.
.
Will not damage aluminum parts.
.
Helps keep the proper engine
temperature.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-31
When the engine is cold, the coolant
level should be at the FULL COLD
mark on the coolant surge tank.
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level
surface when checking the coolant
level.
When the engine is hot, the
level could be higher than the
FULL COLD line. If the coolant is
below the FULL COLD line when
the engine is hot, there could be
a leak in the cooling system.
Check to see if coolant is visible in
the coolant surge tank. If the coolant
inside the coolant surge tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until
it cools down. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not at or
above the FULL COLD mark, add
a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL coolant at the
coolant recovery tank, but be sure
the cooling system is cool before
this is done. See Engine Coolant on
page 10‑29 for more information.
If the coolant is low, add the coolant
or take the vehicle to a dealer for
service.
The engine coolant surge tank
is located toward the rear of the
engine compartment on the driver
side of the vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 10‑10 for more information
on location.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-32
Vehicle Care
How to Add Coolant to the
Coolant Surge Tank
WARNING (Continued)
the coolant surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — they can
come out at high speed. Never
turn the cap when the cooling
system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap, is hot.
Wait for the cooling system and
coolant surge tank pressure cap
to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
WARNING
{
You can be burned if you spill
coolant on hot engine parts.
Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts
are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
1. When the cooling system,
including the coolant surge tank
pressure cap and upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot, remove
the pressure cap.
WARNING
{
If coolant is needed, add the proper
DEX-COOL coolant mixture directly
to the surge tank, but be sure the
cooling system is cool before this
is done.
Steam and scalding liquids from a
hot cooling system can blow out
and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn
Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise about
one-quarter turn and then stop.
(Continued)
If a hiss is heard, wait for that to
stop. A hiss means there is still
some pressure left.
2. Keep turning the pressure cap
slowly, and remove it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-33
5. Replace the pressure cap.
Be sure the pressure cap is
hand-tight and fully seated.
Check the level in the surge tank
when the system has cooled
down. If the coolant is not at
the proper level, repeat Steps 1
through 4, then reinstall the
pressure cap. If the coolant is
not at the proper level when the
system cools down again, see
the dealer.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with
the proper DEX-COOL coolant
mixture until the level inside
stabilizes at the FULL COLD
mark on the front of the
4. With the coolant surge tank
pressure cap off, start the
engine and let it run until the
upper radiator hose can be felt
getting hot. Any time during this
procedure, watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not
tightly installed, coolant loss and
possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly
and tightly secured.
surge tank.
By this time, the coolant level
inside the coolant surge tank
may be lower. If the level is
lower, add more of the proper
mixture to the coolant surge
tank until the level stabilizes
at the FULL COLD mark on
the coolant surge tank.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-34
Vehicle Care
Then check to see if the engine
cooling fan is running. If the engine
is overheating, the fan should be
running. If it is not, do not continue
to run the engine and have the
vehicle serviced.
If Steam is Coming from the
Engine
Engine Overheating
The vehicle has several indicators
to warn of engine overheating.
WARNING
{
There is an engine coolant
temperature gauge on the
instrument panel cluster.
Steam from an overheated engine
can burn you badly, even if you
just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or
hear steam coming from it. Turn it
off and get everyone away from
the vehicle until it cools down.
Wait until there is no sign of
steam or coolant before you
open the hood.
Notice: Engine damage from
running your engine without
coolant is not covered by the
vehicle warranty. See Overheated
Engine Protection Operating
Mode for information on driving
to a safe place in an emergency.
See Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge on page 5‑15. The vehicle
may also display a COOLANT
OVER TEMPERATURE message
on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See Engine Cooling
System Messages on page 5‑39
for more information.
Notice: If the engine catches fire
while driving with no coolant, the
vehicle can be badly damaged.
The costly repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
See Overheated Engine
Protection Operating Mode on
page 10‑35 for information on
driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
If the decision is made not to lift the
hood but to get service help right
away. See Roadside Assistance
Program (United States and
Canada) on page 13‑8 or Roadside
Assistance Program (Mexico) on
page 13‑10.
If you keep driving when the
vehicles engine is overheated,
the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly
burned. Stop the engine if it
overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
If the decision is made to lift the
hood, make sure the vehicle is
parked on a level surface.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-35
If the overheat warning is displayed
with no sign of steam:
If there is no sign of steam, idle
the engine for three minutes
WARNING (Continued)
while parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it
cools down. Also, see “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode”
next in this section.
1. Turn the air conditioning off.
See Overheated Engine
Protection Operating Mode on
page 10‑35 for information on
driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest
temperature and to the highest
fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
Overheated Engine
Protection
Operating Mode
3. If in a traffic jam, shift to
N (Neutral) while stopped. If it is
safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral)
and let the engine idle.
If No Steam is Coming from
the Engine
If an engine overheat warning is
displayed but no steam can be seen
or heard, the problem may not be
too serious. Sometimes the engine
can get a little too hot when the
vehicle:
This emergency operating mode
lets the vehicle be driven to a
safe place, up to 80 km (50 mi),
in an emergency situation. If an
overheated engine condition exists
and the messages COOLANT
OVER TEMPERATURE and
REDUCED ENGINE POWER are
displayed, along with the check
engine light, an overheat protection
mode which alternates firing groups
of cylinders helps prevent engine
damage. In this mode, there is a
significant loss in power and engine
performance.
If the temperature overheat gauge
is no longer in the overheat zone
or an overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven.
Continue to drive the vehicle slowly
for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
vehicle distance from the vehicle in
front. If the warning does not come
back on, continue to drive normally.
.
Climbs a long hill on a hot day
.
Stops after high-speed driving
.
Idles for long periods in traffic
If the warning continues, pull
over, stop, and park the vehicle
right away.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-36
Vehicle Care
Driving extended distances in the
overheat protection mode should be
avoided.
The level should be at the
FULL COLD mark. If necessary,
add only enough fluid to bring the
level up to the mark.
When to Check Power Steering
Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly
check power steering fluid unless
there is a leak suspected in the
system or an unusual noise is
heard. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the
system inspected and repaired.
Notice: After driving in the
overheated engine protection
operating mode, to avoid engine
damage, allow the engine to cool
before attempting any repair.
The engine oil will be severely
degraded. Repair the cause of
coolant loss, change the oil and
reset the oil life system. See
Engine Oil on page 10‑15.
How to Check Power Steering
Fluid
To check the power steering fluid:
1. Turn the ignition off and let the
engine compartment cool down.
Power Steering Fluid
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the
reservoir clean.
When the engine compartment
is hot, the level should be at the
HOT mark. When the engine
compartment is cool, the level
should be at the FULL COLD mark.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the
dipstick with a clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely
tighten it.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑10 for reservoir location.
5. Remove the cap again and look
at the fluid level on the dipstick.
There are markings on both
sides of the dipstick.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-37
.
Do not mix water with
What to Use
Adding Washer Fluid
ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution
to freeze and damage the
washer fluid tank and other
parts of the washer system.
Also, water does not clean
as well as washer fluid.
To determine what kind of fluid to
use, see Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑6. Always
use the proper fluid.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid
may damage the vehicle and the
damages may not be covered by
the vehicle's warranty. Always
use the correct fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and
.
Open the cap with the washer
symbol on it. Add washer fluid
until the tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
Fill the washer fluid tank
only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This
allows for fluid expansion
if freezing occurs, which
could damage the tank if
it is completely full.
Lubricants on page 11‑6.
page 10‑10 for reservoir location.
Notice:
Washer Fluid
.
When using concentrated
.
Do not use engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the windshield
washer. It can damage the
windshield washer system
and paint.
What to Use
washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer's instructions
for adding water.
When the vehicle needs windshield
washer fluid, be sure to read the
manufacturer's instructions before
use. If the vehicle will be operating
in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid
that has sufficient protection against
freezing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-38
Vehicle Care
Notice: Continuing to drive with
worn-out brake pads could result
in costly brake repair.
Notice: Continuing to drive with
worn-out brake pads could result
in costly brake repair.
Brakes
Brake Wear (Except ZR1)
.
This vehicle has disc brakes.
Some driving conditions or climates
can cause a brake squeal when the
brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean
Make sure that the brakes have
been given sufficient time to cool
and then set the park brake.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear
indicators that make a high-pitched
warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed.
The sound can come and go or be
heard all the time the vehicle is
moving, except when applying the
brake pedal firmly.
something is wrong with the brakes.
Brake linings should always be
replaced as complete axle sets.
Brake Wear (ZR1 Only)
The ZR1 model does not have
built-in brake pad wear indicators
and periodic visual inspection of the
brake pads is required to determine
when to replace the brake pads.
WARNING
{
The brake wear warning sound
means that soon the brakes will
not work well. That could lead to
a crash. When the brake wear
warning sound is heard, have
the vehicle serviced.
Rear
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-39
Brake Rotor Wear
ZR1 models have ceramic brake
rotors. Rotors should be visually
inspected whenever the brake pads
are replaced. Rotors also need to
be weighed before brake pads are
replaced to confirm that the rotor
mass is greater than the wear‐out
mass printed on the rotor. The rotor
can be reused if the weight of the
rotor is above the mass limit. Rotor
inspection and weighing methods
can be found in the service manual.
See Service Publications Ordering
Information on page 13‑15.
The ZR1 also has an electronic
brake pad wear sensor system.
When pads are worn, the CHANGE
BRAKE PADS message displays
in the Driver Information Center.
See Brake System Messages on
page 5‑36.
Front
.
.
.
Brake pads can be visually
inspected through the wheel by
inspecting the outer brake pads
at each wheel.
Brake pads should be replaced
when worn to two mm of pad
thickness. New pads are 10 mm
thick.
Some driving conditions or climates
can cause a brake squeal when the
brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean
In addition, brake pad inspection
is required any time the tires are
removed.
something is wrong with the brakes.
Brake linings should always be
replaced as complete axle sets.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-40
Vehicle Care
Brake Rotor Protector
A rotor protector should always be
installed before any wheel removal.
The protector can be installed by
feeding it through the wheel spokes
and slipping it over the outer edge
of the rotor. Leave the protector in
place, over the rotor edge, until
the wheel is re‐installed. Rotor
protectors are available through
your dealer.
WARNING
{
Ceramic rotors will be very hot
after operation and touching them
may cause burns. Be sure brake
system is completely cool prior to
installation of protector, or coming
in contact with them.
Brake Pedal Travel
Notice: Rotors may be chipped
if hard contact is made with the
wheel during wheel installation
or removal. Always use the rotor
protectors. Be sure to carefully
follow wheel removal and
See your dealer if the brake pedal
does not return to normal height,
or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a
sign that brake service might
be required.
installation instructions.
Brake Adjustment
Every brake stop, the disc brakes
automatically adjust for wear.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-41
There are only two reasons why the
brake fluid level in the reservoir
might go down:
Replacing Brake System Parts
Brake Fluid
The braking system on a vehicle is
complex. Its many parts have to be
of top quality and work well together
if the vehicle is to have really good
braking. The vehicle was designed
and tested with top-quality brake
parts. When parts of the braking
system are replaced — for example,
when the brake linings wear down
and new ones are installed — be
sure to get new approved
Brake Fluid
.
The brake fluid level goes down
because of normal brake lining
wear. When new linings are
installed, the fluid level goes
back up.
.
A fluid leak in the brake
hydraulic system can also
cause a low fluid level.
Have the brake hydraulic
system fixed, since a leak
means that sooner or later the
brakes will not work well.
The brake master cylinder reservoir
is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑10 for the location of the
reservoir.
replacement parts. If this is not
done, the brakes might not work
properly. For example, if someone
puts in brake linings that are
Do not top off the brake fluid.
Adding fluid does not correct
a leak. If fluid is added when
the linings are worn, there
will be too much fluid when
new brake linings are installed.
wrong for the vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes
can change — for the worse.
The braking performance expected
can change in many other ways if
the wrong replacement brake parts
are installed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-42
Vehicle Care
Add or remove brake fluid, as
necessary, only when work is done
on the brake hydraulic system.
What to Add
Checking Brake Fluid
Use only new DOT 3 brake
fluid from a sealed container.
See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑6.
Check brake fluid by looking at the
brake fluid reservoir. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 10‑10.
WARNING
{
Always clean the brake fluid
reservoir cap and the area around
the cap before removing it. This
helps keep dirt from entering the
reservoir.
The fluid level should be above
the MIN mark on the reservoir.
If it is not, have the brake hydraulic
system checked to see if there is
a leak.
If too much brake fluid is added, it
can spill on the engine and burn,
if the engine is hot enough. You
or others could be burned, and
the vehicle could be damaged.
Add brake fluid only when work
is done on the brake hydraulic
system. See “Checking Brake
Fluid” in this section.
After work is done on the brake
hydraulic system, make sure the
level is between the MIN and MAX
marks.
WARNING
{
With the wrong kind of fluid in
the brake hydraulic system, the
brakes might not work well. This
could cause a crash. Always use
the proper brake fluid.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
to determine when to check the
brake fluid. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 11‑2.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-43
Notice:
For battery replacement, see
your dealer or the service manual.
To purchase a service manual, see
Service Publications Ordering
Information on page 13‑15.
Some vehicles have a built-in
battery charger that can be
.
Using the wrong fluid
plugged in to keep the battery
charged when the vehicle is not
in use. For vehicles without a
battery charger, see the following
information.
can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts.
For example, just a few
drops of mineral-based oil,
such as engine oil, in the
brake hydraulic system can
damage brake hydraulic
system parts so badly that
they will have to be replaced.
Do not let someone put in
the wrong kind of fluid.
DANGER
{
Infrequent Usage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery to keep the battery from
running down.
Battery posts, terminals, and
related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and reproductive
harm. Wash hands after handling.
See “Power Window Initialization” in
Power Windows on page 2‑17.
.
If brake fluid is spilled on the
vehicle's painted surfaces,
the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not
to spill brake fluid on the
vehicle. If you do, wash it
off immediately.
Extended Storage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery or use a battery trickle
charger.
Vehicle Storage
WARNING
{
Batteries have acid that can burn
you and gas that can explode.
You can be badly hurt if you are
not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 10‑82 for tips on working
around a battery without
Battery
Refer to the replacement number
on the original battery label when a
new battery is needed.
getting hurt.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-44
Vehicle Care
If the level is below the bottom of
the fill plug hole, some lubricant will
need to be added. Add enough
lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the fill plug hole.
2. Firmly apply both the parking
brake and the regular brake.
See Parking Brake on
page 9‑35.
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly
check rear axle fluid unless a leak
is suspected or an unusual noise is
heard. A fluid loss could indicate a
problem. Have it inspected and
repaired.
Do not use the accelerator
pedal, and be ready to turn off
the engine immediately if it
starts.
What to Use
To add lubricant when the level
is low or to completely refill after
draining, see Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 11‑6. Then
fill to the bottom of the fill plug hole
with the required lubricant.
3. For automatic transmission
vehicles, try to start the engine
in each gear. The vehicle
How to Check Lubricant
should start only in P (Park) or
N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts
in any other position, contact
your dealer for service.
Starter Switch Check
For manual transmission
WARNING
{
vehicles, put the shift lever in
Neutral, push the clutch pedal
down halfway, and try to start
the engine. The vehicle should
start only when the clutch pedal
is pushed down all the way to
the floor. If the vehicle starts
when the clutch pedal is not
pushed all the way down,
When you are doing this
inspection, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be
injured.
To get an accurate reading, the
vehicle should be on a level
surface.
1. Before starting this check, be
sure there is enough room
around the vehicle.
contact your dealer for service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-45
3. With the engine off, turn the
ignition to ON/RUN, but do
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
your foot on the regular brake, set
the parking brake.
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Control
Function Check
not start the engine. Without
applying the regular brake,
try to move the shift lever out of
P (Park) with normal effort. If the
shift lever moves out of P (Park),
contact your dealer for service.
.
To check the parking brake's
WARNING
{
holding ability: With the engine
running and the transmission in
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
When you are doing this
inspection, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be
injured.
Park Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check
.
To check the P (Park)
WARNING
mechanism's holding ability:
With the engine running, shift
to P (Park). Then release the
parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
{
1. Before starting this check, be
sure there is enough room
When you are doing this check,
the vehicle could begin to move.
You or others could be injured
and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front
of the vehicle in case it begins to
roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should the vehicle
begin to move.
around the vehicle. It should
be parked on a level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking
brake. See Parking Brake on
page 9‑35.
Contact your dealer if service is
required.
Be ready to apply the regular
brake immediately if the vehicle
begins to move.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-46
Vehicle Care
To remove the wiper blade
assembly:
3. Press down on the blade
assembly pivot locking tab (C).
Pull down on the blade
Wiper Blade Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be
inspected for wear and cracking.
See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑2 for more information.
1. Open the hood to gain access to
the windshield wipers.
assembly (A) to release it
from the wiper arm hook (F).
2. Lift the wiper arm away from the
windshield.
4. Remove the insert from the
blade assembly (A).
Replacement blades come in
different types and are removed
in different ways. For the proper
type and length, see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 11‑8.
The insert has two notches
at one end that are locked by
the bottom claws of the blade
assembly. At the notch end,
pull the insert from the blade
assembly.
It is a good idea to clean or replace
the wiper blade assembly every
six months. Allowing the wiper
blade arm to touch the windshield
when no wiper blade is installed
could damage the windshield. Any
damage that occurs would not be
covered by the vehicle's warranty.
Do not allow the wiper blade arm
to touch the windshield.
A. Blade Assembly
B. Arm Assembly
C. Locking Tab
D. Blade Pivot
E. Hook Slot
F. Arm Hook
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-47
To install the new wiper insert:
2. Be sure the notches are locked
by the bottom claws. Make sure
that all other claws are properly
locked on both sides of the
insert slots.
Installation guide:
3. Put the blade assembly pivot in
the wiper arm hook. Pull up until
the pivot locking tab locks in the
hook slot.
4. Carefully lower the wiper arm
and blade assembly onto the
windshield.
1. Slide the insert (D), notched end
last, into the end with the two
blade claws (A). Slide the insert
all the way through the blade
claws at the opposite end (B).
The plastic caps (C) will be
forced off as the insert is fully
installed.
A. Claw in Notch
B. Correct Installation
C. Incorrect Installation
Windshield Replacement
The windshield is part of the
Head-Up Display (HUD) system.
If you ever have to get the
windshield replaced, get one that is
designed for HUD or the HUD
image may look out of focus.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-48
Vehicle Care
High Intensity Discharge
(HID) Lighting
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset at
the factory and should need no
further adjustment.
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement
bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
page 10‑50.
WARNING
{
However, if the vehicle is damaged
in a crash, the headlamp aim may
be affected. Aim adjustment to
the low-beam headlamps may be
necessary if oncoming drivers flash
their high-beam headlamps at you
(for vertical aim).
For any bulb‐changing procedure
not listed in this section, contact
your dealer.
The low beam high intensity
discharge lighting system
operates at a very high voltage.
If you try to service any of the
system components, you could
be seriously injured. Have your
dealer or a qualified technician
service them.
Halogen Bulbs
WARNING
{
If the headlamps need to be
re-aimed, it is recommended that
the vehicle be taken to the dealer
for service.
Halogen bulbs have pressurized
gas inside and can burst if you
drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure
to read and follow the instructions
on the bulb package.
The vehicle may have HID
headlamps. After an HID headlamp
bulb has been replaced, you may
notice that the beam is a slightly
different shade than it was originally.
This is normal.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-49
To replace a high-beam or front
parking/turn signal bulb:
Headlamps, Front Turn
Signal and Parking
Lamps
1. Turn the wheel to allow access
to the wheel well.
4. Remove the headlamp bulb by
releasing the outer tabs from the
socket.
5. Remove the front parking/turn
signal bulb by turning the bulb
socket counterclockwise.
A. High-beam Headlamp
B. Low-beam Headlamp
C. Front Parking/Turn Signal
2. Remove the three outer
fasteners to move the access
panel back.
6. Replace the high-beam
headlamp bulb with a new bulb
and reattach to the bulb socket.
3. Remove the outer cover to
expose the high-beam headlamp
bulb socket.
If the low-beam headlamp needs
to be replaced, see your dealer.
See High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Lighting on page 10‑48 for more
information.
Replace the front parking/turn
signal bulb by turning the bulb
socket clockwise.
7. Reverse the Steps 2 through 4 to
reinstall.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-50
Vehicle Care
5. Push the new bulb in the bulb
socket until it snaps into place.
Taillamps, Turn Signal,
and Stoplamps
To replace a stoplamp, taillamp/turn
signal bulb:
Electrical System
6. Reinstall the lamp assembly by
first lining up the tabs on the
bottom of the lamp assembly
with the tabs in the vehicle,
then slide it in.
Electrical System
Overload
The vehicle has fuses and circuit
breakers to protect against an
electrical system overload.
1. Remove the screw from the top
of the lamp assembly.
7. Replace the screw at the top of
the lamp assembly.
When the current electrical load is
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens
and closes, protecting the circuit
until the current load returns to
normal or the problem is fixed.
This greatly reduces the chance
of circuit overload and fire caused
by electrical problems.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Bulb
Number
Front Parking/Turn
Signal
5702KA
H9
Headlamp,
High‐Beam Lamp
Sidemarker Lamp 194LL (W3W)
2. Tilt the lamp assembly
toward you.
Stoplamp/Taillamp/
Turn Signal Lamp
3057KX
3. Turn the bulb socket one-quarter
turn counterclockwise and pull
it out.
For replacement bulbs not listed
here, contact your dealer.
4. Pull the bulb straight out to
remove it from the socket.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-51
Fuses and circuit breakers protect
the following in the vehicle:
Look at the silver-colored band
Windshield Wipers
inside the fuse. If the band is broken
or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure
you replace a bad fuse with a new
one of the identical size and rating.
If the wiper motor overheats due to
heavy snow or ice, the windshield
wipers will stop until the motor cools
and will then restart.
.
Headlamp Wiring
.
Windshield Wiper Motor
.
Power Windows and Other
If you ever have a problem on the
road and do not have a spare fuse,
you can borrow one that has the
same amperage. Just pick some
feature of the vehicle that you can
get along without — like the radio
or cigarette lighter — and use its
fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
Although the circuit is protected
from electrical overload, overload
due to heavy snow or ice may
cause wiper linkage damage.
Always clear ice and heavy snow
from the windshield before using
the windshield wipers.
Power Accessories
Replace a bad fuse with a new one
of the identical size and rating.
If there is a problem on the road
and a fuse needs to be replaced,
the same amperage fuse can be
borrowed. Choose some feature of
the vehicle that is not needed to use
and replace it as soon as possible.
If the overload is caused by an
electrical problem and not snow
or ice, be sure to get it fixed.
Vehicles with the ZR‐1 package
have an intercooler relay located on
the fan shroud. See your dealer.
Headlamp Wiring
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers
The wiring circuits in the vehicle
are protected from short circuits
by a combination of J-Case fuses,
mini-fuses and circuit breakers.
This greatly reduces the chance of
fires caused by electrical problems.
An electrical overload may cause
the lamps to go on and off, or in
some cases to remain off. Have
the headlamp wiring checked right
away if the lamps go on and off or
remain off.
Vehicles with the ZR‐1 package also
have a fuel system mini-fuse. It is
located near the battery in the
battery storage compartment in
the rear of the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-52
Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block
There is one fuse block in the
engine compartment located on
the passenger side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑10 for more information
on location.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any
electrical component on the
vehicle may damage it. Always
keep the covers on any electrical
component.
For ZR1 models, the Fuel System
fuse is located at the battery.
Fuse
Usage
Transmission
Control Module/
Transmission
The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses and features
shown.
1
Horn, Alternator
Sense
2
3
Antilock Braking
System (ABS)/Real
Time Damping
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-53
Fuse
Usage
Fuse
Usage
Fuse
Usage
4
Wiper
Odd Numbered
Fuel Injectors
Fuel Pump
(except ZR1)
12
20
Stoplamps/
Back-Up Lamps
5
Electronic
Suspension
Control (Option)
Driver Side
Low-Beam
Headlamp
13
14
21
22
23
6
7
8
Oxygen Sensor
Battery Main 5
Parking Lamps
Canister Purge
Solenoid, Mass Air
Flow Sensor
Front Fog Lamp
Passenger Side
High-Beam
Headlamp
Powertrain Relay
Input/Electronic
Throttle Control
9
Air Conditioner
Compressor
15
16
Driver Side
High-Beam
Headlamp
Manual
Transmission
Solenoids
Even Numbered
Fuel Injectors
24
56
10
11
17
18
Windshield Washer
Headlamp Washer
Engine Control
Module (ECM)/
Transmission
Control
Module (TCM)/
Easy Key Module
Antilock Braking
System
Passenger Side
Low-Beam
Headlamp
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-54
Vehicle Care
J-Style
Fuses
Usage
Micro-Relays
Usage
Parking
Lamps,
Mini-Relays
Usage
Windshield Wiper
On/Off
45
25
Cooling Fan
37
Foglamps
26
Battery Main 3
Low-Beam
Headlamp
47
Front
Fog Lamp
Antilock Brake
System
38
39
46
55
27
Spare Fuses
Usage
Spare
High-Beam
Headlamp
Heating/Ventilation/
Air Conditioning
Blower
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
28
Headlamp
Washer
Spare
29
30
31
32
33
Battery Main 2
Starter
Spare
Fuel Pump
(except ZR1)
Spare
Audio Amplifier
Intercooler Pump
Battery Main 1
Spare
Mini-Relays
Usage
Spare
40
Rear Defog
Fuse Puller
Windshield Wiper
High/Low
41
Micro-Relays
Usage
Horn
Diodes
§
Usage
Diode 1
34
Windshield Wiper
Run/Accessory
42
43
44
Air
§
Wiper
35
36
Conditioning
Compressor
Crank
§
Diode 2
Powertrain
Ignition 1
Windshield
Washer
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-55
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block
The instrument panel fuse block is
located on the passenger side of the
vehicle, under the instrument panel
and under the toe-board.
Remove the carpet and toe-board
covering to access the fuse block by
pulling at the top of each corner of
the panel. Open the fuse block
cover to access the fuses.
You can remove fuses using the
fuse puller.
The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown.
Fuses
Usage
Brake
BTSI SOL/
STR
WHL LCK
Transmission
Fuses
Usage
Shift Interlock,
Steering Wheel
Column Lock
BCK/
UP LAMP
BLANK
Reverse Lamps
Not Used
Not Used
Cluster, Heads‐Up
Display
CLSTR/HUD
BLANK
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-56
Vehicle Care
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
Heating.
Ventilation/Air
Conditioning,
Power Sounder
Fuses
Usage
CRUISE
SWITCH
Cruise Control
Switch
REVERSE
LAMPS
Reverse Lamps
HVAC/
PWR SND
CTSY/LAMP Courtesy Lamp
RUN CRNK
Run/Crank Relay
DR LCK
Door Locks
Sensing and
Diagnostic Module,
Automatic
Occupant Sensing
Module, Airbag
IGN SWTCH/ Ignition Switch,
INTR SNSR Intrusion Sensor
SDM/AOS
SWTCH
AIRBAG
DRIV DR
SWITCH
Driver Door Switch
Electric Inside
Rearview Mirror,
ISRVM/HVAC Heating,
Engine Control
Module (ECM)
ECM
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Ventilation,
Air Conditioning
Exhaust Module
(Z06 & ZR1),
Spare (Coupe and
Convertible)
EXH MDL
OnStar®
(if equipped)
ONSTAR
GM LAN
RUN/CRNK
RDO/
STOP LAMP Stop Lamp
GM LAN Devices
Radio, S‐Band
S‐BAND
Steering Wheel
Dimming
SWC DM
HTD SEAT/
WPR RLY
Heated Seat,
Wiper Relays
Rear Fog Lamp,
Assembly Line
REAR FOG/
TELE
SWTCH/
MSM
Telescope Switch,
Memory Seat
Module
Diagnostic Link
ALDL/TOP
Connector,
SWTCH
Convertible Top
Switch
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-57
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
AUX PWR
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
Usage
Auxiliary Power
Not Used
Fuses
PWR
Usage
TONNEAU
RELSE
Power Seats,
Memory Seat
Module
Tonneau Release
SEATS MSM
Tonneau Pulldown
Actuator
Not Used
TPA
PWR/
WNDWS/
TRUNK/
FUEL RELSE
Power Windows,
Trunk, Fuel Door
Release
Not Used
Fuses
BLANK
Usage
Blank
Not Used
Not Used
TRUNK
RELSE
Trunk Release
BLANK
Blank
Not Used
FUEL DR
RELSE
Not Used
WPR DWELL Wiper Dwell
Windshield Wiper/
Washer
Fuel Door Release
Rear Fog Lamps
Tonneau Release
DRVR
HTD SEAT
Driver Heated Seat
WPR/WSW
REAR/FOG
TONNEAU
RELSE
LTR
Cigarette Lighter
PASS
Passenger
TRUNK
RELSE
HTD SEAT
Heated Seat
Trunk Release
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-58
Vehicle Care
Wheels and Tires
WARNING (Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
.
.
Under inflated tires pose the
same danger as overloaded
tires. The resulting crash
could cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when
your tires are cold.
Improperly repaired tires can
cause a crash. Only your
dealer or an authorized tire
service center should repair,
replace, dismount, and mount
the tires.
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with
high-quality tires made by a
leading tire manufacturer. If you
ever have questions about your
tire warranty and where to
obtain service, see your vehicle
Warranty booklet for details.
For additional information refer
to the tire manufacturer.
.
Do not spin the tires in
excess of 55 km/h (35 mph)
on slippery surfaces such
as snow, mud, ice, etc.
Excessive spinning may
cause the tires to explode.
.
Over inflated tires are more
likely to be cut, punctured,
or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you
hit a pothole. Keep tires at
the recommended pressure.
WARNING
{
See Tire Pressure for High-Speed
Operation on page 10‑67 for
inflation pressure adjustment for
high-speed driving.
.
Poorly maintained and
improperly used tires are
dangerous.
.
.
Worn or old tires can cause a
crash. If your tread is badly
worn, replace them.
.
Overloading your tires can
cause overheating as a result
of too much flexing. You
could have a blowout and a
serious accident. See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑14.
Replace any tires that have
been damaged by impacts
with potholes, curbs, etc.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-59
If you choose to use winter tires:
Winter Tires
WARNING
{
.
Use tires of the same brand and
If you expect to drive on snow or ice
covered roads often, you may want
to get winter tires for your vehicle.
All season tires provide good overall
performance on most surfaces but
they may not offer the traction you
would like or the same level of
performance as winter tires on
snow or ice covered roads.
tread type on all four wheel
positions.
When the low tire warning light is
displayed on the instrument panel
cluster, your vehicle's handling
capabilities will be reduced during
severe maneuvers. If you drive
too fast, you could lose control
of your vehicle. You or others
could be injured. Do not drive
over 55 mph (90 km/h) when the
low tire warning light is displayed.
Drive cautiously and check your
tire pressures as soon as
.
Use only radial ply tires of the
same size, load range, and
speed rating as the original
equipment tires.
Winter tires with the same speed
rating as your original equipment
tires may not be available for H, V,
W, Y, and ZR speed rated tires.
If you choose winter tires with a
lower speed rating, never exceed
the tire's maximum speed capability.
Winter tires, in general, are
designed for increased traction
on snow and ice covered roads.
With winter tires, there may be
decreased dry road traction,
increased road noise, and shorter
tread life. After switching to winter
tires, be alert for changes in
vehicle handling and braking.
you can.
Run-Flat Tires
If a tire goes flat, you will not
need to stop on the side of the
road to change the tire. You can
keep driving, however, if driven
too far or too fast, the tire may
be permanently damaged and
you might not be able to continue
driving on the tire. The tire can
be driven with no air pressure for
up to 105 km (65 miles) at speeds
slower than 90 km/h (55 mph).
This vehicle, when new, had run-flat
tires. There is no spare tire, no tire
changing equipment, and no place
to store a tire in the vehicle. Run-flat
tires perform so well without any air
that a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) is used to alert you if a tire
has lost pressure.
See your dealer for details
regarding winter tire availability
and proper tire selection. Also, see
Buying New Tires on page 10‑73.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-60
Vehicle Care
The shorter the distance you drive
and the slower the speed, the
To locate the nearest GM or run-flat
servicing facility, call Roadside
Assistance. For phone numbers
and Roadside Service details see
Roadside Assistance Program
(United States and Canada) on
page 13‑8 or Roadside Assistance
Program (Mexico) on page 13‑10.
Notice: Using liquid sealants
can damage the tire valves and
tire pressure monitor sensors
in the vehicle's run-flat tires.
This damage would not be
covered by warranty. Do not use
liquid sealants in the vehicle's
run-flat tires.
greater the chance that the tire will
not have to be replaced. As soon
as possible, contact the nearest
authorized GM or run-flat servicing
facility for inspection and repair or
replacement. When a tire is filled
with air, it provides a cushion
between the road and the wheel.
Because you will not have this
cushion when driving on a deflated
run-flat tire, try to avoid potholes
and other road hazards that could
damage the tire and/or wheel
beyond repair. When a tire has been
damaged, or if you have driven any
distance on a run-flat tire, check
with an authorized run-flat tire
service center to determine whether
the tire can be repaired or should be
replaced. To maintain your vehicle's
run-flat feature, all replacement tires
must be run-flat tires.
The valve stems on your run-flat
tires have sensors that are part of
the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS). See Tire Pressure Monitor
System on page 10‑68. These
sensors contain batteries which are
designed to last for 10 years under
normal driving conditions. See your
dealer if you ever need to have a
wheel replaced, or if the sensors
ever need replacement.
Low-Profile Tires
Low‐Profile Performance Tire
The original equipment tires on
your vehicle are classified as
low‐profile performance tires.
These tires are designed for
very responsive driving on wet
or dry pavement. You may also
notice more road noise with
low‐profile tires and that they
tend to wear faster.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-61
Notice: If the vehicle has
low‐profile tires, they are more
susceptible to damage from
road hazards or curb impact
than standard profile tires.
Tire and/or wheel assembly
damage can occur when
coming into contact with
road hazards like, potholes,
or sharp edged objects,
(B) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria
Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to
GM's specific tire performance
criteria have a TPC specification
code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet
or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
or when sliding into a curb.
The vehicle warranty does not
cover this type of damage.
Keep tires set to the correct
inflation pressure and, when
possible avoid contact with
curbs, potholes, and other
road hazards.
(C) DOT (Department
Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example
of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation
(DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size
is a combination of letters
and numbers used to define
a particular tire's width, height,
aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the
“Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a
tire is molded into its sidewall.
The example below shows a
typical passenger (p‐metric)
tire sidewall.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-62
Vehicle Care
(D) Tire Identification Number
(TIN): The letters and numbers
following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation
Load Limit: Maximum load
that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to
(B) Tire Width: The three‐digit
number indicates the tire section
width in millimeters from
sidewall to sidewall.
TIN shows the manufacturer and support that load.
plant code, tire size, and date
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit
number that indicates the tire
height‐to‐width measurements.
For example, if the tire size
aspect ratio is 60, as shown in
item C of the illustration, it would
mean that the tire's sidewall is
60 percent as high as it is wide.
Tire Designations
the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only
one side may have the date of
manufacture.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows
an example of a typical
passenger vehicle tire size.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type
of cord and number of plies in
the sidewall and under the tread.
(D) Construction Code: A
letter code is used to indicate
the type of ply construction in
the tire. The letter R means
radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or
bias ply construction; and the
letter B means belted‐bias ply
construction.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality
Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required
to grade tires based on three
performance factors: treadwear,
traction and temperature
resistance. For more information
see Uniform Tire Quality
(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:
The United States version of
a metric tire sizing system. The
letter P as the first character in
the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to
Grading on page 10‑76.
standards set by the U.S.
Tire and Rim Association.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-63
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of
the wheel in inches.
Accessory Weight: This
means the combined weight
of optional accessories.
Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic
transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire
in which the plies are laid at
alternate angles less than
90 degrees to the centerline
of the tread.
(F) Service Description: These
characters represent the load
index and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents
the load carrying capacity a tire
is certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a
tire is certified to carry a load.
Cold Tire Pressure: The
amount of air pressure in a tire,
measured in psi (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascal)
before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Tire Pressure
on page 10‑66.
conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship
of a tire's height to its width.
Tire Terminology and
Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount
of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch
of the tire. Air pressure is
Belt: A rubber coated layer of
cords that is located between
the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other
reinforcing materials.
Curb Weight: The weight of a
motor vehicle with standard and
optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel,
oil, and coolant, but without
passengers and cargo.
Bead: The tire bead contains
steel wires wrapped by steel
cords that hold the tire onto
the rim.
expressed in psi (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascal).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-64
Vehicle Care
DOT Markings: A code molded
into the sidewall of a tire
Intended Outboard Sidewall:
The side of an asymmetrical tire,
that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle
Weight: The sum of curb
weight, accessory weight,
vehicle capacity weight, and
production options weight.
signifying that the tire is in
compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation
(DOT) motor vehicle safety
standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
designator which can also
identify the tire manufacturer,
production plant, brand, and
date of production.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric
unit for air pressure.
Normal Occupant Weight: The
number of occupants a vehicle
is designed to seat multiplied by
68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑14.
Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: A
tire used on light duty trucks and
some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Occupant Distribution:
Designated seating positions.
Load Index: An assigned
number ranging from 1 to 279
that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The
side of an asymmetrical tire that
has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a
vehicle. The side of the tire
that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is
higher or deeper than the same
moldings on the other sidewall
of the tire.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9‑14.
Maximum Inflation Pressure:
The maximum air pressure to
which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is
molded onto the sidewall.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle
Weight Rating for the front axle.
See Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑14.
Maximum Load Rating:
The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation
pressure for that tire.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle
Weight Rating for the rear axle.
See Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑14.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-65
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A
tire used on passenger cars and
some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire
Quality Grading Standards):
A tire information system
that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire's traction,
temperature, and treadwear.
Ratings are determined
by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures.
The ratings are molded into
the sidewall of the tire.
Speed Rating: An
alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum
speed at which a tire can
operate.
Recommended Inflation
Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer's recommended
tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
See Tire Pressure on
Traction: The friction between
the tire and the road surface.
The amount of grip provided.
page 10‑66 and Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑14.
See Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 10‑76.
Tread: The portion of a tire
that comes into contact with
the road.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic
tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread.
Vehicle Capacity Weight:
The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by
68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated
cargo load. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑14.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called wear
bars, that show across the
tread of a tire when only 1.6 mm
(1/16 inch) of tread remains.
See When It Is Time for New
Tires on page 10‑72.
Rim: A metal support for a tire
and upon which the tire beads
are seated.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire: Load on an individual tire
due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and
cargo weight.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-66
Vehicle Care
.
Premature or
irregular wear.
Vehicle Placard: A label
permanently attached to
a vehicle showing the vehicle's
capacity weight and the
original equipment tire size
and recommended inflation
pressure. See “Tire and Loading
Information Label” under Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑14.
The recommended cold tire
inflation pressure, shown on the
label, is the minimum amount of
air pressure needed to support
your vehicle's maximum load
carrying capacity.
.
.
Poor handling.
Reduced fuel economy.
If your tires have too much air
(over‐inflation), you can get
the following:
For additional information
regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and an
example of the Tire and Loading
Information label, see Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑14.
How you load your vehicle
affects vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load your vehicle
with more weight than it was
designed to carry.
.
Unusual wear.
.
Poor handling.
Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount
of air pressure to operate
effectively.
.
Rough ride.
.
Needless damage from
road hazards.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell
you that under‐inflation or
over‐inflation is all right. It is
not. If your tires do not have
enough air (under‐inflation),
you can get the following:
A vehicle specific Tire and
Loading Information label
is attached to your vehicle.
This label shows your vehicle's
original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for
your tires when they are cold.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month
or more.
.
Tire overloading and
over-heating which could
lead to a blowout.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-67
How to Check
If you overfill the tire, release
air by pushing on the metal stem
in the center of the tire valve.
Re‐check the tire pressure with
the tire gauge.
WARNING (Continued)
Use a good quality pocket-type
gauge to check tire pressure.
You cannot tell if your tires
inflation pressure adjustment for
high speed operation. When
speed limits and road conditions
are such that a vehicle can be
driven at high speeds, make sure
the tires are rated for high speed
operation, in excellent condition,
and set to the correct cold tire
inflation pressure for the
are properly inflated simply by
looking at them. Radial tires may Be sure to put the valve caps
look properly inflated even when
they are under‐inflated. Check
the tire's inflation pressure when
the tires are cold. Cold means
your vehicle has been sitting for
at least three hours or driven no
more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by
keeping out dirt and moisture.
Tire Pressure for
High-Speed Operation
vehicle load.
If you will be driving your vehicle at
speeds of 175 mph (282 km/h) or
higher, where it is legal, set the cold
inflation pressure to the maximum
inflation pressure shown on the
tire sidewall, or 38 psi (265 kPa),
whichever is lower. See the
example following. When you end
this high-speed driving, return the
tires to the cold inflation pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑14.
WARNING
{
Remove the valve cap from the
tire valve stem. Press the tire
gauge firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement.
If the cold tire inflation pressure
matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and
Loading Information label, no
further adjustment is necessary.
If the inflation pressure is low,
add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h
(100 mph) or higher, puts an
additional strain on tires.
Sustained high-speed driving
causes excessive heat build up
and can cause sudden tire failure.
You could have a crash and you
or others could be killed. Some
high-speed rated tires require
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-68
Vehicle Care
Example:
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly
under‐inflated.
Tire Pressure Monitor
System
You will find the maximum load and
inflation pressure molded on the
tire's sidewall, in small letters,
near the rim flange. It will read
something like this: Maximum load
690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi)
Max. Press.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) uses radio and sensor
technology to check tire pressure
levels. The TPMS sensors monitor
the air pressure in your tires and
transmit tire pressure readings to a
receiver located in the vehicle.
Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them
to the proper pressure. Driving on
a significantly under‐inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Under‐inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and
tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping
ability.
For this example, you would set the
inflation pressure for high‐speed
driving at 38 psi (265 kPa).
Each tire, including the spare
(if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or
tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
Racing or other competitive driving
may affect the warranty coverage
of your vehicle. See your warranty
booklet for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-69
Please note that the TPMS is
not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct
tire pressure, even if under‐inflation
has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
The TPMS is designed to warn the
driver when a low tire pressure
condition exists. TPMS sensors
are mounted onto each tire and
wheel assembly on your vehicle.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air
pressure in the vehicle's tires and
transmits the tire pressure readings
to a receiver located in the vehicle.
Your vehicle has also been
equipped with a TPMS malfunction
indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start‐ups as
long as the malfunction exists.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 10‑69 for
additional information.
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and
Industry Canada
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑19 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS illuminates the low tire
pressure warning light, located
in the instrument panel cluster.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS
Standards RSS-210/220/310.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-70
Vehicle Care
If the warning light comes on, stop
as soon as possible and inflate
the tires to the recommended
pressure shown on the tire loading
information label. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑14.
The low tire pressure warning light
may come on in cool weather when
the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This
could be an early indicator that the
air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the
proper pressure.
Your vehicle's TPMS can warn you
about a low tire pressure condition
but it does not replace normal tire
maintenance. See Tire Inspection
on page 10‑72, Tire Rotation on
page 10‑72, When It Is Time for
New Tires on page 10‑72, and Tires
on page 10‑58.
At the same time a message to
check the pressure in a specific tire
appears on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) display. The low tire
pressure warning light and the DIC
warning message appear at each
ignition cycle until the tires are
inflated to the correct inflation
A Tire and Loading Information
label, attached to your vehicle,
shows the size of your vehicle's
original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressure for your
vehicle's tires when they are cold.
See Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑14, for an example of the
Tire and Loading Information label
and its location on your vehicle.
Also see Tire Pressure on
Notice: Tire sealant materials are
not all the same. A non-approved
tire sealant could damage the Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors. TPMS sensor damage
caused by using an incorrect tire
sealant is not covered by the
vehicle warranty. Always use only
the GM approved tire sealant
available through your dealer
or included in the vehicle.
pressure. Using the DIC, tire
pressure levels can be viewed by
the driver. For additional information
and details about the DIC operation
and displays see Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑25 and Tire
Messages on page 5‑51.
page 10‑66 for additional
information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-71
.
One or more TPMS sensors
are missing or damaged. Under
these conditions the TPMS
malfunction light (low tire
warning light) comes on, and at
the same time the DIC message
is displayed. The DIC message
and TPMS malfunction light
should go off once the TPMS
sensors are installed and the
sensor matching process is
performed successfully.
If the TPMS is not functioning it
cannot detect or signal a low tire
condition. See your dealer for
service if the TPMS malfunction
light and DIC message comes on
and stays on.
TPMS Malfunction Light and
Message
The TPMS will not function properly
if one or more of the TPMS sensors
are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the
low tire warning light flashes for
about one minute and then stays
on for the remainder of the ignition
cycle. A DIC warning message is
also displayed. The low tire warning
light and DIC warning message
come on at each ignition cycle until
the problem is corrected. Some of
the conditions that can cause the
malfunction light and DIC message
to come on are:
TPMS Sensor Matching
Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique
identification code. Any time you
replace one or more of the TPMS
sensors or rotate your vehicle's
tires, the identification codes will
need to be matched to the new
tire/wheel position. The sensors
are matched to the tire/wheel
positions in the following order:
driver side front tire, passenger side
front tire, passenger side rear tire,
and driver side rear tire using a
TPMS diagnostic tool. See your
dealer for service.
.
Replacement tires or wheels do
not match your vehicle's original
equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those
recommended for your vehicle
could prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. See Buying
New Tires on page 10‑73.
.
The TPMS sensor matching
process was not done or not
completed successfully. The DIC
message should go off after
successfully completing the
sensor matching process.
.
Operating electronic devices or
being near facilities using radio
wave frequencies similar to the
TPMS could cause the TPMS
sensors to malfunction.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-72
Vehicle Care
.
The tread or sidewall is
cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord
or fabric.
Tire Inspection
When It Is Time for New
Tires
We recommend that you
regularly inspect your vehicle's
tires, including the spare tire,
if the vehicle has one, for signs
of wear or damage at least once
a month.
Various factors, such as
maintenance, temperatures, driving
speeds, vehicle loading, and road
conditions influence when you need
new tires.
.
.
The tire has a bump, bulge,
or split.
The tire has a puncture, cut,
or other damage that cannot
be repaired well because of
the size or location of the
damage.
Always remove the tires if
any of the following statements
are true:
.
You can see the indicators at
three or more places around
the tire.
Tire Rotation
The tires on your vehicle are
different sizes front to rear.
Due to this, the tires should
not be rotated. Each tire and
wheel should be used only in
the position it is in.
.
You can see cord or fabric
showing through the tire's
rubber.
One way to tell when it is time for
new tires is to check the treadwear
indicators, which appear when the
tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
or less of tread remaining.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-73
See Tire Inspection on page 10‑72
and Tire Rotation on page 10‑72 for
additional information.
Vehicle Storage
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched
specific tires for your vehicle.
The original equipment tires
Tires age when stored normally
mounted on a parked vehicle.
Park a vehicle that will be stored
for at least a month in a cool, dry,
clean area away from direct sunlight
to slow aging. This area should be
free of grease, gasoline, or other
substances that can deteriorate
rubber.
The rubber in tires ages over time.
This is also true for the spare tire,
if the vehicle has one, even if it is
not being used. Multiple conditions
affect how fast this aging takes
place, including temperatures,
loading conditions, and inflation
pressure maintenance. Tires will
typically need to be replaced due
to wear before they may need to be
replaced due to age. Consult the tire
manufacturer for more information
on when tires should be replaced.
installed on your vehicle, when it
was new, were designed to meet
General Motors Tire Performance
Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
system rating. If you need
replacement tires, GM strongly
recommends that you get tires
with the same TPC Spec rating.
This way, your vehicle will continue
to have tires that are designed to
give the same performance and
vehicle safety, during normal use,
as the original tires.
Parking for an extended period
can cause flat spots on the tires
that may result in vibrations while
driving. When storing a vehicle for
at least a month, remove the tires
or raise the vehicle to reduce the
weight from the tires.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-74
Vehicle Care
GM's exclusive TPC Spec system
considers over a dozen critical
specifications that impact the
overall performance of your
WARNING
WARNING
{
{
Tires could explode during
improper service. You or others
could be injured or killed if you
attempt to mount or dismount
a tire. Only your dealer or an
authorized tire service center
should mount and dismount the
tires.
Mixing tires could cause you to
lose control while driving. If you
mix tires of different sizes (other
than those originally installed on
your vehicle), brands, or types
(radial and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle properly,
and you could have a crash.
Using tires of different sizes
(other than those originally
installed on your vehicle), brands
or types, may also cause damage
to your vehicle. Be sure to use
the correct size, brand, and type
tires on all four wheels.
vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling,
traction control, and tire pressure
monitoring performance. GM's TPC
Spec number is molded onto the
tire's sidewall near the tire size.
If the tires have an all‐season
tread design, the TPC Spec number
will be followed by an MS for mud
and snow. See Tire Sidewall
Labeling on page 10‑61, for
Winter tires with the same speed
rating as your original equipment
tires may not be available for H, V,
W, Y and ZR speed rated tires.
If you choose snow tires with a
lower speed rating, never exceed
the tire's maximum speed capability.
additional information.
GM recommends replacing tires in
sets of four. This is because uniform
tread depth on all tires will help
keep your vehicle performing most
like it did when the tires were new.
Replacing less than a full set of
tires can affect the braking and
handling performance of your
vehicle. See Tire Inspection on
page 10‑72 and Tire Rotation on
page 10‑72.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-75
get with TPC Spec rated tires.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 10‑69.
WARNING
WARNING
{
{
If you add different sized wheels,
your vehicle may not provide
an acceptable level of
If you use bias-ply tires on the
vehicle, the wheel rim flanges
could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail
suddenly, causing a crash.
Use only radial-ply tires with
the wheels on the vehicle.
Your vehicle's original equipment
tires are listed on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑14,
for more information about the Tire
and Loading Information label and
its location on your vehicle.
performance and safety if
tires not recommended for those
wheels are selected. You may
increase the chance that you will
crash and suffer serious injury.
Only use GM specific wheel and
tire systems developed for your
vehicle, and have them properly
installed by a GM certified
technician.
Different Size Tires and
Wheels
If you must replace your vehicle's
tires with those that do not have a
TPC Spec number, make sure they
are the same size, load range,
speed rating, and construction type
(radial and bias‐belted tires) as your
vehicle's original tires.
If you add wheels or tires that are
a different size than your original
equipment wheels and tires, this
could affect the way your vehicle
performs, including its braking,
ride and handling characteristics,
stability, and resistance to rollover.
Additionally, if your vehicle has
electronic systems such as antilock
brakes, rollover airbags, traction
control, and electronic stability
control, the performance of these
systems can be affected.
See Buying New Tires on
page 10‑73 and Accessories and
Modifications on page 10‑4 for
additional information.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure
monitoring system could give an
inaccurate low‐pressure warning
if non‐TPC Spec rated tires are
installed on it. Non‐TPC Spec rated
tires may give a low‐pressure
warning that is higher or lower than
the proper warning level you would
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-76
Vehicle Care
Quality Grading (UTQG)
Treadwear
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading
Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
For example:
system does not apply to deep
tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal
rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based
on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified
government test course.
limited-production tires.
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and a
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
While the tires available on
General Motors passenger cars
and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they
must also conform to federal
safety requirements and
additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
half (1½) times as well on the
government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in
driving habits, service practices
and differences in road
The following information relates
to the system developed by the
United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA), which grades tires
by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance.
This applies only to vehicles
sold in the United States.
The grades are molded on
the sidewalls of most passenger
car tires. The Uniform Tire
All Passenger Car Tires Must
Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements In Addition To
These Grades.
characteristics and climate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-77
Traction – AA, A, B, C
tested under controlled
conditions on a specified
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance
The traction grades, from
highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent
the tire's ability to stop on
wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions
on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life,
and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B
and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum
required by law. Warning: The
temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
The tires and wheels on the vehicle
were aligned and balanced carefully
at the factory to give the longest tire
life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and
tire balancing will not be necessary
on a regular basis. However, if there
is unusual tire wear or the vehicle
pulls to one side or the other, the
alignment should be checked. If the
vehicle vibrates when driving on a
smooth road, the tires and wheels
might need to be rebalanced. See
your dealer for proper diagnosis.
Temperature – A, B, C
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades
are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire's resistance
to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-78
Vehicle Care
If you need to replace any of your
wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts,
replace them only with new GM
original equipment parts. This way,
you will be sure to have the right
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent,
cracked, or badly rusted or
corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and
wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it
(except some aluminum wheels,
which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these
conditions exist.
WARNING
{
Putting a used wheel on the
vehicle is dangerous. You cannot
know how it has been used or
how far it has been driven.
It could fail suddenly and cause
a crash. If you have to replace a
wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
WARNING
{
Using the wrong replacement
wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the
braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air
and make you lose control. You
could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured.
Always use the correct wheel,
wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
replacement.
Your dealer will know the kind of
wheel you need.
Notice: The wrong wheel can
also cause problems with
bearing life, brake cooling,
speedometer or odometer
calibration, headlamp aim,
bumper height, vehicle ground
clearance, and tire clearance to
the body and chassis.
Each new wheel should have
the same load-carrying capacity,
diameter, width, offset, and be
mounted the same way as the
one it replaces.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-79
Tightening Wheel Lug Nuts
Notice: Improperly tightened
wheel nuts can lead to brake
pulsation and rotor damage.
To avoid expensive brake repairs,
evenly tighten the wheel nuts in
the proper sequence and to the
proper torque specification.
WARNING
{
WARNING
{
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or
on the parts to which it is
fastened, can make wheel
nuts become loose after a
time. The wheel could come
off and cause a crash. When
you change a wheel, remove
any rust or dirt from places
where the wheel attaches to
the vehicle. In an emergency,
you can use a cloth or a paper
towel to do this; but be sure to
use a scraper or wire brush
later, if you need to, to get all
the rust or dirt off.
Never use oil or grease on studs
or the threads of the wheel nuts.
If you do, the wheel nuts might
come loose and the wheel could
fall off, causing a crash.
WARNING
{
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause
the wheel to become loose and
even come off. This could lead
to a crash. Be sure to use the
correct wheel nuts. If you have
to replace them, be sure to get
new GM original equipment
wheel nuts.
Tighten the wheel lug nuts firmly in
a crisscross sequence as shown.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-80
Vehicle Care
Tire Chains
If a Tire Goes Flat
WARNING (Continued)
It is unusual for a tire to blow out
while you are driving, especially if
you maintain the tires properly. If air
goes out of a tire, it is much more
likely to leak out slowly. See Tires
on page 10‑58 for additional
information. But if you should ever
have a blowout, here are a few tips
about what to expect and what
to do:
WARNING
{
manufacturer recommends it for
use on the vehicle and tire size
combination and road conditions.
Follow that manufacturer's
instructions. To help avoid
damage to the vehicle, drive
slowly, re‐adjust or remove the
device if it is contacting the
vehicle, and do not spin the
wheels. If you do find traction
devices that will fit, install them
on the rear tires.
Do not use tire chains. There is
not enough clearance. Tire chains
used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes,
suspension, or other vehicle
parts. The area damaged by
the tire chains could cause
you to lose control of the vehicle
and you or others may be injured
in a crash. Use another type
of traction device only if its
If a front tire fails, the flat tire
creates a drag that pulls the vehicle
toward that side. Take your foot
off the accelerator pedal and grip
the steering wheel firmly. Steer to
maintain lane position, and then
gently brake to a stop, well off the
road, if possible.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-81
A rear blowout, particularly on a
curve, acts much like a skid and
may require the same correction
you would use in a skid. In any rear
blowout remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle
under control by steering the way
you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you
can still steer. Gently brake to a
stop, well off the road, if possible.
The vehicle, when new, had run-flat
tires. This type of tire can operate
effectively with no air pressure, so
you will not need to stop on the side
of the road to change a flat tire.
You can just keep on driving. The
shorter the distance you drive and
the slower the speed, the greater
the chance that the run-flat tire will
not have to be replaced. Run-flat
tires perform so well without any air
that a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) is used to alert you if a tire
has lost pressure. See Run-Flat
Tires on page 10‑59 and Tire
WARNING
{
Special tools and procedures
are required to service a run-flat
tire. If these special tools and
procedures are not used you
or others could be injured and
the vehicle could be damaged.
Always be sure the proper tools
and procedures, as described in
the service manual, are used.
The vehicle has no spare tire, no
tire changing equipment, and no
place to store a tire.
To order a service manual, see
Service Publications Ordering
Information on page 13‑15.
Pressure Monitor System on
page 10‑68.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-82
Vehicle Care
Notice: If you try to start your
vehicle by pushing or pulling it,
you could damage your vehicle.
Do not push or pull your vehicle
to start it; instead, use the jump
starting procedure in this manual
to start your vehicle when the
battery has run down.
You would not be able to start
your vehicle, and the bad
grounding could damage the
electrical systems.
Jump Starting
For more information about the
vehicle battery, see Battery on
page 10‑43.
To avoid the possibility of the
vehicles rolling, set the parking
brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the jump start
procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a
manual transmission in Neutral
before setting the parking
brakes.
If your battery has run down, you
may want to use another vehicle
and some jumper cables to start
your vehicle. Be sure to use the
following steps to do it safely.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must
have a 12-volt battery with a
negative ground system.
WARNING
{
Notice: If the other vehicle's
system is not a 12-volt system
with a negative ground, both
vehicles can be damaged. Only
use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump
start your vehicle.
Batteries can hurt you. They can
be dangerous because:
Notice: If you leave the radio or
other accessories on during the
jump starting procedure, they
could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by the
warranty. Always turn off the
radio and other accessories when
jump starting the vehicle.
.
They contain acid that can
burn you.
.
They contain gas that can
2. Get the vehicles close enough
so the jumper cables can reach,
but be sure the vehicles are not
touching each other. If they
explode or ignite.
.
They contain enough
electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps
exactly, some or all of these
things can hurt you.
are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-83
3. Turn off the ignition on both
vehicles. Unplug unnecessary
accessories plugged into the
cigarette lighter or the accessory
power outlet. Turn off the radio
and all lamps that are not
The remote negative (−)
terminal (B) is located
underneath the engine cover,
below the engine oil fill cap.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 10‑10
for the location of the engine
compartment fuse block and
engine oil fill cap.
needed. This will avoid sparks
and help save both batteries.
And it could save the radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the
positive (+) and negative (−)
terminal locations on each
vehicle.
You will not need to access
the battery for jump starting.
The remote terminals are for
that purpose.
6.2 L LS3 shown, 7.0 L LS7 and
6.2 L LS9 similar
Your vehicle has a remote
positive (+) terminal (A) and a
remote negative (−) terminal (B),
as shown in the illustration,
which should be used to jump
start your vehicle.
WARNING
{
An electric fan can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
The remote positive (+)
terminal (A) can be accessed by
opening the cover of the engine
compartment fuse block.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-84
Vehicle Care
WARNING
negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal on the
dead battery because this can
cause sparks.
WARNING
{
{
Using an open flame near a
battery can cause battery gas to
explode. People have been hurt
doing this, and some have been
blinded. Use a flashlight if you
need more light.
Fans or other moving engine
parts can injure you badly. Keep
your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
6. Connect the red positive (+)
cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the dead battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
5. Check that the jumper cables
do not have loose or missing
insulation. If they do, you could
get a shock. The vehicles could
be damaged too.
Be sure the battery has enough
water. You do not need to add
water to the battery installed in
your new vehicle. But if a battery
has filler caps, be sure the right
amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that
first. If you do not, explosive gas
could be present.
7. Do not let the other end touch
metal. Connect it to the
positive (+) terminal of the
good battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
Before you connect the cables,
here are some basic things you
should know. Positive (+) will go
to positive (+) or to a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine
part or to a remote negative (−)
terminal if the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black
negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the
good battery. Use a remote
negative (−) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
Battery fluid contains acid that
can burn you. Do not get it on
you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush
the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
Do not let the other end touch
anything until the next step.
The other end of the negative (−)
cable does not go to the dead
battery. It goes to a heavy,
Do not connect positive (+) to
negative (−) or you will get a
short that would damage the
battery and maybe other parts
too. And do not connect the
unpainted metal engine part or
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-85
to a remote negative (−) terminal
on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always connect and remove the
jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other
or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables
from both vehicles, do the following:
1. Disconnect the black
negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead
battery.
9. Connect the other end of the
negative (−) cable at least 45 cm
(18 inches) away from the dead
battery, but not near engine
2. Disconnect the black
negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there,
and the chance of sparks getting
back to the battery is much less.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+)
cable from the vehicle with the
good battery.
Your vehicle has a remote
negative (−) terminal for this
purpose.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+)
cable from the other vehicle.
10. Now start the vehicle with
the good battery and run the
engine for a while.
5. Return the engine fuse block
cover to its original position.
6. You may also need to initialize
the power windows. See “Power
Window Initialize” under Power
Windows on page 2‑17 for more
information.
11. Try to start the vehicle that
had the dead battery. If it will
not start after a few tries, it
probably needs service.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine
Part or Remote Negative (−)
Terminal
Notice: If the jumper cables are
connected or removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting
may occur and damage the
B. Good Battery or Remote
Positive (+) and Negative (−)
Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote
Positive (+) Terminal
vehicle. The repairs would not be
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-86
Vehicle Care
Recreational Vehicle
Towing
Notice: Dolly towing or dinghy
towing the vehicle may cause
damage because of reduced
ground clearance. Always put
the vehicle on a flatbed truck or
trailer.
Towing
Appearance Care
Towing the Vehicle
Exterior Care
Notice: To avoid damage,
the disabled vehicle should
be towed with all four wheels
off the ground. Care must be
taken with vehicles that have
low ground clearance and/or
special equipment.
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will
make them last longer, seal better,
and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth.
During very cold, damp weather
frequent application may be
The vehicle was neither designed
nor intended to be towed with any
of its wheels on the ground. If the
vehicle must be towed, see Towing
the Vehicle on page 10‑86.
required. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 11‑6.
Consult your dealer or a
professional towing service if the
disabled vehicle must be towed.
See Roadside Assistance Program
(United States and Canada) on
page 13‑8 or Roadside Assistance
Program (Mexico) on page 13‑10.
Washing the Vehicle
The best way to preserve the
vehicle's finish is to keep it clean
by washing it often.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain
chemicals that can damage the
emblems or nameplates on the
vehicle. Check the cleaning
product label. If it states that it
should not be used on plastic
parts, do not use it on the vehicle
or damage may occur and it
would not be covered by the
warranty.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-87
Do not wash the vehicle in direct
sunlight. Use a car washing soap.
Do not use cleaning agents that
are petroleum based or that contain
acid or abrasives, as they can
damage the paint, metal or plastic
on the vehicle. Approved cleaning
products can be obtained from your
dealer. Follow all manufacturers'
directions regarding correct
Notice: If you drive the vehicle
through an automatic car wash
that does not have enough
clearance for the wide rear tires
and wheels, you could damage
the vehicle. Verify with the
manager of the car wash that the
vehicle will fit before entering the
car wash or use a touchless
car wash.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing
of the vehicle by hand may be
necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. Approved cleaning
products can be obtained from your
dealer.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat
gives more depth and gloss to the
colored basecoat. Always use
waxes and polishes that are
product usage, necessary safety
precautions and appropriate
disposal of any vehicle care
product.
High pressure car washes may
cause water to enter the vehicle.
Avoid using high pressure washes
closer than 12 inches (30 cm) to
the surface of the vehicle. Use of
power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or
removal of paint and decals.
non-abrasive and made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
Rinse the vehicle well, before
washing and after to remove all
cleaning agents completely. If they
are allowed to dry on the surface,
they could stain.
Notice: Machine compounding
or aggressive polishing on a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
may damage it. Use only
non-abrasive waxes and polishes
that are made for a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish on the
vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior
Lamps/Lenses
Dry the finish with a soft, clean
chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and water
spotting.
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a
soft cloth and a car washing soap
to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing
the Vehicle”.
Foreign materials such as calcium
chloride and other salts, ice melting
agents, road oil and tar, tree sap,
bird droppings, chemicals from
industrial chimneys, etc., can
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-88
Vehicle Care
damage the vehicle's finish if they
remain on painted surfaces. Wash
the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive
cleaners that are marked safe for
painted surfaces to remove foreign
matter.
Use special care with aluminum
trim. To avoid damaging protective
trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam or caustic soap
to clean aluminum. A coating
of wax, rubbed to high polish,
is recommended for all bright
metal parts.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield
with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint
free cloth or paper towel soaked
with windshield washer fluid or a
mild detergent. Wash the windshield
thoroughly when cleaning the
blades. Bugs, road grime, sap
and a buildup of vehicle wash/
wax treatments may cause wiper
streaking. Replace the wiper blades
if they are worn or damaged.
Exterior painted surfaces are
subject to aging, weather and
chemical fallout that can take their
toll over a period of years. To help
keep the paint finish looking new,
keep the vehicle garaged or
ZR1 Carbon Fiber Panels
Carbon fiber panels can be washed
and waxed like any other panels.
Use a clear or black pigmented wax
on the inner hood carbon fiber
panel.
covered whenever possible.
Wipers can be damaged by:
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal
Parts
.
Extreme dusty conditions
ZR1 Hood Window
.
Sand and salt
Bright metal parts should be
The hood window on the ZR1 can
be cleaned in the same manner as
the headlamp lenses. See “Cleaning
Exterior Lamps/Lenses” for more
information.
cleaned regularly to keep their
luster. Washing with water is all that
is usually needed. However, chrome
polish may be used on chrome or
stainless steel trim, if necessary.
.
Heat and sun
.
Snow and ice, without proper
removal
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-89
Chemicals used for ice and snow
removal and dust control can collect
on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can
develop on the underbody parts
such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though
they have corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these
materials from the underbody
with plain water. Clean any areas
where mud and debris can collect.
Dirt packed in close areas of the
frame should be loosened before
being flushed. Your dealer or an
underbody car washing system
can do this.
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush
with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based
tire dressing products on the
vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying
a tire dressing, always wipe off
any overspray from all painted
surfaces on the vehicle.
At least every spring, flush these
materials from the underbody
with plain water. Clean any areas
where mud and debris can collect.
Dirt packed in close areas of the
frame should be loosened before
being flushed. Your dealer or an
underbody car washing system
can do this.
Fiberglass Springs
(Composite Springs)
Finish Damage
Notice: If you use acidic or
corrosive cleaning products,
engine degreasers or aluminum
cleaning agents on fiberglass
springs, you may damage the
springs. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty.
Use only approved cleaners when
cleaning your vehicle's fiberglass
springs.
Any stone chips, fractures or deep
scratches in the finish should be
repaired right away. Bare metal will
corrode quickly and may develop
into major repair expense.
Underbody Maintenance
Minor chips and scratches can be
repaired with touch-up materials
available from your dealer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be
corrected in your dealer's/retailer's
body and paint shop.
Chemicals used for ice and snow
removal and dust control can collect
on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can
develop on the underbody parts
such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though
they have corrosion protection.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-90
Vehicle Care
recommended to remove particles
from the upholstery. It is important to
keep the upholstery from becoming
and remaining heavily soiled. Soils
should be removed as quickly as
possible. The vehicle's interior may
experience extremes of heat that
could cause stains to set rapidly.
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners
when cleaning glass surfaces on
the vehicle, could scratch the
glass and/or cause damage to
the rear window defogger. When
cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass
cleaner.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric
conditions can create a chemical
fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall
upon and attack painted surfaces on
the vehicle. This damage can take
two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped
discolorations, and small, irregular
dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Lighter colored interiors may
Many cleaners contain solvents that
may become concentrated in the
vehicle's breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to
all safety instructions on the label.
While cleaning the vehicle's interior,
maintain adequate ventilation by
opening the vehicle's doors and
windows.
require more frequent cleaning.
Use care because newspapers and
garments that transfer color to home
furnishings may also transfer color
to the vehicle's interior.
Although no defect in the paint job
causes this, we will repair, at no
charge to the owner, the surfaces
of new vehicles damaged by this
fallout condition within 12 months
or 20 000 km (12,000 miles) of
purchase, whichever occurs first.
When cleaning the vehicle's interior,
only use cleaners specifically
designed for the surfaces being
cleaned. Permanent damage may
result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not
intended. Use glass cleaner only
on glass. Remove any accidental
over-spray from other surfaces
immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the
Dust may be removed from small
buttons and knobs using a small
brush with soft bristles.
Interior Care
The vehicle's interior will continue to
look its best if it is cleaned often.
Although not always visible, dust
and dirt can accumulate on the
upholstery. Dirt can damage
Products that remove odors from
the vehicle's upholstery and clean
the vehicle's glass can be obtained
from your dealer.
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic
surfaces. Regular vacuuming is
cleaning cloth.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-91
Do not clean the vehicle using:
3. Start on the outside edge of the
soil and gently rub toward the
center. Continue cleaning, using
a clean area of the cloth each
time it becomes soiled.
Fabric/Carpet
.
A knife or any other sharp object
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft
brush attachment frequently to
remove dust and loose dirt.
to remove a soil from any interior
surface.
A canister vacuum with a beater bar
in the nozzle may only be used on
floor carpet and carpeted floor mats.
For any soil, always try to remove it
first with plain water or club soda.
Before cleaning, gently remove as
much of the soil as possible using
one of the following techniques:
.
A stiff brush. It can cause
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled
area until the cleaning cloth
remains clean.
damage to the vehicle's interior
surfaces.
.
Heavy pressure or aggressive
5. If the soil is not completely
removed, use a mild soap
solution and repeat the cleaning
process that was used with plain
water.
rubbing with a cleaning cloth.
Use of heavy pressure can
damage the interior and does
not improve the effectiveness
of soil removal.
.
For liquids: gently blot the
remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb
into the paper towel until no
more can be removed.
If any of the soil remains, a
.
Laundry detergents or
commercial fabric cleaner or spot
lifter may be necessary. When a
commercial upholstery cleaner or
spot lifter is to be used, test a small
hidden area for colorfastness first.
If the locally cleaned area gives any
impression that a ring formation may
result, clean the entire surface.
dishwashing soaps with
degreasers can leave residue
that streaks and attracts dirt.
For liquid cleaners, about
20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of
water is a good guide. Use only
mild, neutral-pH soaps.
.
For solid dry soils: remove as
much as possible and then
vacuum.
To clean:
.
Too much cleaner that saturates
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white
cloth with water or club soda.
After the cleaning process has been
completed, a paper towel can be
used to blot excess moisture from
the fabric or carpet.
the upholstery.
.
Organic solvents such as
2. Wring the cloth to remove
excess moisture.
naptha, alcohol, etc. that can
damage the vehicle's interior.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-92
Vehicle Care
preserve and protect leather
and protect soft plastic surfaces
may permanently change the
appearance and feel of the interior
and are not recommended. Do not
use silicone or wax-based products,
or those containing organic solvents
to clean the vehicle's interior
because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the
gloss in a non-uniform manner.
Coated Moldings
may permanently change the
appearance and feel of the leather
and are not recommended. Do not
use silicone or wax-based products,
or those containing organic
solvents to clean the vehicle's
interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss
in a non-uniform manner. Never use
shoe polish on leather.
These moldings are around the
hatch opening in the rear area.
.
When lightly soiled, wipe with a
sponge or soft lint-free cloth
dampened with water.
.
When heavily soiled, use warm
soapy water.
Leather
Some commercial products may
increase gloss on the instrument
panel. The increase in gloss may
cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult
to see through the windshield under
certain conditions.
A soft cloth dampened with water
can be used to remove dust.
If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a soft cloth dampened
with a mild soap solution can be
used. Allow the leather to dry
naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
Never use steam to clean leather.
Never use spot lifters or spot
removers on leather. Many
Instrument Panel, Vinyl and
other Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water
may be used to remove dust.
If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a clean soft cloth
dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove
dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters
or removers on plastic surfaces.
Many commercial cleaners and
coatings that are sold to preserve
Cargo Cover and
Convenience Net
Wash with warm water and mild
detergent, rinse with cold water
and tumble dry on low. Do not use
chlorine bleach.
commercial leather cleaners
and coatings that are sold to
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-93
.
Use the floor mat with the
correct side up. Do not turn
it over.
Care of Safety Belts
WARNING (Continued)
Keep belts clean and dry.
Interference with the pedals can
cause unintended acceleration
and/or increased stopping
distance which can cause a crash
and injury. Make sure the floor
mat does not interfere with the
accelerator or brake pedal.
.
.
.
Do not place anything on top of
the driver side floor mat.
WARNING
{
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
It may severely weaken them.
In a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Use only a single floor mat on
the driver side.
Do not place one floor mat on
top of another.
The driver side floor mat is held in
place by two hook-type retainers
and the passenger side is held in
place by one.
Use the following guidelines for
proper floor mat usage.
Floor Mats
.
The original equipment floor
mats were designed for your
vehicle. If the floor mats need
replacing, it is recommended
that GM certified floor mats be
purchased. Non-GM floor mats
may not fit properly and may
interefere with the accelerator or
brake pedal. Always check that
the floor mats do not interfere
with the pedals.
WARNING
{
If a floor mat is the wrong size or
is not properly installed, it can
interfere with the accelerator
pedal and/or brake pedal.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-94
Vehicle Care
Installing and Replacing the
Floor Mats
1. Pull up on the rear of the floor
mat to remove it from the hook
retainers.
2. Reinstall by lining up the
openings in the floor mat over
the hook retainers and push
down into position.
3. Make sure the floor mat is
properly secured and verify that
it does not interfere with the
accelerator or brake pedals.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
11-1
Because of all the different ways
people use vehicles, maintenance
needs vary. The vehicle might need
more frequent checks and services.
Please read the information under
Scheduled Maintenance. To keep
the vehicle in good condition, see
your dealer.
General Information
Notice: Maintenance
Service and
Maintenance
intervals, checks, inspections,
recommended fluids, and
lubricants are necessary to
keep this vehicle in good
working condition. Damage
caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance might
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
General Information
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Scheduled Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-2
The maintenance schedule is for
vehicles that:
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Maintenance Replacement
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
.
Carry passengers and cargo
within recommended limits on
the Tire and Loading Information
label. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9‑14.
As the vehicle owner, you are
responsible for the scheduled
maintenance in this section.
We recommend having your
dealer perform these services.
Proper vehicle maintenance helps
to keep the vehicle in good working
condition, improves fuel economy,
and reduces vehicle emissions for
better air quality.
.
Are driven on reasonable road
surfaces within legal driving
limits.
Maintenance Records
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 11-9
.
Use the recommended fuel.
See Recommended Fuel on
page 9‑48.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-2
Service and Maintenance
At your dealer, you can be
Scheduled
Maintenance
When the Change Engine Oil
Message Displays
WARNING
{
certain that you will receive the
highest level of service available.
Your dealer has specially trained
service technicians, uses genuine
replacement parts, as well as,
up‐to‐date tools and equipment
to ensure fast and accurate
diagnostics.
Performing maintenance work can
be dangerous. Some jobs can
cause serious injury. Perform
maintenance work only if you
have the required know-how and
the proper tools and equipment.
If in doubt, see your dealer to
have a qualified technician do
the work. See Doing Your Own
Service Work on page 10‑8.
Change engine oil and filter.
See Engine Oil on page 10‑15.
An Emission Control Service.
The proper replacement parts,
fluids, and lubricants to use are
listed in Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 11‑6 and
Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 11‑8. We recommend the use
of genuine parts from your dealer.
When the CHANGE OIL SOON
message displays, service is
required for the vehicle as soon
as possible, within the next
1 000 km/600 miles. If driving
under the best conditions, the
engine oil life system might not
indicate the need for vehicle service
for more than a year. The engine
oil and filter must be changed
at least once a year and the oil
life system must be reset.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
11-3
.
.
.
Windshield washer fluid level
check. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑37.
Brake system inspection
(or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first).
Your dealer has trained service
technicians who will perform this
work and reset the system. If the
engine oil life system is reset
accidentally, service the vehicle
within 5 000 km/3,000 miles since
the last service. Reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed.
See Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑22.
.
.
Windshield wiper blade
Steering and suspension
inspection. Visual inspection
for damaged, loose, or missing
parts or signs of wear.
inspection for wear, cracking,
or contamination and windshield
and wiper blade cleaning,
if contaminated. See Exterior
Care on page 10‑86. Worn
or damaged wiper blade
Body hinges and latches,
key lock cylinders, any
folding seat hardware, and
rear compartment, hood,
and console door hinges
and latches lubrication.
See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 11‑6.
More frequent lubrication may
be required when the vehicle
is exposed to a corrosive
environment. Applying silicone
grease on weatherstrips with a
clean cloth makes them last
longer, seal better, and not stick
or squeak.
replacement. See Wiper Blade
Replacement on page 10‑46.
Every Engine Oil Change
.
Change engine oil and
.
Tire inflation pressures
check. See Tire Pressure on
page 10‑66.
filter. Reset oil life system.
See Engine Oil on page 10‑15
and Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑22. An Emission
Control Service.
.
.
Tire wear inspection. See Tire
Inspection on page 10‑72.
.
Fluids visual leak check
Engine coolant level check.
(or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first). A leak in any
system must be repaired and
the fluid level checked.
See Engine Coolant on
page 10‑29.
.
Engine cooling system
inspection. Visual inspection
of hoses, pipes, fittings, and
clamps and replacement,
if needed.
.
.
Engine air cleaner filter
inspection. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑24.
Restraint system component
check. See Safety System
Check on page 3‑21.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-4
Service and Maintenance
.
Fuel system inspection for
damage or leaks.
Once a Year
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 40 000 km/25,000 Miles
.
See Starter Switch Check on
.
Exhaust system and nearby heat
shields inspection for loose or
damaged components.
.
page 10‑44.
Passenger compartment
air filter replacement (or every
24 months, whichever occurs
first). More frequent replacement
may be needed if you drive
in areas with heavy traffic,
areas with poor air quality,
or areas with high dust levels.
Replacement may also be
needed if you notice reduced
air flow, windows fogging up,
or odors. Your dealer can help
you determine when it is the
right time to replace the filter.
.
.
.
.
See Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Control Function
Check on page 10‑45.
Additional Required Services
At Each Fuel Stop
See Park Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check on
page 10‑45.
.
Engine oil level check.
See Engine Oil on page 10‑15.
Accelerator pedal check for
damage, high effort, or binding.
Replace if needed.
.
Engine coolant level check.
See Engine Coolant on
page 10‑29.
Underbody flushing service.
.
Windshield washer fluid level
check. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑37.
Once Every Two Years
.
ZR1 Only: Engine air cleaner
filter replacement. See Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑24.
.
Clutch hydraulic system drain,
flush, and refill. Service at a
regular service interval every
two years. This service can
be complex; have your dealer
perform this service. See
Once a Month
.
Tire inflation check. See Tire
Pressure on page 10‑66.
.
Tire wear inspection. See Tire
Inspection on page 10‑72 and
Tire Rotation on page 10‑72.
Hydraulic Clutch on page 10‑24.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
11-5
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 80 000 km/50,000 Miles
The U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency or the
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 240 000 km/150,000 Miles
California Air Resources Board
has determined that the failure
to perform this maintenance
item will not nullify the emission
warranty or limit recall liability
prior to the completion of
the vehicle's useful life.
We, however, urge that all
recommended maintenance
services be performed at the
indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
.
.
Engine air cleaner filter
replacement. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑24.
Engine cooling system drain,
flush, and refill (or every five
years, whichever occurs first).
See Engine Coolant on
page 10‑29. An Emission
Control Service.
.
Automatic transmission fluid
change (severe service)
for vehicles mainly driven
in heavy city traffic in hot
weather, in hilly or mountainous
terrain, when frequently towing
a trailer, or used for taxi,
police, or delivery service.
See Automatic Transmission
Fluid on page 10‑23.
.
ZR1 Only: Intercooler system
drain, flush, and refill (or every
five years, whichever occurs
first). See Engine Coolant on
page 10‑29.
.
Engine drive belts inspection
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 160 000 km/100,000 Miles
for fraying, excessive cracks,
or obvious damage (or every
10 years, whichever occurs
first). Replace, if needed.
.
Evaporative control system
.
Automatic transmission fluid
inspection. Check all fuel and
vapor lines and hoses for proper
hook‐up, routing, and condition.
Check that the purge valve,
if the vehicle has one, works
properly. Replace as needed.
An Emission Control Service.
change (normal service).
See Automatic Transmission
Fluid on page 10‑23.
.
Spark plug replacement and
spark plug wires inspection.
An Emission Control Service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-6
Service and Maintenance
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
The engine requires engine oil approved to the dexos™ specification.
Oils meeting this specification can be identified with the dexos™
certification mark. Look for and use only an engine oil that displays the
dexos™ certification mark of the proper viscosity grade. See Engine Oil on
page 10‑15.
Engine Oil
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on page 10‑29.
Engine Coolant
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on page 10‑29.
ZR1 Only: Intercooler System
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88862806,
in Canada 88862807).
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Hydraulic Brake System
Windshield Washer
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid. Use only GM Part No. U.S. 88958860,
in Canada 88901244, Super DOT-4 brake fluid.
Hydraulic Clutch System
GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
in Canada 89021186).
Power Steering System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
11-7
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Chassis Lubrication
(Rear Toe‐Link Outer Ends with ZO6,
ZR1, or Z51 Option)
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Manual Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88861800,
in Canada 88861801).
DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Manual Transmission
Automatic Transmission
Key Lock Cylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Rear Axle (Limited-Slip Differential) DEXRON® LS Gear Oil. See Rear Axle on page 10‑44.
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and
Release Pawl
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in
Canada 992723) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Hood and Door Hinges
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518)
or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Weatherstrip Conditioning
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-8
Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part
GM Part Number
ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
6.2L LS3 V8 and 7.0L LS7 V8 Engines
6.2L LS9 V8 Supercharged Engine
Engine Oil Filter
15776148
25940997
A3077C
A3107C
6.2L LS3 V8 Engine
89017524
12626224
12626224
12626224
15848592
PF48
6.2L LS3 V8 Engine with Z52 Dry Sump Oil System
6.2L LS9 V8 Supercharged Engine
7.0L LS7 V8 Engine
UPF-48R
UPF-48R
UPF-48R
CF139
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element
Spark Plug
6.2L LS3 V8 Engine
12621258
12571165
12571165
41-110
41-104
41-104
6.2L LS9 V8 Supercharged Engine
7.0L LS7 V8 Engine
Wiper Blades — 52.5 cm (20.7 in)
Driver Side
12335960
12335961
—
—
Passenger Side
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
11-9
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-10
Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Serviced By
Odometer
Reading
Date
Services Performed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
11-11
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Serviced By
Odometer
Reading
Date
Services Performed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-12
Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Serviced By
Odometer
Reading
Date
Services Performed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Data
12-1
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification
Technical Data
The eighth character in the VIN
is the engine code. This code
identifies the vehicle's engine,
specifications, and replacement
parts. See “Engine Specifications”
under Capacities and Specifications
on page 12‑2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Service Parts Identification
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-5
Service Parts
Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the glove
box, has the following information:
This legal identifier is in the front
corner of the instrument panel, on
the left side of the vehicle. It can be
seen through the windshield from
outside. The VIN also appears on
the Vehicle Certification and Service
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.
.
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
.
Model designation
.
Paint information
.
Production options and special
equipment
Do not remove this label from the
vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-2
Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 11‑6 for more information.
Capacities
Application
Metric
English
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant label located under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Cooling System
6.2L LS3 V8 Engine
11.3 L
12.0 L
11.9 qt
12.7 qt
6.2L LS9 V8 Supercharged Engine – Cooling System
6.2L LS9 V8 Supercharged Engine – Supercharger
Intercooler Cooling System
4.9 L
5.2 qt
7.0L LS7 V8 Engine
Engine Oil with Filter
11.3 L
11.9 qt
6.2L LS3 V8
5.7 L
9.9 L
6.0 qt
6.2L LS3 V8 with Z52 Dry Sump Oil System
10.5 qt
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Data
12-3
Capacities
English
10.5 qt
Application
Metric
9.9 L
6.2L LS9 V8 Supercharged Engine
7.0L LS7 V8 Engine
9.9 L
10.5 qt
Fuel Tank
68.0 L
18.0 gal
Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission (Pan Removal and Filter
Replacement)
6.2 L
6.5 qt
Manual Transmission – Base
Manual Transmission – Z16
Manual Transmission – Z06
Manual Transmission – ZR1
Wheel Nut Torque
3.5 L
4.0 L
3.6 qt
4.2 qt
4.3 L
4.5 qt
4.3 L
4.5 qt
140 Y
100 lb ft
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-4
Technical Data
Engine Specifications
Transmission
Engine
VIN Code
Spark Plug Gap
Firing Order
Automatic
6.2L LS3 V8
W
1.016 mm (0.040 in)
1–8–7–2–6–5–4–3
Manual
Manual
Manual
6.2L LS9 V8
7.0L LS7 V8
T
1.016 mm (0.040 in)
1.016 mm (0.040 in)
1–8–7–2–6–5–4–3
1–8–7–2–6–5–4–3
E
Engine Data
Torque
Engine
Horsepower
Displacement
Compression Ratio
6.2L LS3 V8 without
option NPP
430 @ 5900 rpm
436 @ 5900 rpm
424 lb ft @ 4600 rpm
428 lb ft @ 4600 rpm
6.2L
10.69:1
6.2L LS3 V8 with
option NPP
6.2L
10.69:1
6.2L LS9 V8
Supercharged
638 @ 6500 rpm
505 @ 6300 rpm
604 lb ft @ 3800 rpm
470 lb ft @ 4800 rpm
6.2L
7.0L
9.10:1
7.0L LS7 V8
11.00:1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Data
12-5
Engine Drive Belt Routing
6.2L LS9 V8 Engine
6.2L LS3 V8, 7.0L LS7 V8 Engines
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-6
Technical Data
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-1
Courtesy Transportation
Customer Information
Customer
Information
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Collision Damage Repair . . . 13-12
Service Publications
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure (United States
and Canada)
Your satisfaction and goodwill are
important to your dealer and to
Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the
operation of the vehicle will be
resolved by the dealer's sales or
service departments. Sometimes,
however, despite the best intentions
of all concerned, misunderstandings
can occur. If your concern has not
been resolved to your satisfaction,
the following steps should be taken:
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-15
Customer Information
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure (United States
and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-3
Customer Assistance Offices
(United States and
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Customer Assistance Offices
(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-6
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-6
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Roadside Assistance Program
(United States and
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Roadside Assistance
Program (Mexico) . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Scheduling Service
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to
the United States
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Reporting Safety Defects to
the Canadian
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-17
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-19
Radio Frequency
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
with a member of dealership
management. Normally, concerns
can be quickly resolved at that level.
If the matter has already been
reviewed with the sales, service,
or parts manager, contact the owner
of the dealership or the general
manager.
Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-2
Customer Information
STEP TWO: If after contacting a
member of dealership management,
it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without
further help, in the U.S., call the
Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-222-1020. In
Canada, call General Motors of
Canada Customer Communication
Centre at 1-800-263-3777 (English),
or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
When contacting Chevrolet,
remember that your concern will
likely be resolved at a dealer's
facility. That is why we suggest
following Step One first.
case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with
the decision given in your case,
you may reject it and proceed with
any other venue for relief available
to you.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:
Both General Motors and your
dealer are committed to making
sure you are completely satisfied
with your new vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied
after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two,
you can file with the Better Business
Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program
to enforce your rights.
You may contact the BBB Auto
Line Program using the toll-free
telephone number or write them
at the following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business
Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
We encourage you to call the
toll-free number in order to give
your inquiry prompt attention.
Have the following information
available to give the Customer
Assistance representative:
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
The BBB Auto Line Program is an
out of court program administered
by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive
disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may
be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior
to filing a court action, use of the
program is free of charge and your
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
.
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). This is available from
the vehicle registration or title,
or the plate at the top left of the
instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.
This program is available in
all 50 states and the District of
Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
vehicle age, mileage, and other
factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility
limitations and/or discontinue its
participation in this program.
.
Dealership name and location.
.
Vehicle delivery date and
present mileage.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-3
STEP THREE — Canadian
For further information concerning
eligibility in the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685,
or call the General Motors
Customer Communication Centre,
1-800-263-3777 (English),
1-800-263-7854 (French),
or write to:
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure (Mexico)
Owners: In the event that you
do not feel your concerns have
been addressed after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One
and Two, General Motors of Canada
Limited wants you to be aware
of its participation in a no-charge
Mediation/Arbitration Program.
General Motors of Canada Limited
has committed to binding arbitration
of owner disputes involving
factory-related vehicle service
claims. The program provides for
the review of the facts involved by
an impartial third party arbiter, and
may include an informal hearing
before the arbiter. The program is
designed so that the entire dispute
settlement process, from the time
you file your complaint to the final
decision, should be completed in
about 70 days. We believe our
impartial program offers advantages
over courts in most jurisdictions
because it is informal, quick, and
free of charge.
The Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication
Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Did you get the Warranty Extension
Plan? This plan is recommended by
General Motors to supplement the
warranty included with your new
vehicle purchase.
See your dealer for details.
Your inquiry should be accompanied
by the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-4
Customer Information
If you have a problem that has not
been satisfactorily handled through
the normal means, we suggest the
following steps:
Step Three
Customer Assistance
Procedure
If your case is not resolved in a
reasonable amount of time by your
dealer, please call the General
Motors Customer Assistance
Center (CAC) and provide the
following information:
Owner satisfaction and goodwill are
very important to your dealer and
General Motors.
Step One
Explain your case to the dealer
service agent, service manager,
dealer sales agent, or sales
Normally, any problem with the
transaction, sale, or usage of
your vehicle must be handled
by your dealer sales or service
departments. However, we
recognize that despite the good
intentions of all parties involved,
sometimes a misunderstanding
may occur.
.
Name
manager, depending on your case.
.
.
.
.
.
Address
Make sure that they have all
necessary information. They are
interested in your continual
satisfaction.
Phone number
Model year
Brand
Step Two
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
If you are not satisfied, please
contact the general manager or the
dealership owner to ask for their
help. If they are not able to resolve
your case, ask them to contact the
right people at General Motors for
support, if needed.
.
.
.
.
.
Mileage
Delivery date
Description of the problem
Dealership name
Dealership address
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-5
See Customer Assistance Offices
(United States and Canada) on
page 13‑5 or Customer Assistance
Offices (Mexico) on page 13‑5 for
more information.
From Puerto Rico:
Mexico, Central America, and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.
Virgin Islands)
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
General Motors de Mexico,
S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Av. Ejercito Nacional #843
Col. Granada
Customer Assistance
Offices (United States
and Canada)
Chevrolet encourages customers
to call the toll-free number for
assistance. However, if a customer
wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,
the letter should be addressed to:
Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre,
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gm.ca
C.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-466-0800
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0800
Customer Assistance
Offices (Mexico)
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text
Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-268-6800
United States
To contact the Customer Assistance
Center (CAC), use the phone
numbers listed in this section.
Customer assistance is available
Monday through Friday, 08:00 to
20:00 hours, and Saturdays from
08:00 to 15:00 hours.
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
www.Chevrolet.com
Overseas
Please contact the local General
Motors Business Unit.
1-800-222-1020
All e-mail inquiries to the Customer
Assistance Center (CAC) should be
sent to: [email protected].
1-800-833-2438 (For Text
Telephone Devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-243-8872
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-6
Customer Information
Mexico
El Salvador
Online Owner Center
800-6273
From Mexico City
Chevrolet Owner
Center (U.S.) —
www.chevyownercenter.com
5329-0811
Honduras
800-0122-6101
From Other Mexico Locations
Information and services
customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient
place.
01-800-466-0811
Customer Assistance for
Text Telephone (TTY)
Users
To assist customers who are deaf,
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired
and who use Text Telephones
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY
United States and Canada
1-866-466-8190
.
Digital owner manual, warranty
Costa Rica
information, and more
.
00-800-052-1005
Store online service and
maintenance records
Guatemala
.
Chevrolet dealer locator for
equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY
1-800-999-5252
service nationwide
user in the U.S. can communicate
with Chevrolet by dialing:
1-800-833-2438. TTY users in
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.
Panama
.
Exclusive privileges and offers
00-800-052-0001
.
Recall notices for your specific
vehicle
Dominican Republic
.
OnStar and GM Cardmember
Services Earnings summaries
1-888-751-5301
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
GM Mobility
13-7
Other Helpful Links
Here are a few of the valuable
tools and services you will have
access to:
Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com
Reimbursement Program
Chevrolet Merchandise —
www.chevymall.com
.
My Showroom: Find and save
information on vehicles and
current offers in your area.
Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/
pages/mds/helpcenter/faq.do
.
My Dealers: Save details such
.
FAQ
as address and phone number
for each of your preferred GM
dealers.
.
Contact Us
This program is available to
qualified applicants for cost
reimbursement of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment
required for your vehicle, such as
hand controls or a wheelchair/
scooter lift for the vehicle.
My GM Canada
(Canada) — www.gm.ca
.
My Driveway: Access quick
links to parts and service
estimates, check trade-in
values, or schedule a service
appointment by adding the
vehicles you own to your
driveway profile.
My GM Canada is a
password-protected section of
www.gm.ca where you can save
information on GM vehicles, get
personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
For more information on the limited
offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or
call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text
Telephone (TTY) users, call
1-800-833-9935.
.
My Preferences: Manage your
profile and use tools and forms
with greater ease.
To sign up, visit the My GM.ca
section within www.gm.ca.
General Motors of Canada
also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)
for details. TTY users call
1-800-263-3830.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-8
Customer Information
.
.
Model, year, color, and license
plate number of the vehicle
Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right
to limit services or payment to an
owner or driver if they decide the
claims are made too often, or the
same type of claim is made many
times.
Roadside Assistance
Program (United States
and Canada)
For U.S.‐purchased vehicles,
call 1‐800‐243‐8872; (Text
Odometer reading, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), and
delivery date of the vehicle
.
Description of the problem
Telephone (TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438).
Coverage
Services Provided
For Canadian‐purchased vehicles,
call 1-800-268-6800.
Services are provided up to
5 years/160 000 km (100,000 miles),
whichever comes first.
.
Emergency Fuel Delivery:
Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest
service station.
Service is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year.
In the U.S., anyone driving the
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a
person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not
covered.
Calling for Assistance
.
Lock‐Out Service: Service to
When calling Roadside Assistance,
have the following information
ready:
unlock the vehicle if you are
locked out. A remote unlock may
be available if you have OnStar.
For security reasons, the driver
must present identification
.
Roadside Assistance is not a part of
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to
make any changes or discontinue
the Roadside Assistance program
at any time without notification.
Your name, home address, and
home telephone number
before this service is given.
.
Telephone number of your
.
Emergency Tow From a Public
location
Road or Highway: Tow to the
nearest Chevrolet dealer for
warranty service, or if the vehicle
was in a crash and cannot be
driven. Assistance is also given
when the vehicle is stuck in the
sand, mud, or snow.
.
Location of the vehicle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-9
.
Flat Tire Change: Service to
change a flat tire with the spare
tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
must be in good condition and
properly inflated. It is the owner's
responsibility for the repair or
replacement of the tire if it is
not covered by the warranty.
Canada Limited requires
pre-authorization, original
Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
detailed receipts, and a copy
of the repair orders. Once
authorization has been received,
the Roadside Assistance advisor
will help to make arrangements
and explain how to receive
payment.
.
Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement
is approximately $5 Canadian.
Diesel fuel delivery may be
restricted. Propane and other
fuels are not provided through
this service.
.
Battery Jump Start: Service to
jump start a dead battery.
.
Lock-Out Service: Vehicle
.
Alternative Service: If
assistance cannot be provided
right away, the Roadside
Assistance advisor may
give permission to get local
emergency road service.
You will receive payment, up to
$100, after sending the original
receipt to Roadside Assistance.
Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for
parts and labor for repairs not
covered by the warranty are the
owner responsibility.
registration is required.
Services Not Included in
Roadside Assistance
.
Trip Routing Service: Detailed
maps of North America are
provided when requested either
with the most direct route or the
most scenic route. There is a
limit of six requests per year.
Additional travel information
is also available. Allow
.
Impound towing caused by
violation of any laws.
.
Legal fines.
.
Mounting, dismounting,
or changing of snow tires,
chains, or other traction devices.
three weeks for delivery.
.
Towing or services for vehicles
driven on a non-public road or
highway.
.
Trip Interruption Benefits and
Assistance: Must be over
250 kilometers from where
your trip was started to
qualify. General Motors of
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-10
Customer Information
Roadside Assistance
Program (Mexico)
Scheduling Service
Appointments
Courtesy Transportation
Program
Roadside Assistance is available
24 hours a day, 365 days of
the year.
When your vehicle requires
warranty service, contact
your dealer and request an
appointment. By scheduling
a service appointment and
advising your service consultant
of your transportation needs, your
dealer can help minimize your
inconvenience.
To enhance your ownership
experience, we and our participating
dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support
program for vehicles with the
Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty
Coverage period in Canada),
extended powertrain, and/or
For detailed information about
Roadside Assistance, please see
the brochure provided with your
new vehicle or visit our website
at: www.chevrolet.com.mx. Click on
“Asistencia en el Camino.” E-mail
correspondence should be sent to:
hybrid‐specific warranties in
both the U.S. and Canada.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled
into the service department
Several Courtesy Transportation
options are available to assist in
reducing your inconvenience when
warranty repairs are required.
immediately, keep driving it until
it can be scheduled for service,
unless, of course, the problem is
safety related. If it is, please call
your dealership, let them know this,
and ask for instructions.
To contact Roadside Assistance by
phone, use the following numbers:
Mexico
Courtesy Transportation is not a
part of the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. A separate booklet
entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished
with each new vehicle provides
detailed warranty coverage
information.
01-800-466-0800
United States
If the dealer requests you to bring
the vehicle for service, you are
urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the
same day repair.
1-866-466-8901
Canada
1-800-268-6800
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-11
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Transportation Options
Your dealer may arrange to provide
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or
reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is
kept for an overnight warranty
repair. Rental reimbursement
will be limited and must be
supported by original receipts.
This requires that you sign and
complete a rental agreement
and meet state/provincial, local,
and rental vehicle provider
requirements. Requirements vary
and may include minimum age
requirements, insurance coverage,
credit card, etc. You are responsible
for fuel usage charges and may also
be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage,
or rental usage beyond the
Warranty service can generally
be completed while you wait.
If your vehicle requires overnight
warranty repairs, and public
However, if you are unable to
wait, GM helps to minimize your
inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending
on the circumstances, your dealer
can offer you one of the following:
transportation is used instead
of the dealer's shuttle service,
the expense must be supported
by original receipts and can only
be up to the maximum amount
allowed by GM for shuttle service.
In addition, for U.S. customers,
should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited
reimbursement for reasonable
fuel expenses may be available.
Claim amounts should reflect actual
costs and be supported by original
receipts. See your dealer for
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred
means of offering Courtesy
Transportation. Dealers may provide
shuttle service to get you to your
destination with minimal interruption
of your daily schedule. This includes
one‐way or round‐trip shuttle service
within reasonable time and distance
parameters of the dealer's area.
information regarding the allowance
amounts for reimbursement of fuel
or other transportation costs.
completion of the repair.
It may not be possible to provide a
like vehicle as a courtesy rental.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-12
Customer Information
Recycled original equipment
Additional Program
Information
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in
parts may also be used for repair.
These parts are typically removed
from vehicles that were total losses
in prior crashes. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from
undamaged sections of the vehicle.
A recycled original equipment GM
part may be an acceptable choice to
maintain your vehicle's originally
designed appearance and safety
performance; however, the history of
these parts is not known. Such parts
are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
related failures are not covered by
that warranty.
All program options, such as
shuttle service, may not be available
at every dealer. Please contact
your dealer for specific information
about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate
dealer personnel.
a collision and it is damaged,
have the damage repaired by
a qualified technician using the
proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed
collision repairs diminish your
vehicle's resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised
in subsequent collisions.
General Motors reserves the
right to unilaterally modify,
Collision Parts
change, or discontinue Courtesy
Transportation at any time and
to resolve all questions of claim
eligibility pursuant to the terms and
conditions described herein at its
sole discretion.
Genuine GM Collision parts are
new parts made with the same
materials and construction methods
as the parts with which your vehicle
was originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are your best choice
to ensure that your vehicle's
designed appearance, durability,
and safety are preserved. The use
of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are
also available. These are made
by companies other than GM and
may not have been tested for
your vehicle. As a result, these parts
may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems,
and may not perform properly
in subsequent collisions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-13
Aftermarket parts are not covered
by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any vehicle failure
related to such parts is not covered
by that warranty.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing
company may require you to have
insurance that ensures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or
Genuine Manufacturer replacement
parts. Read your lease carefully, as
you may be charged at the end of
your lease for poor quality repairs.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your
GM vehicle with comprehensive
and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in
the quality of coverage afforded by
various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide
reduced protection to your GM
vehicle by limiting compensation
for damage repairs by using
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you
choose a collision repair facility that
meets your needs before you ever
need collision repairs. Your dealer
may have a collision repair center
with GM-trained technicians and
state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be
able to recommend a collision
repair center that has GM-trained
technicians and comparable
equipment.
If a Crash Occurs
If there has been an injury, call
emergency services for help. Do not
leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of.
Move the vehicle only if its position
puts you in danger, or you are
instructed to move it by a police
officer.
aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not
specify aftermarket collision parts.
When purchasing insurance, we
recommend that you ensure that
your vehicle will be repaired with
GM original equipment collision
parts. If such insurance coverage
is not available from your current
insurance carrier, consider switching
to another insurance carrier.
Give only the necessary information
to police and other parties involved
in the crash.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-14
Customer Information
For emergency towing see
Choose a reputable repair facility
that uses quality replacement parts.
See “Collision Parts” earlier in this
section.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair,
but you must live with the repair.
Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may
initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
your repair professional, and insist
on Genuine GM parts. Remember,
if your vehicle is leased, you may
be obligated to have the vehicle
repaired with Genuine GM parts,
even if your insurance coverage
does not pay the full cost.
Roadside Assistance Program
(United States and Canada) on
page 13‑8 or Roadside Assistance
Program (Mexico) on page 13‑10.
If the airbag has inflated, see What
Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates? on page 3‑28.
Gather the following information:
.
Driver's name, address, and
telephone number
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
.
Driver's license number
.
In the event that your vehicle
requires damage repairs, GM
recommends that you take an
active role in its repair. If you have
a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there,
or have it towed there. Specify
to the facility that any required
replacement collision parts be
original equipment parts, either
new Genuine GM parts or recycled
original GM parts. Remember,
recycled parts will not be covered
by your GM vehicle warranty.
Owner's name, address, and
telephone number
.
Vehicle license plate number
If another party's insurance
.
company is paying for the repairs,
you are not obligated to accept
a repair valuation based on that
insurance company's collision
policy repair limits, as you have no
contractual limits with that company.
In such cases, you can have control
of the repair and parts choices as
long as the cost stays within
reasonable limits.
Vehicle make, model, and
model year
.
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
.
Insurance company and policy
number
.
General description of the
damage to the other vehicle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-15
ORDER TOLL FREE:
1-800-551-4123 Monday - Friday
8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time
Owner Information
Service Publications
Ordering Information
Owner publications are written
specifically for owners and intended
to provide basic operational
information about the vehicle.
The Owner Manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all
models.
Service Manuals
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit
Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com
Service Manuals have the diagnosis
and repair information on the
engines, transmission, axle,
suspension, brakes, electrical,
steering, body, etc.
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,
Owner Manual, and Warranty
Booklet.
Service Bulletins
Prices are subject to change
without notice and without incurring
obligation. Allow ample time for
delivery.
Service Bulletins give additional
technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks.
Each bulletin contains instructions
to assist in the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
shipping fees
Without Portfolio: Owner
Manual only.
Note to Canadian Customers: All
listed prices are quoted in U.S.
funds. Canadian residents are to
make checks payable in U.S. funds.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
shipping fees
Current and Past Models
Technical Service Bulletins and
Manuals are available for current
and past model GM vehicles.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-16
Customer Information
of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual
problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
Reporting Safety Defects
to the Canadian
Government
If you live in Canada, and you
believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, notify Transport
Canada immediately, and notify
General Motors of Canada Limited.
Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or
write to:
Reporting Safety
Defects
Reporting Safety Defects
to the United States
Government
If you believe that your vehicle
has a defect which could cause
a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may
call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington, D.C. 20590
If NHTSA receives similar
You can also obtain
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that
a safety defect exists in a group
other information about
motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-17
Reporting Safety Defects
to General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or
Transport Canada) in a situation like
this, notify General Motors.
Event Data Recorders
Vehicle Data
Recording and
Privacy
Your GM vehicle has a number of
sophisticated computers that record
information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven.
For example, your vehicle uses
computer modules to monitor and
control engine and transmission
performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment
and deploy airbags in a crash, and,
if so equipped, to provide antilock
braking to help the driver control the
vehicle. These modules may store
data to help your dealer technician
service your vehicle. Some modules
may also store data about how you
operate the vehicle, such as rate of
fuel consumption or average speed.
These modules may also retain the
owner’s personal preferences, such
as radio pre-sets, seat positions,
and temperature settings.
This vehicle has an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose
of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an airbag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that
will assist in understanding how
a vehicle's systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and
safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed
to record such data as:
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854
(French), or write:
.
How various systems in your
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre,
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
vehicle were operating
.
Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened
.
How far, if at all, the driver was
pressing the accelerator and/or
brake pedal
.
How fast the vehicle was
traveling
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-18
Customer Information
OnStar®
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances
in which crashes and injuries occur.
manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
If your vehicle is equipped with
an active OnStar system, that
system may also record data in
crash or near crash‐like situations.
The OnStar Terms and Conditions
provides information on data
collection and use and is available
in the OnStar glove box kit,
Important: EDR data is recorded
by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal
driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age,
and crash location) is recorded.
However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine
the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data
GM will not access this data or
share it with others except: with the
consent of the vehicle owner or,
if the vehicle is leased, with the
consent of the lessee; in response
to an official request by police or
similar government office; as part
of GM's defense of litigation through
the discovery process; or, as
at www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
www.onstar.ca (Canada), or by
pressing the Q button and
speaking to an advisor.
routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
required by law. Data that GM
Navigation System
collects or receives may also be
used for GM research needs or may
be made available to others for
research purposes, where a need is
shown and the data is not tied to a
specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
If the vehicle has a navigation
system, use of the system may
result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and
other trip information. Refer to the
navigation system operating manual
for information on stored data and
for deletion instructions.
To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-19
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
Radio Frequency
Statement
RFID technology is used in some
vehicles for functions such as tire
pressure monitoring and ignition
system security, as well as in
connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door
locking/unlocking and starting, and
in-vehicle transmitters for garage
door openers. RFID technology in
GM vehicles does not use or record
personal information or link with
any other GM system containing
personal information.
This vehicle has systems that
operate on a radio frequency that
comply with Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS‐210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. The device may not cause
interference.
2. The device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
Changes or modifications to any of
these systems by other than an
authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-20
Customer Information
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-1
Airbag System (cont.)
What Will You See After
Appearance Care
A
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Assistance Program,
Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8, 13-10
Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Audio System
Diversity Antenna System . . . . 7-11
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
Automatic
Dimming Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-28
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
Automatic Transmission
Accessories and
an Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . .3-28
When Should an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-24
Airbags
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Active Handling System . . . . . . . 9-37
Active Handling System
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Add-On Electrical
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 3-35
Adjustments
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-24
Air Dam, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Air Filter, Passenger
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Airbag System
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
How Does an Airbag
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
Passenger Sensing
Adding Equipment to the
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-17
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Servicing Airbag-Equipped
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
Alarm System
Anti-Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Antenna
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Anti-Theft
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-50
Antilock Brake
Shift Lock Control
Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-2
INDEX
Bulb Replacement (cont.)
Headlamps, Front Turn
Signal and Parking
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
High Intensity Discharge
(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Taillamps, Turn Signal
and Stoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Cargo
B
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Cautions, Danger, and
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Exterior Lighting Battery
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
Check
Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Child Restraints
Infants and Young
Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Voltage and Charging
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-46
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Boost Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
C
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39
Lower Anchors and
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
California
Tethers for Children . . .3-43, 3-44
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-48
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Cleaning
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90
Climate Control Systems
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-49
Perchlorate Materials
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Carbon Monoxide
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-3
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Cluster, IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-12
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Competitive Driving Mode . . . . . 9-38
Competitive Driving, Racing
or Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Convertible Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Coolant
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5
Text Telephone (TTY)
Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6
Customer Information
Service Publications
Door
Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Driver Information
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Driving
Competitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . .9-10
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .9-13
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-14
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Driving for Better Fuel
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-15
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1, 13-3
D
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Engine Temperature
Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-12
Danger, Warnings, and
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Cooling System . . . . . . . .10-28, 10-29
Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Courtesy Transportation
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Covers
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-17
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Displays
Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22, 1-23
Dual Automatic Climate
Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Head-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-4
INDEX
Engine (cont.)
Fluid
Automatic Transmission . . . . 10-23
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Fog Lamps
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Front Air Dam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Front Fog Lamps
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Front Seats
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-53
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-49
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-49
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48
Requirements, California . . . . .9-49
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
E
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-27
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
Engine Oil
Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Entry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-17
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-2
Exterior Lighting Battery
Electrical Equipment,
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Electrical System
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Check and Service Engine
Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Compartment Overview . . . . . 10-10
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Coolant Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Cooling System . . . . . . 10-28, 10-29
Cooling System Messages . . .5-39
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-5
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Overheated Protection
Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
F
Features
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-4
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-5
Fuel Economy
Driving for Better . . . . . . .1-22, 1-23
Fuses
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Gauges (cont.)
Headlamps (cont.)
High Intensity Discharge
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Warning Lights and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
General Information
Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-25
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-25
Twilight Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-67
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-10
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
How to Wear Safety Belts
G
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-64
Gasoline
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49
Gauges
H
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-4
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . . . 5-31
Headlamps
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Daytime Running
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Boost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Engine Coolant
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-6
INDEX
LATCH System
Replacing Parts After a
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-48
Latch, Lower Anchors
and Tethers for
I
L
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Infants and Young Children,
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-61
Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Lamps
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii, 7-1
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2
Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Exterior Lamps Off
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Exterior Lighting Battery
Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Headlamps, Front Turn
Signal and Parking
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-18
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43, 3-44
Latches, Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Lifting the Vehicle, Tires . . . . . . . 10-5
Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Lighting
Entry/Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Lights
Active Handling System . . . . . .5-23
Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Antilock Brake System
(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
J
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82
K
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-42
Keyless Entry
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-7
Lights (cont.)
Messages (cont.)
M
Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
One-to-Four Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-16
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Traction Control System
(TCS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Locks
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Lower Anchors and
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-49
Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-50
Starting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .5-50
Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-51
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-53
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-54
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-54
Mirrors
Maintenance
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Maintenance Schedule
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-18
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Messages
Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . .5-50
Battery Voltage and
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Automatic Dimming
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Convertible Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-39
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Monitor System, Tire
Tethers for Children
(LATCH SYSTEM) . . . . . 3-43, 3-44
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-8
INDEX
Outlets
Phone
N
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Overheated Engine
Protection
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18
Power
Navigation System
Vehicle Data Recording
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-21
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Pregnancy, Using Safety
Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Privacy
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-19
Program
Courtesy Transportation . . . . 13-10
Proposition 65 Warning,
and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
P
O
Panel, Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Park
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Off-Road
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35
Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-45
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-26
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-30
Perchlorate Materials
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Oil
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-22
Engine Oil Pressure
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-37
One-to-Four Shift Light . . . . . . . . 5-22
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Operation, Infotainment
California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-9
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Records
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Recreational Vehicle
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
Reimbursement Program,
GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Replacement Parts
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-36
Replacing LATCH System
Reporting Safety Defects
R
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-16
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Ride Control Systems
Active Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37
Limited Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .9-42
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Selective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42
Roadside Assistance
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8, 13-10
Roof Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-5
Run-Flat Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Running the Vehicle While
Racing or Other Competitive
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-19
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Radios
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42
Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Rearview Mirrors
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Replacing Safety Belt
System Parts After a
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Recommended Fluids and
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-10
INDEX
Seats (cont.)
Shifting
S
Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-6
Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-3
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Securing Child Restraints . . . . . . 3-48
Security
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Service
Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Signals, Turn and
Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Specifications and
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Starting the Vehicle
Messsages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Storage
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-49
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Replacing After a Crash . . . . . .3-22
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-20
Safety Defects Reporting
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-16
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 11-2
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 13-10
Seatback Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Seats
Accessories and
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-8
Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 11-9
Maintenance, General
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1
Publications Ordering
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Scheduling Appointments . . . 13-10
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-50
Servicing the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 3-34
Shift Lock Control Function
Check, Automatic
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Storage Areas
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-11
Tires (cont.)
Transmission
T
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
Run-Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Terminology and
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-78
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Towing
General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-54
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-86
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
Traction
Active Handling System . . . . . .9-37
Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-36
Control System Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .9-42
Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . .9-42
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28
Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-53
One-to-Four Shift Light . . . . . . .5-22
Transportation Program,
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Twilight Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Taillamps
Turn Signal, and
Stoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-6
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-14
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Tires
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-69
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
Lifting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5
Low Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-51
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-68
U
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76
Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-64
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-69
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-64
Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-12
INDEX
V
W
Vehicle
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . . . 5-54
Wheels
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-14
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-55
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
Vehicle Care
Alignment and Tire
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Service Parts Identification
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
When It Is Time for New
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Vehicle Reminder
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Windshield
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|